Schulenburg's Tsimshian grammar - Oregon State University

AN ABSTRACT OF THE THESIS OF

Virginia Carroll Flaherty for the degree of Master of Arts

in Interdisciplinary Studies in Anthropology, English, and Foreign

Languages and Literatures presented on March 9, 1979

Title: SCHULENBURG'S TSIMSHIAN GRAMMAR

Abstract approved Redacted for Privacy'Walt C. Kraft

Part One, "The Grammar" of A. C. Graf von der Schulenburg's

Die Sprache der Zimshran-Indianer in Nordwest-America (TheLanguage of the Tsimshian Indians in Northwest America)Braunschweig: Richard Sattler, 1894, has been translated from

German into English under the title Schulenburg's Tsimshian Gram-

mar. Glosses from Part Two, "The Glossary, " have been providedin translation when their inclusion clarifies or aids in the understand-ing of points of grammar, word lists, or language samples. Refer-

ences by Schulenburg to source materials have been expanded into amore complete form whenever it was possible to do so from thematerials available. Corrections in borrowed materials have beenmade whenever the need for such was noted.

C) Copyright by Virginia Carroll FlahertyMay 1979

All Rights Reserved

Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar

by

Virginia Carroll Flaherty

A THESIS

submitted to

Oregon State University

in partial fulfillment ofthe requirements for the

degree of

Master of Arts

Completed March 1979

Commencement June 1979

APPROVED:

Redacted for PrivacyProfessor German and Linguistics

in charge of major

Redacted for Privacy

Associate Proas-sor of English

Redacted for PrivacyAssistant Professor of Anthropology

Redacted for PrivacyHead - of Foreign Languages and Literatur6

Redacted for Privacy

Dean of Graduate School

Date thesis is presented March 9, 1979

Typed by Clover Redfern for Virginia Carroll Flaherty

ACKNOWLEDGMENTS

Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar represents a focusing of myexplorations and interests, and it gives me great pleasure to acknowl-edge those who have been influential in whatever accomplishment this

translation may represent.I would like to express my appreciation to Bob Kiekel who was

instrumental in organizing my MAIS degree program and committee.

I was fortunate in having an excellent committee Dorice

Tentchoff, Hubert Wubben, Richard Daniels, and Walter Kraft. Theirsuggestions and expertise have been very helpful. Walter Kraft

deserves special thanks. He devoted many hours to overseeing theactual translating.

My sincere thanks go, too, to John A. Dunn, a committeemember until taking a position at the University of Oklahoma. Hesuggested the project, itself, and his knowledge and enthusiasm havebeen much appreciated.

I am eternally grateful to Christine Sjogren for her insight andher encouragement, in general. Her friendship is a continuing sourceof inspiration.

My most heartfelt appreciation is reserved for my family fortheir understanding, their patience, and their help. With love and

gratitude, I mention my husband, Frank, especially; our children,Stephanie and Griffith; and my parents, Virginia and Elmer Kerns.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TRANSLATOR'S INTRODUCTION

Page

1

PREFACE PAGES 8

Schulenburg's Title Page 8

Schulenburg's Dedication 9

Schulenburg's Forward 10Schulenburg's Table of Contents 12Schulenburg's Ethnological Introduction 26

SCHULENBURG'S BOOK I: THE GRAMMAR 36Chapter I: Phonology and Stress 37Chapter II: The Structure of the Language 41Chapter III: The Pronouns 62Chapter IV: The Verb 81Chapter V: Formatives 96Chapter VI: Numerals 143Chapter VII: The Simple Sentence 168Chapter VIII: The Complex Sentence and the Means

for Joining Clauses TogetherAppendix: Language SamplesSchulenburg's Corrections and Addenda

198219257

BIBLIOGRAPHY 259

SCHULENBURG'S TSIMSHIAN GRAMMAR

TRANSLATOR'S INTRODUCTION

Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar is an English translation of

the first part of Dr. A. C. Graf von der Schulenburg's analysis of one

of the dialects of the Tsimshian language, Die Sprache der

ZsimshTan-Indianer (Braunschweig: 1894). The Tsimshian Indians,

natives of northern British Columbia and southeastern Alaska, reside

on offshore islands, along the mainland coast, and in the inland ter-

ritory drained by the Nass and Skeena Rivers. According to John A.

Dunn of the University of Oklahoma, today the Tsimshian speak three

different languages which together contain a total of nine separate

dialects. These languages and their dialects make up a language

family called, appropriately, Tsimshianian.The individual languages and dialects are:

Nas s -Gitksan

Nass or Nishga

Gitksan

Kitwancool

Coast TsimshianMetlakatla (Alaska)

Port SimpsonTerrace (Kitselas)Kitkatla

Hartley Bay

Southern TsimshianKlemtu (only seven speakers left in 1977)

2

Franz Boas notes in his grammar The Tsimshian Indian122EILa_ge, a published in 1911 within the Handbook of American Indian

a,LS b that three principal dialects could be distinguished at

that time. They were the Tsimshian proper spoken on the Skeena

River, the Nissqa4 spoken on the Nass River, and the Gitkcan(Gyitkshan) spoken on the upper Skeena. Boas's grammar coveredthe first two of these dialects while the Tsimshian dialect, alone, was

the subject of the earlier Schulenburg work. The Tsimshian dialect

is Coast Tsimshian in the 1880's and 1890's.Schulenburg's work consists of the grammar, with its appendix

of language samples, and a glossary. "The Glossary, " in turn> is

made up of two parts a Tsimshian-German section and a German-

Tsimshian section. With the addition in translation of pertinentexplanatory material from "The Glossary, " and the inclusion of the

list of corrections and addenda which Schulenburg placed at the end of

The Glossary, " this English translation of "The Grammar" becomes

a. unit complete in itself. For this reason and, also, in order topreserve some sense of the original publication, Schulenburg's title

page, dedication, forward, ethnological introduction, and complete

table of contents have all be included.As Schulenburg mentions in his forward, the material upon

which he based the formulation of his grammar came out of theTsimshian text of the translations of the four Gospels made by BishopWilliam Ridley of Caledonia for the Society for Promoting Christian

Knowledge in London. These translations are listed in the bibliographyfor Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar. Also, Boas, who had visitedthe Indians of British Columbia in the winter of 1886-87 and again in

aA facsimile reproduction (1971) is available from The ShoreyBook Store, 815 Third Avenue, Seattle, Washington 98104.

bBureau of American Ethnology, bull. 40, pt. 1.

3

the summer of 1888, and Schulenburg were in communication, andSchulenburg incorporated grammatical notes and language samples

which he received from Boas into his own description of Tsimshian,

which, of course, was written in German. Schulenburg's liberal useof the Boas grammatical material appears throughout his grammar inEnglish identical in form to the Boas explanation and analysis of

Tsimshian published in 1890 in the Report of the British Association

for the Advancement of Science Committee on the Northwestern Tribes

of the Dominion of Canada. c This Report is mentioned by Schulenburg

in his forward and is listed in the bibliography for Schulenburg's

Tsimshian Grammar.These sections in English taken directly from the Report are

single spaced for identification in this English translation. In these

sections and in numerous other instances throughout "The Grammar"and The Glossary" where Tsimshian terms or words or even par-ticles of words in the Boas orthography are used, or simply given as

a point of information, Schulenburg acknowledges Boas either with

"Boas" or with "B. " If a reference to Boas in "The Grammar" can be

found in the British Association for the Advancement of Science

Report, it is cited in double brackets as "1889 Boas Report" with theappropriate page number and, when helpful, the heading on the page

under which the reference occurs is given. Occasionally, the

acknowledgement to Boas for borrowed material is missing. Themissing acknowledgement is cited within double brackets. To avoid

any possible confusion, it is to be noted that the translator andSchulenburg possessed copies of the Boas Report to the BritishAssociation for the Advancement of Science from two different

cThe Boas grammar of 1911 published by the Bureau ofAmerican Ethnology analyzes the Tsimshian materials in a completelydifferent manner.

4

sources. The pagination of the translator's copy of the Report, ascited in the bibliography, is different from the pagination of the British

Association for the Advancement of Science Report mentioned by

Schulenburg in his forward. The translator's copy of the Boasgrammatical material is found in the comprehensive report of thefifty-ninth meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of

Science held at Newcastle-Upon-Tyne in September of 1889.Apart from the individual Tsimshian words or particles of

words, themselves, Schulenburg's examples of the language are of

three types. They are either excerpts from the Book of CommonTsimshian myths recorded by Boas, or verses from the

Gospel translations made for the Society for Promoting Christian

Knowledge. The Gospel verses, more precisely portions thereof, areamply used throughout the work to illustrate points of grammar.Beginning with the third chapter where the verse examples become so

numerous, two examples out of every longer selection of examples are

included in order to illustrate each grammar rule, or word, or form

in this translation. In those places where a given form will change

depending on its environment or upon the situation, for instance,where a pronoun will change according to the preceding vowel or con-sonant, an example of each possibility is included if Schulenburg has

included it. However, like the first two chapters, the chapter on the

verb, Chapter IV, is intact. Except for the verse examples,Schulenburg borrowed all of the other material from Boas. In this

chapter, because so much of it is borrowed material, and because ofthe stated verbal character of Tsimshian (Chapter II), all ofSchulenburg's verse examples are given.

Each verse example used by Schulenburg consists of Ridley's

Tsimshian translation of the verse followed by its translation intoGerman. The German translations do not come from Martin Luther's

5

translation of the New Testament. They may be Schulenburg's

translations tailored to fit the particular case in question. Because of

the difficulties inherent in translating each of these particular exam-ples from German into English, the English translations of versewere taken from the King James Version. Whenever the King James

Version of the verse is markedly different from the German verse,the German verse is translated and the King James Version, or partsthereof, appears in double brackets appropriately labeled as such forthat one example. Whenever Schulenburg inserts his comments in

parentheses into a verse, these comments appear in double brackets inthe English translation of the verse. Occasionally, Schulenburg cites

chapter and verse but neglects to supply the example itself. These

missing examples have been provided and occur within double

brackets. In such cases, the German verse is taken from the LutherNew Testament translation. However, the information from "TheGlossary" which has been included in Schulenburg's TsimshianGrammar contains only citations of chapter and verse followingSchulenburg's own practice in "The Glossary. "

The Tsimshian myths supplied by Boas and the excerpts fromthe Common Prayer form Schulenburg's appendix to "The Grammar. "These language samples fall naturally into three groups. Samples Iand II are interlinear English translations of two Tsimshian myths;samples III and IV, interlinear German translations of two Tsimshianmyths; and sample V consists of Tsimshian Common Prayer exerpts,each of which is followed by a German translation. Samples I and II

have been left untouched; interlinear English translations have been

added to samples III and IV; and English translations follow the Ger-

man translations of Common Prayer exerpts in sample V.

Schulenburg's German translations in sample V are interspersedwith references in parentheses to sections in "The Grammar" and to

6

Tsimshian words. The English translation retains these referencesand footnotes all those which do not contain a section number of "The

Grammar." Most of these footnotes are glosses in translation ofTsimshian words from "The Glossary. 'I The footnoting has pur-

posely been done in a way such that the complexity of "The Glossary"Tsimshian-German listing can be perceived whenever the word is not

glossed under its own alphabetical listing.The translator's footnotes to the language samples in the

appendix are alphabetically ordered as elsewhere in "The Grammar"proper, and in the appendix they are placed at the end of each of thethree groups of samples to avoid interference with Schulenburg's

footnotes at the bottom of the pages. Schulenburg either orders hisfootnotes numerically throughout or indicates them with asterisks.The final parenthetical symbol ) accompanying his footnote notation has

everywhere been removed.For practical purposes, most of the additions made by the

translator to Schulenburg's work are enclosed within double bracketsand these enclosures are kept within the text. The double bracketed

enclosures include: the expanded references to the Boas Report, cor-rections of words Schulenburg has borrowed incorrectly from theBoas Report, the acknowledgement of any borrowed Boas formsunacknowledged in "The Grammar" by Schulenburg, references toother parts of "The Grammar, " glosses from "The Glossary, " andextra words missing in the original German but added in the Englishtranslation to make sense. In the interlinear language samples IIIand IV, for clarification purposes double brackets often enclose thecase notation of certain words whenever the case is obvious in

German, but not so in English. In the footnotes for language sample

V explanatory comments occurring within the actual glosses taken

from "The Glossary'? are placed in double brackets.

7

In summary, the translator's intrusions into Schulenburg's workare indicated by means of double brackets and alphabetically ordered

footnotes. Yet unmarked intrusions have been made in the instanceswhere Schulenburg's punctuation of publications has been changed.

The words Common Prayer used by Schulenburg to mean the Book of

Common Prayer have been underlined in the forward and in the fifth

language sample. In the forward, the quotation marks at the beginning

of American Philosphical Society and surrounding British Association

for the Advancement of Science have been removed and replaced by

underlining. In the ethnological introduction, Zeitschrift fur Ethnologie

has been underlined in the first footnote; Die Tlinkit-Indianer, in theseventh footnote; and British Association for the Advancement of

Science in the ninth footnote.

The charts of verb forms in # 76, # 79, # 80, and # 81 in thefourth chapter and the ordinal number chart for "the third" in # 225in the sixth chapter have been borrowed by Schulenburg from the

Boas Report and appear in Die Sprache der Zimshian Indianer in boxform just as they do in the Report. The lines surrounding the boxes

and some of the interior lines have been removed to simplify the

typing.

Schulenburg's treatment of words and letters spoken of as suchor used as illustrations is inconsistent. He sometimes does usequotation marks to set off both German and Tsimshian words. His

treatment in this regard is left undisturbed. He never uses italics forthis purpose, but he often uses double-spacing of letters in Tsimshianwords or forms. Headings in general are sometimes expanded in thisway, but when the heading is a Tsimshian word, the expansion doesnot always carry over into the use of the word or form in the text

under the heading. Although expansion is one of the ways in which

emphasis can be shown in printed German, Schulenburg's use of

7a

expansion has not been reproduced in the typewritten manuscript ofSchulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar.

Since underlining is one form of diacritic present, any mentionof words or letters as such in double brackets is not underlined toindicate italics. The diacritics in Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammarhave all been entered by hand with two exceptions: the printed

apostrophe ) becomes the typed apostrophe and the lower case .Ebecomes the typed upper case E.

The translation was made from photocopies of Die Sprache derZimshian-Indianer in Nord-west America, the four Gospels in

Tsimshiany and the Boas Report to the British Association for the

Advancement of Science. Many inconsistencies were discovered.Some were undoubtedly due to typographical errors which is under-standable in a work of this nature.

8

PREFACE PAGES

The Language

of the

Tsimshian Indians

in

Northwest-America

by

Dr. A. C. Graf von der Schulenburg

Braunschweig

Publishing House of Richard Sattler1894

9

DEDICATED

To The Memory

of his deceased unforgettable uncle

Dr. Georg von der Gabelentz

10

FORWARD

The powerful blow dealt to our philological world by the

premature death of the greatest of philologists, Professor Dr. Georgvon der Gabelentz, has shaken us deeply, and the aftereffects thereofwill be felt for a long time to come. He studied the languages of allparts of the earth with a broad perspective and, for the first time, hecompared them in a way deserving of admiration. In like manner, he

seldom gave indication of his remarkable perception of the essenceand aims of the science which he served with great enthusiasm. It

was a matter of devotion for him to be always a leader and guidingstar to the enthusiastic disciples of his discipline, to be stimulating,thorough, and instructive, in every respect.

Also my late uncle gave the principal stimulus to the presentwork; and through various suggestions he expanded, clarified, anddeepened my understanding of the structure of this language. Hemade the difficulties considerably easier for me.

It is, accordingly, a solemn obligation for me to pay tribute tomy dead uncle and to erect a memorial of my lasting gratitude to him.

The material for the construction of my grammar lay chiefly inthe text of the four Gospel translations (Am da malshk ga na damshSt. Mark... Luke, John, Matthew Society for Promoting

Christian Knowledge, London). Only later through the great kindnessof Dr, F. Boas, to whom, at this point, I also express my mostcordial thanks, did I receive his grammatical notes, as well as asmall vocabulary and some valuable samples of the language. The

grammatical notes are in print and to be found in the British Associa-tion for the Advancement of Science, "Report on the NorthwesternTribes of Canada, " 1889, pp. 81-93. The vocabulary, likewise inprint, is found in the American Philosophical Society, October 1891,

11

pp. 193-204. The language samples consist of handwritten records.Finally, when my work was nearly completed, several portions of theCommon Prayer arrived in my hands. I have taken great pains in

making use of all these sources, and I cherish the hope of presentinga complete picture of this language and of casting into bold relief its

characteristics which are of the greatest interest to comparative

philology.

I do not want to fail to mention, emphasizing with thanks, that,from the beginning to the completion of the printing, my esteemedpublisher Mr. Richard Sattler undertook my work with great diligence

and warm interest.

Nordsteimke, Braunschweig. January 1894.

12

TABLE OF CONTENTS

13

Page

ETHNOGRAPHIC INTRODUCTION 26

BOOK I

GRAMMAR

I PHONOLOGY AND STRESS 1-9 37

II. THE STRUCTURE OF THE LANGUAGE 41

Introductory Remarks 10-11 41

A. Verbal Character of the Language 12 42

B. Nominal Formation 45

1. Formation of Substantives 13-20 45

2. Formation of Adjectives 21-24 49

C. Plural Formation 25-40 50

D. General Rules of Arrangement 41-44 58

III. THE PRONOUNS 62

A. The Personal Pronoun 45-47 62

B. The Possessive Pronoun 48 71

C. Article 49-52 72

D. Pronoun lip 53 74

E. Demonstrative and DeterminativePronouns 54-62 74

F. Relative Pronouns 63-66 77

G. Interrogative Pronouns 67-69 79

H. Indefinite Pronouns 70-73 79

IV o THE VERB 81

Introductory Remarks 74 81

Intransitive Verb 75-78 81

Transitive Verb 79-81 82

Imperative 82 84

Participle 83 86

Passive 84 86

Inchoative 85 87

14

Page

Imitative 86 87

Examples for the Use of the Transitiveand Intransitive Verb 87 87

V. FORMATIVES 96


A. Dependent Formatives 97

1. Prefixes 97

ga 89htik 90gwilth 91

shil 92klthna 93kith-dun, klthum

bak 95man 96kba 97tiki 98

99

Itl-um 100

to 101

di 102

da 103sha 104

slid 105

ksha 106la 107

117 108

,gu1 109

94

Page

97

97

98

98

98

98

99

99

100

100

101

101

101

102

102

102

103

103

103

103

104

tkul 110

gwun 111

Page

104

105

15

Page

ha 112 105

kam (gum) 113 105

q (k) 114 106

hT 115 106

ksh 116 106

tka 117 107

wilth, wulth 118 107

tgwa, tgwi 119 108

oksh 120 108

shin 121 109

2. Suffixes 110

Page

sh 122 110

lth 123 110

in and un 124 112

7 125 112

ka, 126 113

urn 127 113

k (Addendurm sa and de") 128-129 114

3. Enclosing Formative 115

q-ka 130 115

B. Independent Formatives 115

L Auxiliaries of Time and Modality 115


Page

za 132 116

116zup 133

16

Page Page

shin 134gin 135

117

117

lugwil 136 118

2. Adverbs 118


Adverbs of Place 119

Page

gwa, gwai 138

ninT 139

119

119

zilum 141 119

yagwa 140 119

logum 142 120

yaga 143 120

haldum 144 120

gik 145 120

hazukshum 146 120

kbishum, kbashim 147 121

guluksha 148 121

agwT 149 121

zinsh 150 122

wazait dau 151 122

Adverbs of Time 123

Page

"'today" 152 123

'tomorrow" etc. 153 123

lthawil 154 124

giaTri 155 124

61 156 124

whaliTyg 157 125

hazish, hazush 158 125

17

Page Page

a1tha 159 125

gha, ghalam 160 125

gakpa 161 126

amgait 162 126

hashba 163 126

lugwil 164 127

hawgani. 165 127

kshgauk 166 127

shiigiaT5n 167 127

Adverbs of Manner 127

Page

shimhou 168 127

shim 169 128

shirngul 170 128

VI 171 128

wT.am 172 128

shimgit 173 128

gidi 174 129

shidi 175 129

zumz in 176 129

am 177 130

ligi 178 130

gik 179 131

hazukshum 180 131

amuksha 181 131

gup 182 131

shak 183 132

naga 184 132

niinT 185 132

shga 186 132

3. Prepositions

18

Page

133


Page

zum 188 133

lak 189 133

lakau, lak3 190 133

whati 191 134

shpag.a 192 134

nadau 193 134

qud-On 194 134

zog.ash 195 134

hazaklthk 196 135

gauk 197 135

hagau 198 136

tkulan 199 136

watk 200 136

amyl, 201 137

aw-i 202 137

wagait 203 137

adup(k) 204 137

Paraphrasing 205-206 138

a and "AT 206a 139

4. Conjunctions 207 140

5. Interjections 208 142

VI. NUMERALS

A. The Cardinal Numbers

Introductory Remarks; the various classes ofnumerals 209

143

143

143

VII.

19

Page

Chart of Cardinal Numbers 210 144-45

The Individual Numbers Beginning with "One" 211-223 143

Final Observation 224 159

B. The Ordinal Numbers 225-226 160

C. The Numeral Adverbs 227 162

D. The Distributive Numerals 228 162

E. 163Indefinite and Other Numeral Terms

Page

"another" 229. Note:

lukshgiat

nagaza-ou 230

163

164

abb.' 231 164

zashk 232 164

he'l 233 164

zri 234 165

tka-ni 235 165

gou uzgun 236 165

mila 237 166

tka 238 166

shTlgiat 239 166

kbie" 240 167

THE SIMPLE SENTENCE 168


1. Predication of "to be" 168

2. Words for "to be" 168

Page

hokshk 243 168

dlig, wan 244 168

w 1 245 169

20

Page Page

wg'tk 246 169

amyg. 247 169

3. to become, to have 170

Page

170

170

170

171

171

4. yes and no 171

Page

a'a 253 171

niadit 254 172

yagai nTadit 255 172

ain 256 173

5. Negation 173

Page

althga 257 173

wha 258-259 173

ain 260 176

177

177

177

177

177

hawalthk 266 178

hawFnilth, hawe-rilth 267 178

wagait hawalthk 268 178

op za 269 179

sha 248di 249shgri 250

dadau 251

didau 252

wagait ain 261

.g.up althga 262

althga gau 263

althgat n-g, 264

whati 265

Page

gilau 270 179

lthguksh 271 179

6, must, shall, canPage

gup 272 180

dum 273 180

am dum 274 180

"aiklthk, da'a.klthk 275 181

lthguksh 276 181

7e to have in mind, to want, to wishPage

dum 277 181

hashak 278 181

anauk 279 182

shagaud 280 182

shigilth 281 183

8, Perfect TensePage

ltha, wil 282 183

ltha zoucli 283 183

shgab5 284 (lugwil) 184

na 285 185

9. also, stillPage

di 286 185

gik 287 185

hazukshum 288 185

gik hazukshum 289 186

tkulTya 290 186

mandiy-i. 2919 Addendum nishta 186

21

Page

180

181

183

185

10. only

22

Page

187

Page

amuksha 292 187

althga amuksha 293 188

g_up 294 188

11. as 189

Page

nTwal 295 189

hoigiak 296 189

adTgriel 297 189

wudT 298 190

12. Comparative 190

Page

ga 299 190

13. Superlative 191

Paraphrase 300 191

14. Command 191

Page

Suffix lth 301. Note 191

Suffix T

&dau 302 192

gut 303 192

n'zil 304 192

shirunza 305 193

15. Interrogative Sentences 193

A. Simple Interrogative Sentences

Page

Suffix T 308 193

Suffix lth 309 194

193

23

Page

B. Alternative Expressions 194

Page

ligi 310 194

C. Interrogative Adverbs 195

Page

n'da gun 311 195

gau gun 312 195

n'da, n'da da 313 195

n'dalth sh.ganaklth 314 197

dumaisha 315 197

shgabEi 316 197

VIII. THE COMPLEX SENTENCES AND THE MEANS FOR

JOINING CLAUSES TOGETHER 198


A. Adnominal Clauses 318 198

B. Adverbial Clauses, Conjunctives 199

I. Indefinite Joining Through ada 319 199

II. Temporal Joining 200

dha 320ash, ashT 321ltha, wil, dum 322zida 323hi 324Wigauk 325

gilwil 326

ltha goudT 327

sh.gab6" 328 (lugwil)

n'tkurint, n'tkulg:n gwa 329

Page

200

201

202

205

206

206

206

207

207

207

Page

wil wak 330 208

"from now on" 331 208

am shzanak 332 208

wag.ait dum 333 209

ltha nak 334 209

hawalthk 335 210

haw7nilth, hawgnith 336 210

III. Reason, Purpose 211

Page

gun 337 211

nini gun, ninT gwai gun 338 212

"gwil 339 213

dum, dum wha 340 213

op za 341 214

IV. Condition 215

Page

amT 342 215

amT za 343 216

gin 344 216

V. Concessive RelationshipPage

24

Page

z6, zhtlr 346 218

218

Appendix

SAMPLES OF THE LANGUAGE

BOOK Ha

GLOSSARY

Tsimshian-GermanGerman-Tsimshian

Corrections and Addendab

25

219

220-256

aAlthough not included in the English translation, Book IIremains here, as it stands in Schulenburg's Table of Contents, forthe sake of completeness.

bThe entire list, in translation, has been moved to a locationimmediately following the Appendix in the English translation of BookI, Schulenburg's Tsimshian Grammar. The list has been included forthe sake of completeness. The corrections and addenda on the listwhich apply to Book I have been incorporated into the translation.These corrections and addenda may be identified by consulting the listitself.

INTRODUCTION

The dwelling places of the Tsimshian Indians extend, accord

to Mr. F. Boas, 1 over the northern part of the coast of British

'7

g

Columbia, especially over the region of the Nass and Skeena Rivers,Their territory along the Skeena extends far into the interior, as faras the Babine Lake area. South of the Skeena, the Tsimshian occupy

the offshore islands with their southern boundary n the vicinity ofMilbank Sound. 2 The name Tsimshian [[in German Zimshran accord-

3ing to Schulenburg]] (Boas: Tsimschian ) denotes actually only thetribe on the lower Skeena which first, and most intimately, came intocontact with Europeans and whose name, therefore, has come todesignate the whole language family. The Tsimshian-speaking tribes

have no common name in their own language. Among the Tlingit,

their northern neighbors, they are called Ts'asheil: 4 among the

1-1-e'iltsuk, their southern neighbors, they are called Kwevtela' while

the Haida designate the individual tribes with the trites' individualnames. Tsimshian is spoken in two dialects of which the Nas%a'

[[Boas: Nisqa'4. ]] is perceived as the olderprobably with good rea-son since the Naszai words frequently occur in old songs.

The following tribal groups can be differentiated from the

Tsimshian. Of these groups, the first two speak Nasza/, the rest,Tsimshian.

1F. Boas, "The Tsimshian, " Zeitschrift ffr Etlnc212is_(Berlin 1883), pp. 231-47. (Note: I have quoted from his reportsalmost verbatim).

2Approximately from 53°301 to 55030' north latitude.3Other transcriptions are: Chim-sy-an (Schoolcraft),

Chimpsain (Scott), Tsimsean (Swan), Simpsean (Macdonald),Tsimshean (Mayne), Chimsain, Tsimpsean, Chimsean (Anderson),Chimmesyan and Chemmesian (Scouler).

4The Lepsius Standard Alphabet has been used for these Indiannames which occur in Boas. [[Karl Richard Lepsius, Germanphilologist, 1810-84]].

78

1. NasZaii, on the Nass River.

2. Gyitkla/n, on the upper Skeena (Ksan) people of the KPan

3. Ts'emgia/n, at the mouth of the Skeena on the Skeena.

4. GyitsIumrilllon, below the canyon on the Skeena = highlandpeople.

5. Gyits'ala/er, at the canyon of the Skeena = canyon people.

6. GyitcraYtla, on the island before the mouth of the Skeenacoastal people.

7. Gyitg""../ata, at Grenville Channel = the walking-stickpeople (?), allegedly so-called because they constructedsalmon weirs in the manner of the FIF/iltsuk: from sticksdriven into the river parallel to one another.

8. GyidegdzV, northwest of Milbank Sound.

Several of these groups are divided again into subdivisions,each of which live in a village. The villages of the first two tribesare unknown to Dr. Boas. The Tsimshian comprise ten villages 5

and

tribes:1. Gyitlg'n = people who travel with the sterns of the canoes

forward.

2. Gyilas'Vr = people of the tributary.

5The largest and most significant place appears to be Met laKat la (founded by Duncan; on the map of the British Admiralty'Metlah-Catlah; written by Scott "Met-la-kaht-la"). in 1878 this placepossessed its own schooner which made regular trading trips toVictoria; a general store; a trading post for the Indians from othertribes; a soap factory; a smithy; a sawmill; a schoolhouse which costapproximately four thousand dollars; a large building for publicgatherings for judicial hearings, and for the reception of foreigners:a mission house; a church; a woolen mill; a rope and thread factory:a tannery; a footwear factory; and many other things (compare Morris72).

29

3. Gyi8pez1Vots = people of the place with honeysuckle.

4. Gyitienda/ = people of the village with the stockade.

5. GyidnadVeks = people of the rapids.

6. Gyina1 angy7ek = people of the mosquito place.

7. Gyitwulgyalts = people of the resting place.

8. GyidzT's = people of the salmon weir.

9. GyidzalitlVt1 = people of the "salmon berries. "

10. Gyitwulkgeba/.

The remaining tribes have only one village apiece with theexception of the Gyitsralane,r, whose village on the north side of theriver is inhabited by the GyilaztsVoks (= people of the canoe planks6),while on the

is located.

The Gyitslumr.a4.11on are the descendents of the immigrant

Tongas, who, in the course of incessant warfare, fled from theirhomeland approximately two hundred and twenty years before andsettled on the upper Skeena. They interbred with the Tsimshians

south side that of the GyititsVp1 (= people of the seaside)

and,

in the course of time, adopted their speech. The descendents of theseTongas today are still called Gun II-5/ot (= fugitives).

Dr. Aurel Krause? has furnished other information on theTsimshian Indians. He states that in the year 1845 Lieutenants Warre

60stensibly so-named because they stole the planks out of thecanoes of tribes traveling by.

7Die Tlinkit-Indianer. Results, described by Dr. Aurel Krause,of a journey by Doctors Arthur and Aurel Krause in the years 1880-81to the northwest coast of American and the Bering Straits, carried outon behalf of the Bremen Geographical Society. Jena. HermannCostenoble, 1885.

30and Vovasour tabulated on behalf of the Hudson Bay Company

4 tribes of Nass -Indians with 1615 souls.

10 tribes of Chymsyans with 2495 souls,2 tribes of Skeena-Indians with 322 souls.

Veniaminov estimates their number at approximately sixthousand. According to statements made to them by a TsimshianIndian woman, these same Indians are divided into the following

fifteen tribes. 8

1. krsch-each-l'A -As 7. kitt-ando2. kits-"Sch-lg.--alich 8. kri-nach-hangik3. kit-wulg-jats 9. kinnat7-iks4. kits-Tisch 10. kit-winks e -be

5. killiTts-a7r 11. kittralchll6. kittle'En

on the Tsimshian Peninsula near Fort Simpson.r

12. kitselassir 13. kitkaet 14, kitra"("1-al-iks

on the Skeena River and southward.

15. niiss-ka. on the INI:ss River.

8Dr. Scouler defines the tribes of the Tsimshian Indians in hisTable V, 487, in the following manner on Chatham Sound [easterlyDixon's or Perez Entrance (Dixon's entrance, Percy 1774) [[Thisparenthetical note of Schulenburg's occurs in the English with theword "entrance" uncapitalized ]] which is in the northern part ofQueen Charlotte Island: above 540-541°, northerly above the largePitt Island; its north end reaches up to the latitude of Fort Simpsonwhich is to the east of it] from Portland Channel [in the West next toObservatory Inlet, page 398" and following] to Port Essington (intowhich the Skeena River empties) [Port Essington lies on the Britishcoast at an ONO from S of the inlet off Chatham Sound, somewhereabove 540], living as well on the mainland as on the adjacent islands;they trade at Fort Simpson and generally don't live far from the fort.They are called: Kispachalaidy, 116 people; Kitlan, 129; Keeches,71; Keen-ath-toix, 63; Kitwillcoits, 64; Kitch-aclalth, 31; Kel-utsah,104; Kenchen Kieg, 87; Ket-andon, 54; Ketwilk-cipa, 18. (CompareBuschmann, "The People and Speech of New Mexico and the WesternSide of British North America, " pp. 400-01).

31

The Krause brothers heard the following tale about the origin ofthe Tsimshian Indians The Tsimshian came from the interior down

the Skeena River. They found it completely blocked by two glaciers

which had moved forward, from both banks, into the river. Only in a

dark cave did the river pass through the glaciers. Already the

Tsimshians wanted to give up the continuation of the journey, when

their leader, an elderly Indian, volunteered to try this way. After he

had begun to sing the death song, he went into the dark cave in hiscanoe. From the glacier's summit, which a few had scaled, he wasseen coming out below. Then everyone tried the same course, andthey also successfully arrived at the mouth, where they settled.

I quote only the following from the most detailed reports of Dr.

Boas9 on the classification, customs, and practices of the Tsimshian.The nation is divided into three classes the common people, the

middle class, and the chiefs or leaders. The latter constitute thehighest of the nobility; the children of the middle class, until they joina secret society or acquire a name by means of a great celebration,are initially regarded as members of the lowest class, Abundant

gifts serve also to secure a higher rank. The leader (chief) assumesthe highest rank; he enjoys many advantages. He has to carry out thedeterminations of the council, to declare peace and war, his opinionmust be ascertained by the tribe in all important matters. He decideswhen the winter village shall be vacated, when the fishing begins, etc.The first fish, the first berries are given to him. He must begin thedances, be invited to all festivals, and whenever the first whistleresounds in the winter, which declares the onset of the dancing season,he receives a fixed tribute. The common people must go along the

9British Association for the Advancement of Science, Report onthe Northwestern Tribes of Canada, " 1889 and 1890.

32

walls of the house; they cannot come close to the chief whose place isin the rear of the house.

The highest in rank among all the Tsimshian chiefs is the chiefof the Gyispaq1Vots tribe. Invariably, this chief's name is LegT'eq.He is the most noble because a number of secret societies allow onlyhis family and his tribe as members. Whenever a chief dies, theleadership passes to his younger brother, then to his nephew, and ifthere is none, on to his niece. The principal perso:l on his staff canbecome chief only if the chief's family dies out

This is the sole instance in which a man of the middle class canrise to the rank of chief. The property of the chief, as well as that ofthe others, is first inherited by the nephews, and if there are none,by the nephews of the deceased mother or aunt, The property of awoman passes to the children.

As already indicated the common people can move up to the

middle class rank, but members of the middle class may never moveto the upper class rank.

Like the Tlingit and Haida, the Tsimshian too have their ownfishing tracts in every village, as well as definite districts in themountains and in the valleys where they alone have the right to huntand to pick berries. The houses of a tribe, therefore, always lieclose together.

Dr. Boas reports the following about the coming of age of girlsat thirteen or fourteen. They must begin with fasting, only eat in theafternoons, and remain in their room or hall for a period of ten days.During this time, for four days, they may not once drink water, If

they wish to have two or three boys, correspondingly, men must chewthe food for them; in the opposite case, women. At the end of this

fast they are covered with matting and held over a fire They believe

that in this way their children are made healthy. For one whole year

33

they must not see nor eat fresh salmon or smelt: they must moveabout with their heads always covered; they may not lie down, but

always sit supported between boxes and and matting. For the cele-bration of their coming of age the kin of the mother give a big festivaland give gifts to the clan of the father. At this point their ears arepierced, and they are given earrings. When the daughter of a chief

comes of age, she is given a stone which she must bite until her teethare completely worn down in the center. During the celebration,slaves are often set free. When women drink for the first time aftertheir marriage, they turn the vessel around four times in the direc-tion in which the sun moves and then drink very little. The piercing of

the ears is repeated on later occasions., and each time a new hole ismade, a new festival is held.

Whenever a death occurs, the relatives cut their hair short andblacken their faces; they cover their heads with ragged and filthymatting, and go four times around the dead body singing mourningsongs. They must fast until the body is buried, only eating a littlefood at night. The women of the families to which the deceased didnot belong act as mourners and are paid for their work; the entirefamily of the deceased contributes to the payment, While mourning,

the women must shut their eyes. The family to which the father of thedeceased person belongs has to bury the body. Immediately upon

death, the body is washed. Then the dead person lies in state a fewdays, seated upright and adorned with the headdress of his tribe; thetrappings and dance attire are placed at the side of the body. Next the

body is put into a box which is fastened with strips of elk hides. These

are kept as payment from the other families by the family of thedeceased. The bodies, except for those of the shamans, are crematedin the following way. The box is placed on a pyre, and the elk hidestraps are pulled away (later kept by the father's family); a hole is cut

34

in the bottom of the box and the pyre, lit. Before it burns, the heartis taken out of the body and buried. The belief is that if the heart

burns up, all the relatives of the deceased would die. In addition to

the strips of elk hide, the father's family is paid with marmot skins

and rugs. The closest relatives mourn an entire year. Sometimeafter the burial a commemorative pole is erected and a commemoration

feast is celebrated. When many members of a family die quickly,one after another, the survivors lay their four fingers on the edge ofthe box in which the body is laid out and cut off the first joint in

order to sever the link with the dead. 1, 0

The religion of the Tsimshian Indians follows' Leql (Laka),the heaven or sky, is to them the concept of the highest and the

mightiest. Everything that seems mysterious and precious to them

they regard as a direct expression of this, their deity, and theyvenerate it in these things which they call Neqnciq. Neqnc:iq is for

them, above all, the sun and the moon, but also can be animatedspirits wherever they are encountered. Also, those objects, such aseagle feathers, red dye, etc. , whose possession seems valuable tothem are designated as Neqnciq. In order to please the deity, theymust regulate their lives according to the wishes of the deity; thus,they are studiously clean, even take emetics, fast, and refrain fromtouching their women. ---A special belief is connected with twins

who are supposed to gain mastery over the weather, wind, and rain;they pray, "Calm down, Breath of Twins. " Fish, especially thesalmon and the smelt (Thaleichthys pacificus Gir. ), are alsoworshipped (the latter called halendatk). See Boas with regard to the

10According to Krause, however, as a result of the missionaryactivities carried on among the Tsimshian by Duncan and Crosby, inmany cases the old Tsimshian customs are supposed to have gone outof use and, for the most part, have fallen into oblivion.

35

ceremonial customs practiced during the first catch of fish.According to Dawson there are four religions among the

Tsimshian. They are called Sim-ha-Tait (Semhalait by Boas), Mi-hla(MVitla by Boas), Noo-hlem (N-51otlam by Boas), and Hop-pop (Ola la

by Boas).a These religions are independent of tribal classification and

sex - -. -The first of these religions is the simplest, and there are nonoteworthy ceremonies connected with it. The followers of the second

are supposed to worship a small black figure with long hair known as

"the one above" (Shimoigiat ga Lakaga). The "Noo-hlem" are the

dog-eaters, and the "Hop-pop, " the cannibals. The "Hop-pop"

receive their name from the fact that this cry is heard whenever, ingenuine or feigned rage, they are driven to eating human flesh. At

that point, all who belong to the other religions seek to get out of the

way of those who are raging. The followers of the "Hop-pop, " though,

unflinchingly hold out their arms and allow a piece of flesh to be torn

out A man is able to belong to more than one religion and can some-times be compelled to become a member of a second religion.

aIn the First General Report on the Indians of British Columbiato the British Association for the Advancement of Science, Boas saysthat the Tsimshian have four secret societies. They are the Ola la orWihalait, 1\15/ntlem, Melitla, and SEmhalait. He alternately usesM-evitla and M'eitla but always uses Ola la, SErnhala;.t, and NEVntlem.See Schulenburg's second footnote in Language Sample IV.

36

SCHULENBURG'S BOOK THE GRAMMAR

Book I

Grammar

37

I. PHONOLOGY AND STRESS

# 1. To begin with, I give Boas's synopsis of the phonetic

inventorya [[see also footnote a, Language Sample

"Vowels: a, a, e, E, i, o, u.Consonants: b, p; w; m; gy, ky; g, k; g, k; r, q;

h; d, t; n; ds, ts; s; 1, tl; y.

"A" is never pure, but pronounced between a and a, Long vowels areby many individuals still further lengthened by repeated intonation;for instance, ii75't and iC7ot, = man; teen and ts°7'en, = to enter. Ihave preferred to retain the repeated vowels, except where I was surethat the repetition is only an individual peculiarity. The distinction ofsurds and sonants is clear, but terminal surds are throughout trans-formed into sonants whenever a vowel follows. Ds and ts, however,when followed by an hiatus, are very much alike. "S" is not theEnglish s, but has a slight touch of sh, the point of the tongue notquite touching the teeth. "L" is pronounced, the tip of the tonguetouching the upper teeth, the back being pressed against the palate.uN" is similar to dn, the nose being almost closed.

All sounds occur as initial sounds. I found the following com-binations of consenants beginning words:

pt kw qp nd tgy sp tlppts kt qk nts tk; tkw sky tigptl kts qt; qtk nl tk° sk tlk

sgks; ksp, ksk, kstq qts; qtsky tq sk

sqqs; qsk, qst srl

stqtl stz

aFranz Boas, III Tsimshian, linguistics section of the "FirstGeneral Report on the Indians of British Columbia" in appendix of the"Fifth Report of the Committee on the Northwestern Tribes of theDominion of Canada, " British Association for the Advancement ofSciences, Vol. 59 (London: John Murray, 1890), pp. 877-78.

Hereafter cited as "1889 Boas Report" in double brackets withinthe text of the grammar proper.

38

The following consonants occur as terminal sounds:

p, m, ky, k, r, q, t, n tl

Terminal combinations of consonants are

1p lky pk tk.; ntk pq pt ps qtl; mqtlqk tsk mq lot; lkt ms ntltk; ntk, ltk mk tq; ltq qt ks lks, tiks tstlsk; ksk, nq st; lkst, ks

nsk, tsk mstlk sq nt qs; pqstlk; mtlk lq It ns

tlt is

# 2. Another transcription [[other than that of Boas]] was

selected in the translation of the Gospels. Following is the "Key to

the sounds of the letters" found on page two [[of the translation of the

Gospels]]:

"a as in pan. 5 as in note.

-a-,

e

-6.

i

T

o

ti II par. u !v ig cur.

" " net. ri " " rule." " they. ai IF aisle.II ii pin. au II i taught

" " machine. of I? ?? boil.

" " not. ou H II bough.

"g is always hard.

.g. is a deep guttural.k is like the ch in buch (German).tk is a sound that can only be learnt from a native.

lth is very like 11 in Welsh.z, when initial, is equal to ds; when final, to ts. "

The following comparisons with the Boas phonetic inventory are

to be noted:

au = = k, g; k = q; lth = tl.

39

# 3. There are no diphthongs according to Boas; he always

heard the individual vowels pronounced separately.# 4. Before vowels p, qu, k, t become b, gw, g, d (compare # 1).

walp > walbun

dukriqu > dukTagwa

haik > haigum

nagwat > nagwadi.

# 5. Medially, k usually disappears before w; thushilk-wa.-1uksh > hilwaluksh

hi-1k - ha va-. 1 .

# 6. When a word ends in a vowel and a vowel-initial suffix is

joined to the vowel, a y is inserted to avoid hiatus.Thus one says wilaiyu instead of

houyri

gilauyii.

nakraiyum IP nakno-um,

viayurn It wa.-urn,

maiya mai-a.# 7. In the case of the word "da, " I find a phenomenon which I

would like to call alliteration.Therefore, when the following word begins with g, Hda" very

frequently is changed to "ga. "Thus: da goi > ga goi,

da gum > ga gum.

In addition, it is to be noted here that n-51 ya gu is found instead

of na da

# 8. Occasionally a final -k appears in front of an initialgutteral.

40

For example: Christk gish (Christ).

goibak gish (goiba).

Shimoigiatk gun (Shimoigiat).

This language also has great preference for final t; no explana-

tion other than preference can be given.Numerals, in particular, may be indicated in this connection.

For example: (Boas:) naanhi5,-/ t'Epq-iidEt = the third.

[[ "1889 Boas Report, " Ordinal Numbers,

p. 881. J]

# 9. Nothing about stress could be determined from the[[biblical]] text material; according to verbal statements of Mr. Boas,

he, too, could establish nothing definite [[in this regard]].

41

II. THE STRUCTURE OF THE LANGUAGE

# 10. Introductory Remarks. People have talked about alanguage structure that is specifically American. They have called

this language structure "incorporating" or "polysynthetic" and havespoken as though the languages of the Western Hemisphere were con-

structed according to a common pattern and as though this patternwere characteristic of only these languages. Today we know that

neither assumption is correct. Incorporation and polysynthesism are

to be found in various parts of the Old World. Of the Indian languagesthere are many, including the one in which we are interested, thathave a completely different and much simpler external form. If we

choose to speak of a certain general family similarity among theselanguages, common elements should be sought not so much in the

external features of the languages themselves as in the mental proc-esses in which the spiritual and emotional life of these peoples ismanife sted.

We should seek to see then how similar needs, similar habits ofthought and perception, have made use of the most diverse types of

construction. With regard to these habits, it must be determined towhat extent, and how, the conceptual world is classified according toparts of speech; which logical, psychological and aesthetic categorieshave been preferred and developed, and which have not; and in whatorder the parts of speech are assembled when formed into actualspeech.

# 11. Following the predominant tendency of American

languages to incorporate as much as possible into the verbal expres-sion, the verb in the Tsimshian Indian language stands out moreprominently than all the other parts of speech.

42

A. Verbal Character of the Language

# 12. There is a special predilection to employ the verbal mode

of expression To begin witha) for our [[verb]] to be"

Luke 22070 malth da shim ni walla = ihr saget es, ich bin es(vial = to do, to act) = Ye say that I am.

Matt, 13249 ninT dum w7.1 da da zida ltha sh-abl harizoga = also

wird es sein, wenn das Ende der Welt gekommen ist) = So shall it be

at the end of the world [[hasMatt 23239 g.umgaulth Walsh ga = gelobt sei, welcher...

Blessed is he that...b) for prepositions

watk = come [[past participle]] and amyg, (am = good, la = to go)

[[plural of watk; see # 34]] are used in the meaning from somethinghere" [[to this place]]

Luke 24 ada wil di doulthsh Joseph ga watk gut gish ga Galilee

ga watk gut gish ga agulzabum Nazaret ga = da machte sich auch auf

Joseph (gekommen) a.us Galilaa, (gekommen) aus der Stadt Nazareth =

And Joseph also went up [[come]] from Galilee, [[come]] out of the

city of Nazareth.Luke 22271 awil ltha dup lip naknO- watk ga did-a: lip zumak dit =

denn wir haben selbst es gehOrt (gekommen) aus seinem eigenenMande = for we ourselves have heard [[come]] of his own mouth.

John 62,31 na ginamt ga anai ga watk gut gish ga laka gishdupnTht = er gab Brod (gekommen) vom Himmel ihnen = He gave them

bread [[come]] from heaven to eat.

Mark 6233 adat hapt ga amygt gish ga tk-a-.nTsh ga.gulzipzap ga

= and sie liefen weg von alien Orten zu ihm = And the people saw them

departing, and many knew him, and ran afoot thither out of all cities.

43

Mark 7:1 ada shagait zutgoiduksh ga Pharisees gish niat,amyat gish ga Jerusalem ga = und es kamen zu ihm die Pharis'i.er,.,von Jerusalem her; = Then came together unto him the Pharisees,... .

came from Jerusalem.To say "of", to testify or be evidence "of", to write "of", to

tell "of", to hear "of" everywhere "of" is verbally expressed:John 10:41 ada am tkani gau nahoush John da wila wal yaa gwa

shimhou dit = aber aides, was Johannes gesagt hat von (dem Thun

dieses) diesem Menschen, das ist wahr = but all things that Johnspake of [[the activities of this]] this man were true.

John 1047 ada houit gish ga wila watt ga = und er spricht vonihm (von seinem Thun) = Jesus saw Nathanael coming to him, and

saith to him [[of his activities]].John 8:18 ada Nagwat ga gix nat in haizi ga magaunshk ga did

wila warut = und mein Vater, der mich gesandt, zeugt von mir (eig.von dem, was ich thue) = and the Father that sent me beareth witnessof me [[really, of that which I doll.

John 5A6 awil na damish dida wila walut = denn er hat

geschrieben von mir (von dem, was ich thue) = for he wrote of me [[ofthat which I doll.

John 7013 ada am a lthgat na za girl a lgiaz_a dalth wila wait,

gish ga Jews ga = Niemand aber redete frei von ihm,denn sie filrchteten sich von den Juden = Howbeit no man spake openlyof him for fear of the Jews.

Mark 1:30 ada di:it gut prigiit gish ga wila wilt ga = und bald

erzghlten sie ihm von ihr = and anon they tell him of her.Luke 13:1 pliant gish ga wila welsh ga Galilee = sie verkiindig-

ten ihm von den Galilgern = There were present at that season some

that told him of the Galilaeans.

44

Matt. 14:1 whatit tkashnTat ga ada nakriliit gut Herod ga tetrarch

ga wila walsh Jesus ga = zu derselben Zeit hOrte der Vierfarst

Herodes von Jesu = At that time Herod the tei-trarch heard of the

fame of Jesus."after" in expressions of time:[[occurs before the time element]]

Accordingly, for "after six days" one says "after six days had

passed, " etc.Only a few examples follow here:

Mark 14:1 ltha gouclTsh ga g3'belt ga sha ga.. = nach zwei

Tagen... = After two days... .

Mark 9:2 ada ltha goudTsh ga gauldit ga sha ga... = und nach

sechs Tagen... = And after six days.gunwal (gun = because of, for; wal = to do) = for the sake

of:

Mark 6:17 ... ash gut Herodias ga gunwalt ga = ...urn der

Herodias willen = For Herod himself had sent forth and laid hold upon

John, and bound him in prison for He-ro.'-diAs' sake.Mark 8:35 ada alt ligit na dumt in gwa'an na didrilsh dit ash

nriya dum Lunwal dit di-1th Am da Malshk gut = und wer aber wird

verlieren sein Leben urn meinet und des Evangelium willen... = but

whosoever shall lose his life for my sake and the gospel's.

John 15:3 ltha al hashba shikshakshk ga shimt -a- nTnT algiaga na

houyti da gwashim.gunwal dit = ihr seid bereits rein urn des Wortswillen, das ich zu euch geredet habe = Now ye are clean through the

word which I have spoken unto you.

c) for substantives

Many verbs can also function as substantives, for example:

algiak "to speak" and "word"

hadak "to sin" and "sin"

45

kshawauk "to dream" and "dream"gish "to wrong someone" and "offense"

or "transgression.Verbal paraphrase is used to express the ideas "time" and

"future. " The language has no specific expressions for these twoconcepts:

Matt. 24:39 nTnT dum di walsh ga dum wil goiduksh ga

Lthgolthk gish ga giat ga = also wird auch sein die Zukunft desMenschensohnes (wenn er kommen wird) = so shall also the coming ofthe Son of man be [[whenever he shall come]].

Matt. 24:37 ada nTwalt ga na walsh ga n'da didOlsh Noah ga...= and wie es war zu der Zeit, wo Noa lebte... = But as the days ofN5'-7 were.

Mark 13:24 ada zida ltha wilt, n'tkulangunludukdauklthgumgagaudit, dum... = aber zu der Zeit, nach dieser Trabsal, werden...(zida = wenn, ltha = Perfectum, wal = thun, -t = er, sie, es) = But inthose days, after that tribulation, the sun shall be darkened, and themoon shall not give her light, [[zida = whenever, ltha = the perfecttense, wg.1 = to do, -t = he, she, it

Mark 1:15 ltha liihoigiaga dum wil = es ist erfalltdie Zeit... = The time is fulfilled.

B. Nominal FormationI.

Formation of Substantives# 13. Substantives derived from verbs are

yloulthemak to command, to order [[verb]]Vaoulthemgushk command, order [[noun]]

algiak to speak [[verb]]algiagushk chief (spokesman) [[noun]]

46

shinlait to point out, to, at[[indicate, signify]] [[verb]]

shinlaiduksh sign, symbol [[noun]]

ama alak to praise (to speak well of) [[verb]]

ama dalgushk praise [[noun]]

(117)shriwirin to pursue [[verb]]

(lii)shriwilTnshk pursuit [[noun]]

yi.mu k to lead astray, to tempt [[verb]]

ygmzu shk temptation [[noun]]

magaund to bear witness, to testify [[verb]]

magaunshk testimony, evidence [[noun]]

lthaut to honor, to esteem [[verb]]

lthaumshk honor [[noun]]

lrishanIlth to be surprised, to beastonished; to marvel [[verb]]

llishanalthashk astonishment; miracle [[noun]]

# 14. (Boas:) k-, place of, only occurring in geographicalnames:Laq (1) -k (2) -tlgau (3) -ralrms (4) = on (1) where (2) little (3)

haws (4); an island near Fort Simpson,KEnE (1) -k (2) -qVI.g (3) = place (1) where (2) scalps (3).MEqtla (1) -k (2) -cfa/tla (3) = narrow channel (1) where (2) sea (3).Laq (1) -k (2) -15n (3) = on (1) where (2) (Gyit)lan (3)0 village of the

Gyitlan.

[[1889 Boas Report, pp. 887-88 ]]

# 15. (Boas:) KEnE-, place of:KEnE (1) -k (2) -q2/15. (3) = place (1) where (2) scalps (3).KEnE (1) -kara/5 (2) = place of (1) trade (2).

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. 1]

47

# 16. (Boas:) kspE-, place where something is frequently doneKspE (1) -leamFlelEq (2) = where always (1) good for nothing say (2)

= playground.KspE (1) -eg. (2) = where one always (1) sits (2).KspE (1) -si5nt (2) = where always (1) in summer (2).

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. 1]

# 17. (Boas:) ha-, instrument:haaks, cup, spoon = drinking instrument.haallagyaq, windpipe = speaking instrument.hayg/wiqk, fork = eating instrument.hadVosk, broom = sweeping instrument.

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. ]]

# 18. ha followed by 11" (= at, on):

halidamTsh = writing tablet or slate (a tool or device on which one

writes).halidap = court of justice (dap = to set right).halTshgriut = coffin (shgu = to lie).

halitkauk = dining tables (plural).# 19. (Boas:) "kan"-, (gun) "instrument":

[[Schulenburggs term]]"k'anwa'i, rowlock = rowing instrument.lant1.75/opes, thimble = sewing instrument.

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888.]]

gunyikshza-ltk, sponge = a device with which the face is washed.

gungekunshk, mill = a device for grinding or milling.# 20. Other derivatives and compounds are:1) (Boas:) ts'Em-, (zum), in:

[[Schulenburg's term]]ts'Emaks, = in water, a sea monster.ts°Emtslaq, = in nose, nostril.ts'EmEn'oin, = in hand, palm of hand.

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. ]]

48

2) ndE- (ri'da), place where something is kept[[Schulenburg's term]]

ndEsuiga , sugar -bowl.

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888. ]j

wo- (wha), withoutg[[Schulenburg's term]]

w3nralotk, without nest (a name) .woksenVtlk, without breath (a name),wr5ka1uts, without labret = girl.

[[1889 Boas Report, p, 887; correction woo ]]

4) wil-This one indicates place, situation or condition, factowiluwan = dwellings (plural) (wan = to sit, to be)

wrlgiat = birth (becoming man, giat = human being)wilhaik = smell [[possibly "reputation" [fig. ]]] (haik = spirit;

essence Hfigo ji)

wilnaksh = marriage (naksh = husband, to marry)wilshgGith dumwilw-a-lgiat = the place of a skull

[[see, for example St, Mark 1522 Golgotha,St. Luke 23g33 Calvary,St. John 19g17 the place of a skull, which is

called in the Hebrew Golgotha, ]]

5) ltha-means that which is completed and lasts or continueslthagigiat (plural) old men (giat = human being)

6) sh-

sh goes before g.un (= tree), wherever the specific tree type is given

shgun fig = fig tree

shgun grape = grape tree(see for comparison the suffix -sh in the section on formatives)

[ [ # 1 2 2 ]1

49

Formation of Adjectives

# 21. A few adjectives are placed completely unaltered in front

of substantives:

wi wilhelgiat = many people

tkani sha = every daywuda hawalp = large houses

slid testament = New Testament

# 22. The ending -urn is attached to most adjectives preceding

substantive s

For example:Mark 16:5 maukshgum wash = weisses Kleid = white garment.

Mark 9:25 zEagum haik = tauber Geist = deaf spirit.

John 4:10 didOlshum aksha = lebendiges Wasser = living water.

Luke 22:50 nakshimyaonum zum75 = rechtes Ohr = right ear.

Luke 24:4 gwilgwalukshum wishwasch = glanzendweisse

Kleider = shining garments. [[note: wishwaschi]

Matt. .15:19 brgum magaunshk = falsches Zeugniss = false

witnes s

Matt. 7 :18 hada.gum mai = schlechte Frucht = evil fruit, logumgun = fauler Baum = corrupt tree.

Matt. 23:26 shaunshum Pharisee = blinder Pharisger = blindPharisee.

Matt. 15:24 gvigtgum matT = verlorene Schafe = lost sheep.

Matt. 5:35 wTlEkshum king = grosser KOnig = great king.

Matt. 25:31 n'lth.5dukshum angels = heilige Engel = holy angels.

# 23. On rare occasions, -a takes the place of -urn. (perhaps

a phonetic reduction)

ama malshk good tidings

(hadaq a cci/ot = bad person,but is no longer used according to

50

Boas) [[1889 Boas Report, p. 880. ]]# 24. (Boasz) A number of adjectives are abbreviated in form-

ing compounds very, sEmral, abbreviated, sEm: sEmhalVit, theimportant dance. good for nothing, IamstE, abbreviated, k'arngkiamw-alp, a miserable house.

The abbreviations cannot be used at pleasure. KamtsEwalp andk.amwalp, miserable house, are equally correct; but, while we haveatigE sEmafm, not very nice, sEmIlm would not be correct; it mustbe sEmral 1m, very nice.

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 880. ]]

C. Plural Formation#25. Nominals and verbs form the plural in the same ways.

The forms of the plural are quite varied; a classification is absolutelynecessary.

I. Class# 26. The plural is formed by means of doubling [[duplication]].

dog hash hashlia.sh,

good am am-gm.

foot shT stirs hi:.

to do injustice grsh gishgrsh.

day sha shasha.

[[# 37, XII Class; 1889 Boas Report, p. 878: Plural, # 1.day, ca.]]

hill dhT dhidhr.

tree gun gungun

II. Class# 27. The plural is formed by means of doubling [[duplication]]

with vowel change (preference for short i in the first syllable).dress wash wishwash.

stone laup liplaup.

to build zap zipzap.

to tremble yg..k yikyak.

to tell malth milthmalth.

51

to push dash dishdash

to throw of aioi.

land; ground; soil, lak -yap lak -yipyap.

arable land

[["The Glossary" (German-Tsimshian)a. Land see under lakb. Land, Feld see yap."The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German)

lak-yap under lak = land (singular)Mark 6:1, 5:14, 13:34;

John 3:22

yap = field, land (singular)Mark 12:1, 4:20, 4:31;

Matt. 3:3. ]]

III. Class# 28. The plural is formed by reduplication (partial doubling):

to love shiebun shipshiebun.

door lukshauk luklukshauk.

to talk to dalak dadglak,

to speak algiak alalgiak.to flee from gTEci gigT.Eq.

to give food, gTen gigTen.

nourishmentto give ginam

to buy gra k gigTak.

sick shTepk shipshrepk.

testimony; evidence magaunshk makmagaunshk.

to scold haksh hakhaksh.

to stab, pierce gyetlk gyetlgyetlk.

to know [[as a fact]] wilai wilwilai.

52

IV. Class

# 29. The plural is formed by reduplication with vowel change

holtkfull halholtk,

to be (location) hokshk hakhokshk.

low mauk makmauk.

white mauksh mukshmauksh.

people wit -zok wil-zakzok.

to fall oksh a.koksh.

to trust in waiyauksh waiyikyauksh.

to wash yauksh yoiyiksh

to wait bOrsh babOish.

grave wil-dau wil-dadau.

language diaala didTiala.

to cut off, down gpz ga shgoz .

to send haiz hashhaiz.

hard shaipk shipshaipk.

clean; pure shaksh shikshaksh.

to return ye ltk yilyeltk.

large 1Fksh liklFksh.

[[## 34, IX Class; 1889 Boas Report, p. 879 # 9 large, wi- --wu/d'a.]]

to separate (from) bashuk bishbashuk./ /

ghost; spirit 1.3'laq bilbglaq.

testimony; evidence magaunshk mukmagaunshk.

[[# 28, III. Class. ]]bone shaip shishaip.

load; burden wale" wilware.

to threaten shinuwok shinuwauwok.

heavy balgiaksh bilbalgiaksh.

to bind; tie daklth didaklth.

or k:

53

with difficulty daukIth dakdauklth.

to come g.oiduksh gutzoiduksh.

to ask giTadak gutgiTadak.

V. Class# 30. The plural is formed by reduplication with euphonic k

weak alashk akalashk.

to command y-ioulthemak yaky-ioulthemak.

to be angry lthriundi lthiklthilundi.

sign, symbol shinlaiduksh shikshinlaiduksh.

garden shindointk shikshindointk.

to accompany shtal shiksht61.

to answer dTlamak dakdTlamak.

just; correct hoigiak hakhoigiak.

cripple; invalid lthTgiatk IthiklthTgiatk.

to command haizumak

to spit lthT1 Ithiklthil.

to lead astray, tempt yamuk yakya.-muk.

to whip, scourge wunazak wakwunazak.

to kiss homzak

feast, festival rialgiat luklrialgiat.

spice mThoksh mukmThoksh.

to meet someone liid a ltk radakdg.ltk.

to work halthalsh hakhalthalsh.

to pay libal- luklib-a7.1-.

mountain shgunTsh shikshgunish.

to see nTiz nuknTiz.

debt, liability; Fshk akUshk.

trespasses

54

VI. Clas s

# 31. The plural is formed by the prefixes lu, li. (Is), la.

(which, of course, are all related to each other)to leave qudak laqudadak.

to hunger, be hungry qudr laqudi-dT.

to be afraid Wish libish.

to follow yak l yak.

to laugh shisha'iksh lisha"iksh.

to fall down ka- ina 1-elina (Boas).

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 8. ]]

to sleep kshtok lakshtoiyak.

to cry, shout, aia-vra. aia -lawa.

shriek, screamwram-hou

to warm oneself giamuksh lamuksh.

to drink aksh la'aksh.VII. Clas s

# 32. The plural is formed by the prefix hrik (k usually disap-

pears before w):a menial: servant tkulwa'ulimlthk tkulhrikwa-ulimlthk.

to do wal haw5:1.

to call haitk hakhaitk.

house wale haw-alp.

name

to sell wa'a (wi) hawg.

VIII. Class

# 33. The plural is formed by the prefix ga:

father nagwit .ganagw-it.

heart gaud gagaudo

body tkamau .g,Atkamau.

55

ear zum6 gazumFo

hand anon ga'anon

head dumgoush gadumgousho

mouth zumak gazumako

lip gwulthak gagwulthak.

lame (of humans) zibi, gazib"-a-..

ship, canoe kshau gakshauo

bed kda gakd-a..o

lamp 1-5.5qush gariZqush.

fool, crazy person mawaza gamawaza.

master, lord mTy-in gamTy-gn .

root h-cish .galio-sh.

leaf yensh gayensh.

the exterior qud-cin gaqud3n.

the interior zau gazair.

to believe shimhoudiksh g.ashimhoudiksh.

to go away doulth .gadoulth.

to decorate nun gan-d un.

blind shii'unsh gasha'unsh.

deaf zFak gazak.poor gw7a gagwe-a.

reward, wages klthgau gaklth.gau.

to be pleased, happy lthgwishei .galthgwishei

to be horrified, amazed, lasha.nalth galiish-inalth.

shocked

IX. Clas s

# 34. The plural is derived from a stem different from that of

the singular

child lthqaumlthk gubuteilthko

to sit dh-5: wan.

56

to die zak

to run ba golth.

akfrom, away w amya.

to kill zaq yez.

to lie, (to incline nak

toward)

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 9; In both sections of °°The Glossary?'Schulenburg acknowledges Boas for this wordA

to eat yawuk tkauk.

to enter ziin lamzak.

to stand haitk makshk.

to cry wihou bauk.

large, great[[# 29, IV Class.]]

to fall laklak

to take ga dok.

separated from luksh hagul.

to throw oneself down klthnash-gout klthna -dauk.

little lthgwa guba.

to keep watch, to Rima'kca 15hayekca (Boas).

watch [[over]]

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 8. ]]X. Class

# 35. The plural is formed by diaeresis:to go out kshil (B.: ksEr) kshauk (B.: ksL.'.q).

to hang yaq yaiaq (Boas).

[[correction: Boas: yViaq.]][[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 4. Note: ksEr----ks'k = to leave thehouse; see #6 and note: clg.Iwutlt ---kadgf= to leave. ]]

57

XI. Clas s

# 36. The plural is formed by reduplication of the last syllable,sometimes with a vowel change.

to wish hashak hashashak.

woman, wife hanak hana:nak.

sin hadak hadadak.

before [[in place hazaklthk hazazaklthk.

and time]];

in front of [[palace]]

branch anTsh aria/fish.

XII. Class

# 37. The singular and the plural have the same form:(Boas:) "bear, ol.

cat, ti5/us (Chinook).deer, wan.seal,cedar,arrow, hauwall.day, ca(compare # 26: sha-shasha, in the Gospel translations ina few places. )

year,fathom, g'alit.blanket, guc.to hear, nEciEni5/.to see,

It seems that all quadrupeds, the dog excepted (compare # 26)belong to this class; also divisions of time and measures."

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 878: Plural, # I.]]# 38. To be regarded as a special form:

broad, wide tkau daktkau

to rise, stand up, ginTat nanTat: (mayget up; to rise from belong here [[underthe dead # 38. ]] )

# 39. Doubled pluralization is found occasionally

dalri for the more common

htiwan

gawan

gagutgoiduksh

I II

I I II

V I

II

58

d5". (# 34)

wan (# 32, # 34)

wan (# 33, # 34)

gutgoiduksh (# 33, # 29)

In the same way.gazilzal is also regarded as a doubled plural

form of zal = "face; countenance" (compare # 27).# 40. In compound words only one part carries the plural

indication, usually the last part:land; ground, soil; lakyCip

arable land[[# 27 and accompanying note for lak-y3p and its plural. Note the

hyphenation. ]]

to be in

town, cityship

33, VIII Class. ]]

richimage; comparison;

parableto be annoyed lthirnzosh

stranger lEksgyat

(foreigner (= a foreign people)

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 879: # 9 under compound words. ]]

[[#

liihokshk

gulzap

agwYkshau

amawal

wiltkulnEunshk

liThakhokshk.

gulzipzap.

agwigakshau.

a m aga va'. .

wiltkulnukngunshk.

lthirrig.ush.gosh.

hagulEgyat (Boas).

D. General Rules of Agreement

# 41. The subject and the predicate are requisite componentsof (grammatical) sentences; an expression for the copula does not

exist.

The predicate stands before the subject:

59

Mark 12:29 ada housh Jesus = und Jesus sprach = and Jesusspoke. [[King James: answered]]

Mark 8:11 ada gutgoiduksh ga Pharisees ga = und die

Phariser kamen = and the Pharisees came.John 5:17 ada drlamak gish Jesus ga = und Jesus antwortete =

and Jesus answered.

# 42. The object of a verb stands after the subject:Mark 15311 ada naknaunagumaksh ga manpriests gish ga

ga = und es reizten die Hohenpriester das Volk = and thechief priests moved the people.

John 5:20 shrebunt ga Nagwat ga Lthg5lthk gaga = der Vaterliebt den Sohn = the father loveth the son.

John 6:11 ada wilt dokt gut Jesus ga anai ga = und Jesus nahmdas Brod = And Jesus took the loaves.

# 43. A word by means of which another word becomes morespecifically stated stands

1) in front of

a) adjectives

Luke 2:10 ama malshk = gute Botschaft = good tidings.Mark 5:41 lthgwa hanak = (kleines Weib) MOdchen = [[little

woman]] damsel.

Mark 6:6 guba gulzipzap = (kleine Oerter) DOrfer = [[littleplaces]] villages.

Luke 18:8 ama Shawilaigiamgushk = guter Meister = GoodMaster.

Mark 5:24 \NY wilhelgiat = viel Volk = much people.

John 16:13 dumt dEuntk ga shim da shpagait tkani shimhout

er wird faren euch in alle Wahrheit = he will guide you into all truth.Mark 14:24 shri. testament = neues Testament = new testament.

60

John 13:34 sha. yaoulthemgushk = neues Gebot = new command-

ment.

John 15:1 nayri shimhou shgun grapeit = ich bin ein rechter

Weinstock = I am the true vein.

b) numeralsMark 5:25 gaul ga hanak ga = ein Weib = a certain woman.

Mark 12:28 gaul ga hilkdamishit ga = ein Schriftgelehrter = one

of the scribes.Mark 11:1 dupkadEilt ga disciples gut ga = seine zwei Janger =

two of his disciples.

Mark 12:13 nagazIoush ga Pharisees dilth Herodians = einigePharisger und Leute des Herodes = a few Pharisees and He -r6' dr-lains.

c) adverbs

Mark 10:23 shimaul dauklthk ga... = sehr schwierig = How

hardly shall they.Mark 5:12 adat shagait gwuniit ga... = und zusammen baten

ihn... = And all the devils besought him.Mark 5:43 shimt yakyaoulthemakt = er verbot hart = And he

charged them straitly.Mark 5:37 althgat anauklth = nicht erlaubte er = he suffered

no man.

Luke 20:11 gik haiz = abermals schicken = again... sent.2) after

genitive:

Luke 22:16 kingdomsh ga Shimoigiat ga Lakgga = das Reich

Gottes = the kingdom of God.

Luke 23:52 tkamaush Jesus ga = der Leib von Jesus = the body

of Jesus.

Luke 7:36 w-a-lpsh ga Pharisee ga = das Haus des Pharisgers =

the Pharisee's house.

61

Matt. 4:4 zumg.ksh ga Shimoigiat ga Laka:ga = der Mund Gottes= the mouth of God.

John 5:25 amhoush ga lthg5lthk = die Stimme des Sohnes = thevoice of the Son.

# 44. Apposition takes place by simple juxtaposition:Mark 12:30 MYygn ga Shimoigiat gun ga = der Herr, dein Gott

= the Lord thy God.

Luke 2:34 ada houit gish Mary ga, naut ga = and er sprach zu

Maria, seiner Mutter = And Simon blessed them and said unto Mary hismother.

Luke 3:4 dida sha5nshk ga na algiaksh Isaiah ga, prophet ga

in d em Buch der Rede Jesaias des Propheten = in the book of the wordsE-saiA l-as the prophet.

Luke 3:2 John lthg5lthk gish Zacharias = Johannes, Sohn desZacharias = John the son of Zgch-g.--rTI-as.

Mark 15:47 Mary ga naush Joses ga... = Maria, die Mutterdes Joses = Mary the mother of Joses.

Luke 1:73 Abraham nagwa.dum = Abraham, unser Vater = ourfather Abraham.

Matt. 1:6 David ga king ga = der KOnig David = David the king.

62

III. THE PRONOUNS

A. The Personal Pronoun

# 45. We have to differentiate between dependent and independ-

ent pronoun forms [[as shown on page 63]].

1

# 46. Examples of the independent pronoun forms:

a) of niTya- (B. 2 nErii5) [[correction: nE/riol]:John 10:7 /lily-II lukshauksha matit = ich bin die Thiir zu den

Schafen = I am the door of the sheep.Luke 24:39 /IT lip nTsh nuyu = sehet, ich bin es selber = Be

hold... it is I myself.b) of goi (ggi) [[from Boas. correction: aii]]:

John 6:37 tkanT.sh ga ginamsh ga NagwIdT ga goi dum

gutgoiduksha dida. goi = alles, was mir mein Vater giebt, wird kommenzu mir = All that the Father giveth me shall come to me.

Luke 20:3 ada ma shim malthil da: goi = und saget ihr es mir =

and answer me.c) of nun (B.: nErEn) [[correction: nE'rEn]]:

Matt. 1:20 Joseph, nagun lthg3lthk gish David = Joseph, du

Sohn Davids = Joseph, thou son of David.

Matt. 16:16 ada houit ga, Christit nugun, Lthgolthk gish gadid31shum Shimoigiat ga = und er sprach: du bist Christus, der Sohndes lebendigen Gottes = and said, Thou art the Christ, the Son of theliving God.

d) of gwan:

Matt. 8:13 ada nrwa".1 da na wila shimhoudikshint, nTnTdum WE1

cri d-a gwan = und wie du geglaubt hast, so geschehe auch dir = and as

thou hast believed, so be it done unto thee.

I

you

he, she (present)

Independent

nTiya

nugun

riTat, (nTadit)

me goi

you gwanhim, her (present)

Dependent

I (present) (n) - u (absent)

you (ma) - un

he, she (present) - it, t

(absent) nTatga (absent) (absent) - itga, tga (Ega)we nrig.um us gum we - urn

you nushim you gwashim you - shim (Ens Em)

they (present) dupnrat

dupniadit

them (present) they (present) - it

(absent) dupnTatga (absent) (absent) itga, tga (Ega)

[[Schulenburg uses the second person familiar form in German. The familiar/formal distinc-tion in the pronouns is completely irrelevant to Tsimshian, according to John A. Dunn.

(Ega), (EnsFm), and (Ega) are from the 1889 Boas Report, p. 8820 Personal Pronoun

paradigm. This citation serves for subsequent references to Boas throughout the personal pronounsection, # 46 and # 47. ]]

64

Matt. 14:4 althga hoigiak da gwan ma dum ga dit = nicht ist esfar dich recht, dass du sie nimmst = It is not lawful for thee to haveher.

e) of niat:

John 8:12 /fiat ga gat in yaku althga dum... = er, der mirnachfolgt, wird nicht... = he that followeth me shall not....

John 8:26 gau ga na naknoT gish nTat = was ich von ihm gehOrt

habe = which I have heard of him.

f) of nil-gum (B.: nErEm) [[correction: nE/rEm]]:Matt. 20:12 ada adTgriel ma wila wilagwa dit dish nr.i.gum = und

du hast sie uns gleich gemacht = and thou hast made them equal unto

us.

Luke 12:41 nrigumlth wil algiagunT gu wiltkuldainshk ga

gwa... ? = sagst du zu uns dieses Gleichnis... ? = speakest thou thisparable unto us... ?

g) gum (B.: glEm):

Mark 12:19 Miyrn, na damsh Moses d-S. guin = Herr, Moses hat

uns geschrieben = Master, Moses wrote unto us.Mark 6:3 ada ligi wha hakhokshk gulth lthimuktitk ga gum -a.

gwaT? = und sind nicht auch seine Schwestern bei uns hier ? = and arenot his sisters here with us?

h) of nrishim (B.: nErEsEm) [[correction: nE/rEsEm]]:John 10:34 nTishim shimgigiadum Lakat = ihr seid GOtter = Ye

are gods?John 15:5 ritiyii shgun grapeit, nrishim ananTshit = ich bin der

Weinstock, ihr seid die Reben = I am the vine, ye are the branches.1) of gwashim (B.: guasEm) [[correction: gua'sEm]]:

John 14:17 awil hokshk ga dida gwashim, ada dum gup lahokshk

ga dida gwashim = denn er bleibet bei euch und er wird bei euch

bleiben = for he dwelleth with you, and shall be in you.

65

John 15:11 houya- da- gwashim = ich sage euch = have I spoken

unto you.

k) [[j]] of dupnTat:

John 10:25 ada dTlamak gish Jesus gish dupnTat = und Jesus

antwortete ihnen = Jesus answered them.

John 10:28 ada na ginam whati shab-im g. undid 51 s h a dash

dupniat = und ich gebe ihnen das ewige Leben = And I given unto them

eternal life.2.

# 47. Examples of the dependent pronoun forms (suffixes):

a) of the pronominal suffix of the first person singular

(present):Different forms appear here according to the preceding vowels

and consonants:1) after vowels

yu:

Luke 22:33 gwildum Loudryii = ich bin bereit = I am ready.

Luke 8:28 gwuniiyii = ich bitte = I beseech.

John 1:50 houyri = ich sage = I say [[King James: said]].

John 4:25 wilaiyu = ich weiss = I know.

John 9:5 dhayti = ich bin (bleibe) = I am (remain).

John 17:11 gilauyir = ich bin nicht = I am not [[King James:

I am no]].

2) after sh, z, 1, lth (occasionally), m, n, k* (occasionally)

Luke 2:10 dagpidukshir = ich bringe = I bring.

Luke 5:13 dum want = ich will es thun = I will do it [[King

James: I will]].

Definite rules are not established in this case.

66

Luke 14:20 shanakshina = ich habe ein Weib genommen = I

have married a wife.Luke 18:41 Walt; = ich thue = I... do.

Luke 19:21 awil na bash da gwan = denn ich fUrchtete mich

vor dir = for I feared thee.John 1:32 nraza = ich sah = I saw.

John 8:21 doulthri = ich gehe weg = I go... way.

John 10:32 gwunTazuna = ich lasse sehen, zeige = I shewed.

John 4:14 ginamiT = ich gebe = I... give.

3) after lth, k (occasionally), sh, 1

du:

John 18:8 ltha malth-du da" gwashim nTrash nayat = ich habe

euch gesagt, dass ich es sei = I have told you that I am he.John 14:27 gungiaksha tkulqudaksh-dir da gwashim = den

Frieden lasse ich euch = Peace I leave with you.

John 12:32 dum lip shEk-dti tkanigiada da- goi = ich will selbst

alle Menschen herziehen zu mir = And I, if I be lifted up from the

earth, will draw all men unto me.John 7:21 gel gau na ltha halthal dat = ein einiges Werk habe

ich gethan = I have done one work.

Matt. 18:32 na shalthilda. na Fshk gunt = ich babe erlassen dirdeine Schuld = I forgave thee all that debt.

4) after a (compare the examples stated under 1)nu:

John 14:2 doultha-na = ich gehe bin = I go.

John 14:3 dum gikzoiduksha-na = ich will wiederkommen = I

will come again.

John 14:18 dum goiduksha-nu da gwashim = ich will zu euch

kommen = I will come to you.

67

John 17:26 liihokshk ga nil dash dupniat = ich bin drinnen in

ihnen = I in them. [[Schulenburg cites John 17:28 here]]

and nT

John 16:28 kshawatk ga nT = ich bin ausgegangen = I leave the

world.5) after k

g17.:

Luke 22:53 n'da hokshk gu da gwashim a tkg.nT sha... = ich bin

bei euch gewesen alle Tage... = When I was daily with you.and gT:

John 6:38 "iwil tikigpidukshri da watk gT gish ga lalaga = denn

herabgekommen bin ich vom Himmel = For I came down from heaven.

John 4:15 ...dum akshk gT = ...damit ich Wasser schOpfe =

... give me this water, that I thirst not.Note in the examples:

John 7:28 althga lip dazoiduksh gT... = nicht bin ich selbst

hergebracht... = and I am not come of myself.Mark 14:28 ada zida ltha al gik ginTat gT... = and sobald ich

wieder aufgestanden sein werde = But after that I am risen.dazpiduksh is to be read dagoidukshk and ginTat is to be read giniatk

(passive formation). [[# 84 and 1889 Boas Report, p. 885, Passive. ]]b) of the pronominal suffix of the first person singular (absent)

(B.

John 8:49 ... yagai lthaudr ga Nagwadr ga = sondern ich ehre

meinen Vater = but I honor my Father.c) of the pronominal suffix of the second person singular:

Different forms also appear in this category according to thepreceding vowels or consonants. We list these different forms herewith reference to the variety of first person pronominal suffixes:

68

John 9:17 gaulth hou'un da wila wa-1 dida- gut wil gAga zant? =

was sagst du von ihm, dass er hat deine Augen aufgethan ? = What

sayest thou of him, that he hath opened thine eyes ?

John 11:43 Lazarus kshilun = Lazarus komm heraus! = Lazarus,

come forth.

John 17:8 gwil ltha na gilginam algiaga dash dupniat gu nha

gilginamun da goi = denn ich habe gegeben die Worte ihnen, die

(Worte) du mir gegeben hast = For I have given unto them the words

that thou gayest me.Mark 12:14 wilaiyum shimouunt = wir wissen, dass du

wahrhaftig bist = we know that thou art true.

Mark 6:23 ligi gau dum gwun3yun da goi = was du wirst bitten

von mir = Whatsoever thou shalt ask of me.

Mark 14:36 yagai gau hashagunt (hashak) = sondern was du willst

but what thou wilt.

Mark 8:26 gilau za am zTinin a gulzabut = gehe nicht hinein in

die Stadt = Neither go into the town.

Matt. 4:10 dum gup lthaudun ga MTyln ga Shimoigiatk gun ga,

adat amukshat nTat ga dum yakun ga = du sollst anbeten den Herrn,

deinen Gott, and nur ihm nachfolgen! = Though shalt worship the Lordthy God and him only shalt thou serve.

Luke 7:13 gilau wThouit gunt = nicht weine du = Weep not.

Luke 10:28 hoigiaga dTlamak gunt = du hast recht geantwortet

Thou hast answered right.John 4:31 y-a-.wuk gun = iss = eat.

Mark 10:19 gilau bTgum magaunshk gunt = du sollst nicht

falsches Zeugnis reden = Do not bear false witness.John 6:30 gau halthal dunt = was wirkest du? = What dost thou

work?

69

Matt. 27:40 lip geluksh dimautkshin = hilf dir selber = save

thyself.

Matt. 4:10 b5yin Satan = hebe dich weg, Satan = Get thee

hence, Satan.Matt. 16:19 ada ligi gau dum daklthin da lak halTzogut dum

daklthk ga gish ga zum lakaga; ada ligi gau dum lthuyin da lak

halizogut dum lthrik ga gish ga zum lakgga = und was du binden wirst

auf Erden, das wird gebunden sein im Himmel, und was du losen

wirst auf Erden, das wird lose sein im Himmel = and whatever thou

shalt bind on earth shall be bound in heaven: and whatsoever thoushalt loose on earth shall be loosed in heaven.

John 14:5 althga dup wilailth n'dalth dum aauyin = wir wiss en

nicht, wo du hingehst = we know not whether thou goest.

John 1 1 : 2 6 shimhoudikshin a gwai? = glaubst du das ?

Believest thou this ?

John 16:5 n'da dum £auyint? = wohin gehst du? (ebenso:

John 13','36) = Whither goest thou? (just as John 13:36).

John 5:14 ltha dimautkshint = du bist gesund geworden = thou

art made whole.

Mark 5:36 gilau bashin, am shimhoudikshin = fiirchte dich

nicht, sondern glaube = Be not afraid, only believe.Mark 1:44 Fmgaukshin... = opfere... = offer,Mark 7:29 doulthin = gehe hin! = go thy way.

Luke 18:20 wilwilaiyin yg.oulthemgushgut.. gilau shggiadint

du kennst die Gebote wohl.. du sollst nicht tOdten = Thou knowest the

commandments..Do not kill.

Mark 2:9 haldum ban.. ada ygn = stehe auf... und gehe hin! =

Arise... and walk.Matt. 27:40 tikiyan a lak zuzg,,zut = steige herab vom Kreuze'

come down from the cross.

70

d) of the pronominal suffix of the third person (singular and plural)

John 3:2 nrnTsh ga goidukshit gish ga awash Jesus gish ga atk

gaga, ada houit gish nTat = dieser kam zu Jesu in der Nacht und er

sprach zu ihm = The same came to Jesus by night, and said unto him.

John 3:26 ada gutgpiduksht gish John, ada houit gish nrat = und

sie kamen zu Johannes und sie sagten ihm = And they came unto John,

and said unto him.

John 4:42 ada houit gish ga hanak ga = und sie sprachen zum

Weibe = And said unto the woman, now we believe.

John 4:46 ada ltha gik gpiduksht gish ga Cana gish ga Galilee

ga = und er kam abermals nach Cana in Galilaea = So Jesus came

again into Cana of Galilee.

John 9:1 ada ashT yry-it ga = und wghrend er voraberging = And

as Jesus passed by.John 21:9 ltha rikshgoltht gish ga... = als sie austraten auf...

As soon as they were come to land.

John 6:59 nTnT gwai ga houit gish ga zum synagogue ga = solches

sagte er in der Synagoge = These things said he in the syngogue.e) of the pronominal suffix of the first person plural

um (B.: Em):(Here, too, we refer to the analogous forms of the pronominal

suffixes of the first and second person singular. )

John 1:45 ltha wTyum = wir haben gefunden = we have found.

John 4:22 wilaiyum = wir wissen = we know.

John 12:34 na ltha nakniTyum... = wir haben gehort = we have

heard.

John 8:52 wilaiyim = wir wissen = we know.

Mark 5:12 dum wil lamzagum dish dupnTat = ...damit wir in

sie hineinkommen = that we may enter into them.

Mark 10:33 habum = wir gehen hinauf = we go up.

71

John 12:38 na ltha gashimhoudiksha da na milmalshk gumt 9 =

wer glaubt denn, was wir predigen? = who hath believed our report?

John 4:22 ... gigTenak gumt... = wir beten = we worship.

Luke 17:10 wha tkulam-gm'm tkulhilkwgulimlthk ga numt

unniltze Knechte sind wir = We are unprofitable servants.

Mark 9:28 lthguksha num dup dum di kshaieagun dit? = konnten

wir ihn nicht austreiben = Why could we not cast him out

Matt. 11:17 yrihallami num = wir pfeifen = We have piped.

John 9:40 ada houit gish nTat, Drgashri'unsha nimT? = and sie

sprachen zu ihm: sind wir denn auch blind? = and said unto him, Are

we blind also?

John 9:41 ada al hou shimt gracin, NuknTazk ga num... = ihraber sprechet jetzt: wir sind sehend... = but now ye say, We see.

1) of the pronominal suffix of the second person plural:shim (B.: stm):

John 8:21 dum drishim = ihr werdet sterben = ye shall seek me,

and shall die.

John 1:39 gulshim = kommt = Come.

John 4:16 zutgoidukshim "6: gwa = kommt her = come hither.

John 2:5 wal shim = (das) thut ihr = whatsoever he saith unto

you, do it.John 10 :25, 26 ada althga shimhoudiksha shim = and nicht

glaubt ihr = ye believed not, ye believe not.

John 4:22 gigTenak ga shim gau wha wilai shimt = was ihr betet,

wisset ihr nicht = Ye worship ye know not what.

John 4:29 gul shim = kommt = Come.

B. The Possessive Pronoun

# 48. Here I again give the statements of Mr. Boas on the

subject at hand:

72

The independent form of the possessive pronoun is identical withthe nominative of the personal pronoun: mine, nE/ri.O. (nTlyti), etc.

The dependent possessive pronoun is affixed to the noun to whichit belongs. There are distinct forms for the object being present orabsent, and three tenses, past, present and future. There is no dif-ference between the. possessive form of the noun and the intransitiveverb, and it seems to the writer that according to the logical form ofthe Tsimshian language both must be considered identical.... Thetemporal prefixes and the forms for presence and absence are alsoidentical with those of the verb. [[ 1889 Boas Report, p. 882:

Possessive Pronoun; see page 73 for dependent paradigm. ]]

C. Article

# 49. I choose this name for the lack of any thing better. The

relevant terms neither modify nouns nor indicate the gender of thedefiniteness or indefiniteness of objects; rather they indicate thepresence or absence of objects, individuals, or events.

# 50. da and dada (dida) are always used when the speech is oflocal or temporal presence (usually dish is used instead of da -sh):

John 9:5 da dhayu da lak halizogut, adat nuyu na goibak da

halizogut = dieweil ich bin in der Welt, bin ich das Licht der Welt =

As long as I am in the world, I am the light of the world.

Mark 6:3 guksha nTnish da carpenter da gu gwa... ? = siehe,

ist das nicht dort der Zimmermann... ? = Is not this the carpenter...# 51. ga and gaga are always used when reference is made to

local or temporal absence, either past or future.(The forms gish and gut are used for ga-sh and ga-t. )

John 21:9 itha iikshgoltht gish ga gilhourf ga = als sie nun

austraten auf das Land = As soon then as they were come to land.

John 20:6 ada z7int gish ga zum n'toigiat ga = and er ging

hinein in das Grab = Then cometh Simon Peter following him, and went

into the sepulchre.

# 52. t'in indicates individuals who, present during events,

were participants [[in the events]].

9

Past Present Future

Pre sent Absent Present Absent Present Absent

1st person singular nE-15 nE-Fdae- -75 -rgaand-7da

dEm-77 dEm-gdag

2 nd I I n-En n-EndTE -En Enga dEm-En dEm-Enga

3 rd present singular n -Et n-Etga -Et -Etga dEm-Et dEm -Etga

3 rd ti absent n-da n- ga -daa -ga dEm-daa dEm-ga

1 st /1 plural n-Em n-Emda -Em -Emga dEm-Em dEm-Emga

2 nd I I I I n- sEm n- sEmda -sEm -sEmga dEm -sEm dEm-sEmga

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 882g Possessive Pronoun. ]](In the [[biblical]] texts of the Gospel translations nE > na, o > IT, En > un, sEm > shim, dEm > dum,etc.

74

Matt. 1:2 Abraham t'in dagoiduksh Isaac; adat Isaac t'in

dagoiduksh Jacob; ada Jacob t'in dagoiduksh Juda ga = Abraham zeugte

Isaac; Isaac zeugte Jacob; Jacob zeugte Juda (nicht allein, sondernmit der Frau zusammen!) = Abraham begat Isaac; and Isaac begat

Jacob; and Jacob begat Judas [[not alone, but together with his wife !]]

John 6:56 n-a7t in gaba na shamFyiit adat in aksha na ilthe'ytit =

wer da is set von meinem Fleische und da trinket von meinem Blute =

He that eateth my flesh, and drinketh my blood.

John 19:11 nrnTgun yagai gawil7ksha hadak ga t'in dagaudif da

gwan = deshalb aber hat der grgssere Sande, der mich dirtiberantwortet hat = therefore he that delivered me unto thee hath the

greater sin.

D. Pronoun lip

# 53. lip combines in one form the meaning of the reflexive anddeterminative self, and, where it is a question of a number of sub-

jects, of mutuality:Mark 4:28 -a.wilt lip dagoiduksh da yob a na gian dit = denn von

selbst bringt die Erde ihre Frucht = For the earth bringeth forth

fruit of herself.Mark 13:9 ada am lipgeluksh ama nTsh ga shim = und sehet

euch selbst gut vor = But take heed to yourselves.

Mark 15:30 lip-geluksh dimautkshin = hilf dir selber = Save

thy self.Mark 15:20 adat hoiyunsh ga na lip hoiyat ga = und sie zogen

ihm seine eigenen Kleider an = they... put their own clothes on him.

E. Demonstrative and Determinative Pronouns

# 54. The demonstrative pronouns gwa and gwai differ in use,

thus, that gwa in apposition goes behind a substantive in most cases,and gwai, on the other hand, in the substantive function appears

75

mostly at the beginning of sentences. Yet there are occasional

exceptions to these rules so that perhaps one can consider gwa only as

a hasty articulation of gwai.Example a) of gwa:

John 9:3 althga nrdi ligi hadak ga yZita gwa ligi nagiatk gut =

nicht hat weder dieser Mann gestIndigt, noch seine Eltern = Neither

hath this man sinned, nor his parents.John 7:27 al wilaiyum wil Watk ga yta gwa = doch wir wissen,

woher dieser Mensch gekommen = Howbeit we know this man whence

he is.b) of gwai:

Luke 9:21 yakyaoulthemakt gish ga what gwun maltha gwai ash

ligit na = er gebot, dass sie nicht dieses Jemandem sagen sollten = he

... commanded them to tell no man that thing.

Luke 15:2 anaug.a yi5ta gwai hadadak ga dit = dieser nimmt die

Stinder an = This man receiveth sinners.Luke 23:38 gwai king ga Jewsit = das ist der KOnig der Juden =

THIS IS THE KING OF THE JEWS.

# 55. dup gwa (gwai) is the plural of the [[two]] preceding

[[pronouns]].Mark 12:31 althga gik daulth ghawirekshum yaoulthem.g.0 shk

gish dup gwa = nicht giebt es noch ein grOsseres Gebot, als diese

(sind) = There is none other commandment greater than these [[are]].

John 21:15 Simon Peter, ... , ma ga shTebuniii ash dup gwa? =

Simon Petrus..., hast du mich lieber, als diese (mich lieb haben) ?

= Simon Peter... lovest thou me more than these [[ love me]] ?

# 56. Two other pronouns are evident in addition to gwa and

gwai. They are both formed from the same stem. This simple but

less common demonstrative stem is nT.

76

John 16:23 ada ricsh ga sha ga = und an demsethen Tage = And

in that day.

John 6:33 awil nT na anaitk gish ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-a-ga = denn

dies ist das Brod Gottes = For this is the bread of God. [[King James:

For the bread of God is he. 1]

# 57. The intensification of nT, specifically nTnT, is far more

frequent.

For example:Mark 13:11 ada al yazai ligi gau dum gwil tkul ginamtk ga did:

gwashim a nInT hourt, nini dum hou shimt = sondern was euch zu

derselben Stunde gegeben wird, dasselbe redet = but whatsoever shall

be given you in that hour, that speak ye.Mark 13:37 ada gau houya da gwashim, ninT houya da tkgnrdit

was ich aber euch sage, theses sage ich alien = And what I say unto

you I say unto all, Watch.

# 58. nTni gwai is still more emphatic:Luke 23:52 nTnT y5ta gwai gut in g.aush Pilate ga = eben dieser

Mann ging zu Pilatus = This man went unto Pontius Pilate.

Luke 21:22 'awll ni-nT sligsha gwai = denn eben diese Tage = for

just this day. [[King James: for these be the days. 1]

# 59. Another intensification occurs through shim (= very):

Matt. 15:28 ada shim ninTsh ga hour ga dimautkshash ga

lthg5lthgum hanakt ga = und in eben derselben Stunde ward gesund dieTochter = And her daughter was made whole from that very hour.

Matt. 17:18 ada shimnish ga hour ga wil dimautkshash ga

lthgwa yaa ga = und zu ebenderselben Stunde wurde der Knabe gesund

= And the child was cured from that very hour.

# 60. whati tkashnT occurs in the meaning the same":*

The concept of totality or universality is in the [[fragment]]tka. One is reminded of tka-nT (.= all, entire, whole), yet the

77

Luke 24:13 whati tk.ashnTsh ga sha ga = an demselben Tage = that

same day.

Luke 24:33 whati tkashnTsh ga hour ga = zu derselben Stunde

the same hour.# 61. In addition to whati tkashnT with a subsequent substantive

of time, whati tkashnTat occurs independently:Luke 13:1 whati tkashnTat ga ada hakhokshk gish ga nazazgout

ga... = zu derselben Zeit waren Etliche dabei... = There were

present at that season some... .

Matt. 18:1 whatit tkashnTat ga, ada Lutgpiduksh ga disciples

gish Jesus = zu derselben Stunde kamen die Jiinger zu Jesu = at the

same time came the disciples unto Jesus.

Another place: Matt. 14:1.

# 62. all-gni refers to an antecedent (= the same as before):

Matt. 26:44 houit gish ga lthInTsh ga algiak ga = er sagte

dieselben Worte (wie vorher) = he... saying the same words [[as

before]].Luke 10:7 ada lthanish ga wglp gulth wil 17.wanshim = and in

demselben Hause bleibet = And in the same house remain.

F. Relative Pronouns

# 63. gri = which, that, who:

John 7:28 ... yagai shimhou gut in haizT ga, gri ga wha wilai

shim ga = sondern es ist ein Wahrhaftiger, der mich gesandt hat,welchen ihr nicht kennet = but he that sent me is true, whom ye know

not.

connection or association is difficult to explain. [[tkani in ''TheGlossary" (German-Tsimshian): tlanT is the expression of universal-ity, totality, the sum of all. ]]

78

John 7:25 .guksht-a7 nrnT gwaya grit shrgilth zagwa dit ?

ist das der, welchen sie suchten zu tOdten? = [[look]] Is not this he,

whom they seek to kill?

# 64. gau = that which or whatever (quae):

Luke 20:25 ginam gau na giansh Caesar dash Caesart = gebet,

was Besitz des Kaisers ist, dem Kaiser = Render therefore unto

Caeser the things which be Caesar's.Luke 23:47 ada lthat nrsht ga centurion ga gau ga wilt ga = als

aber der Hauptmann sah, was sie thaten = Now when the centurion

saw what was done.

# 65. gau also serves to express the concept "thing" [[as

something, nothing, everything]]:Mark 10:27 ... awil althga gaulth lthgukshk ga dash ga

Shimoigiat ga Lak-gga = ...denn kein Ding ist unmOglich bei Gott =

..for with God all things are possible.Mark 8:25 ada mautk gut ga, ada "amsh gut wila nrsh ga tkaTnish

ga gau ga = und er wurde geheilt und sah alle Dinge wieder scharf =

and he was restored, and saw every man clearly.

# 66. na is a general relative pronoun (quicumque) [[he who,

whoever]]:

John 6:56 nit in gaba na shame-yut = wer von meinem Fleische

isset = whoever eateth of my flesh [[King James: He that eateth my

flesh]].

John 1:10 ada nrada na t'in zaba halizogut = und es (das Licht)

war es, was die Welt machte = and it [[the light]] was it, he who

made the world [[King James: That was the true Light, which lighteth

every man that cometh into the world]].

Here the light is personified [[This verse is actually John 1:9and not John 1:10]].

79

G. Interrogative Pronouns

# 67. The usual expression for the substantive interrogative

pronoun is ria da gu (quis est qui) [[who]].

John 8:25 na da = wer bist du? (ebenso: 21, 12) =

Who art thou[[just as 21:12]].

John 21:20 Mry-En, na da gu dumt in wa' adint? = Herr, wer

wird dich verrathen? = Lord which is he that betrayet thee?

# 68. tig which otherwise has the meaning quicumque [[# 66]]

also appears occasionally in a similar sense [[to na da gu (quis est

qui) # 67]]:

John 8:46 na a gwashimlth dumt in gwuniazinith hadak gT? = wer

unter euch kannmich einer Luge ziehen? = which [[who]] of you con-

vinceth me of sin [[lying]].

John 9:36 ada houit ga, Na ga, Mrya-n, dum... ? = and ersprach: Herr, welcher (ist es), auf dass.... ? = He answered and

said, Who is he, Lord, that I might believe on him?

# 69. gau ya (da) gu = what?

Mark 1:27 gau ya gu gwa? = was ist das ? = What thing is this ?

H. Indefinite Pronouns

# 70. limit rig. = somebody, someone, anybody, anyone, any

man;'

John 9:4 dumzoiduksha da lthgukshk ga dum

halthalshash ligit nat = es wird die Nacht kommen, wo es unmOglich

1st, dass Jemand wirkt = the night cometh, when no man can work.

John 9:31 ada al amit gigrenak ga dit ligit na ga Shimoigiat ga

Laic-4a = aber wenn. Jemand betet zu Gott = but if any man be a

worshipper of God.

# 71. althgat rig: = nobody, no one, no man.

80

John 8:20 ada althgat na in eat = and Niemand griff ihn = and

no man laid hands on him.

John 7:30 ada am althgat riat in gwgntk gut = aber Niemand

r`ithrte ihn an = but no man laid hands on him.

# 72. ain(lth) na = (emphatically) nobody, no one, no man:

John 8:10, 11 ainith na di gut in dabun? Ada houit ga. Althgat

na, Miyan = hat dich Niemand verdammet? Sie aber sprach: Niemand,

Herr = hath no man condemned thee ? = She said, No man, Lord.

# 73. ligi gau = something, anything; althga ligi gau = nothing.

John 9:33 lthguksh ga dum wal did'a ligi gaut = es ist unmOglich,

dass er etwas thut = If this man were not of God, he could do nothing.

John 14:14 ami ma dum shim gwur5 ligi gau dg goi T na vigyut

= wenn ihr bitten werdet um etwas mich in meinem Namen = If ye

shall ask any thing in my name, I will do it.

81

IV. THE VERB

# 74. Before dealing in detail with the chapter on formatives, I

think it appropriate and useful in the interest of greater clarity, to

insert here the tabular synopsis of verbs and related comments which

Mr. Boas has placed at my disposal. Because his synopsis and com-

ments give a clear picture of Tsimshian verbs and are fundamentally

suited to the introductory process, they serve [[both]] to form the

basis for my further exposition and to facilitate the understanding of

that which follows.Note: my contingent remarks are placed in [[single]] square

brackets.[[This tabular synopsis of verbs and comments comes from the

1889 Boas Report, pp. 883-86: The Verb. This citation serves for

double bracketed information found in sections # 75 through # 86. ]]

# 75.

1st person:2nd3rd3rd

I I

I I

I I

The Intransitive Verb.Present tense.Singular.(n) -(mE) En- Et (Et)

Etga, Egapresentabsent

Plural.(dEp) Em(mEsEm) - EnsEm(dEp) Et (Et)(dEp) Etga, Ega.

The prefixes placed in parentheses are not always used, butseem to serve merely for the purpose of giving greater clearness oremphasis to the sentence.

# 76. The imperfect tense is formed by the prefix nE, thefuture by dEm. It seems that in the imperfect the personal prefixesare almost always used. They are contracted with the temporalcharacter.

Imperfect tense1st person2nd3rd3rd I I

presentabsent

Singular Plural

nan -onEm - EnnE - EtnE - Ega

nap - EmnamsEm EnsEmnap Et, or nE - Etnap - Ega, or nE Ega

82

Singular PluralFuture tense

1st person dEm (n) o dEm (dEp) Em2nd dEm (mE) -En dEm (mEsEm) EnsEm3rd It present dEm Et dEm (dEp) Et3rd absent dEm - Ega dEm (dEp) - Ega

The perfect is formed by tla preceding the present tense, theplusquamperfectum and futurism exactum by the characteristic par-ticles of these tenses preceding,the perfect.

he has been sick, tla sTe-p§Et [[sT/epgEt]].he had been sick, na tla siepgEt [[,sT/gpgEt]].he will have been sick, dEm tla sTe-pgEt [[sT'FpgEt]].

# 77.

1 st person2 nd3 rd

Interrogative.Singular. Plural.- Enaw7 EnamF.mE Erie" - Eseme.

e# 78 Negative.

1 st person singular, atlgE e 1 st person plural, atlgE - Em2 nd " atlgE - En 2nd atlgE - Es Em.3 rd atlgE - Et 3 rd 11 atlgE - Et.

Note. Nouns and adjectives with the verbum substantivum areinflected in the same way as the verbum intransitivum. If the noun isaccompanied by an adjective, the former is inflected.

I am a Tsimshian, TsEmsianO- [[Ts'Emsian"51].I am a good woman, amg, hanarano [[ama' ha/IT/ran-OSyou are Tsimshian, Ts'Emsi-SnsEm [[Ts'EmsiginsEm]].are you a Tsimshian? Ts'EmsianEne r[Ts'EmsianEnen?

The third person is frequently expressed by adding the demonstrativepronoun:

they are Tsimshian,

# 79.

Ts'Emsian dEp guasga [[gua'sga]].[[The Transitive Verb]]

Singular3rd 3rd

1st 2nd Person PersonObject Person Person Present Absent

;-41st person present mE -77 t-Eno` t-Enha

al 1st " absent mE-7 t-Ene- t-Enrga'-'0,) 2nd II n-En t-En t-Enga.,.9 3rd 11 presentr.r1 3rd II absent

-ut-e-Ega

-Ent-Enga

-EdEt-Etga

-EdEt-Etga

Object

1st person3.1ni 2nd

3rd " presentII, 3rd " absent

Object

83

Singular3rd 3rd

1st 2nd Person PersonPerson Person Present Absent

mE-Em t-EnEm t-EnEmgan- sEm t-EnsEm t-EnsEmga

- ut -Ent -EdEt -EdEt-ZEga -Enga -Etga -Etga

Plural1st Person 2nd Person

1st person present1st I I absent2nd

,9 3rd present3rd absent

1st2nd3rd3rd

presentabsent

dEp-En- Emt- Emga

dEp-sEm-Emt- Emga

mEsEm-3.mEsEm-e-

- EsEmt- EsEmga

mEsEm-Em

- EsEmt,,-EsEmga

[[correction of the first person singular present object, third personsingular absent:on page 82:: t---EnVga]]

It will be seen that the object generally appears as the suffix ofthe verb. This makes the inflexion very much like that of thepossessive pronoun, and it must probably be understood in the sameway as the possessive pronoun; for instance, I see you = I your seeing.In accordance with this factthat the object appears as the suffix ofthe verb--is the other: that when the object is in the plural the verbhas the plural form, while it has the singular form when the subjectis in the plural: I know you, nwulwulNsEm [[nwulwulesEm]]; youknow me, mEsEm wurgyo [[wuran.iyo]].

The tenses are formed in the same way as those of the intransi-tive verb.

# 80

Object1st person2nd "3rd1st2nd3rd

It

Interrogative.

singularIf

plural

I I

Singular2nd PersonmE-owe-

-Eng*me -Erne-

- Ene-

3rd Persont - owet-Ene--Ede-

t-Eme".t-sErn7-EdF

Object1st person singular2nd3rd1st2nd3rd

plural11

Plural2nd Person 3rd PersonmEsEm-owe- t -owe

t-En-e- EsEm-e-

mEsEm-Em-e- t-Em-e-.. t- sErne"

- EsEm-e- -Ede-

84

[{correction of the first person singular object, third person singularon page 83: t-- - owe']]

[[In]] the interrogative there is no distinction of presence and absence.

# 81.

Object1st person singular2nd3rd1st2nd

Object1st person2nd 'I

3rd1st2nd

plural11

Negative.atlgE-.

1stPerson

n-Enn-t mE-t

mE-Emn-sEm

Singular2ndPersonmE-e-

Plural

3rdPersont -et -Ent-tt-Emt-sEm

1st Personsingular

plural

dEp-EndEp-t

dEp-sEm

Imperative.# 82. I have not reached a satisfactory understanding of the

formation of the imperative. The following examples show that theindicative is frequently use1l for expressing an order:

Singular: eat! ya-wicigEn! [[y-EiwiqgEn!]]drink! SksEn! [[aiksEn!]]sit down! clIgn!

Plural: eat! yl.wiqsEm!* [{y-SilwiqsEm!]]drink! lalksEsEm! [[lailkoEsEm!]]sit down! w4nsEm! [[walusEn!]]

2nd PersonmEsEm--e-

mEsEm-tmEsEm-Em

Here according to the rule (# 34) tql/oqksEm (tkauk shim) oughtto be used.

85

In other cases I found the infinitive (stem) of the verb used as inimperative form:

sit down! d'a!warm the water sE gyZ.muk aks [[sE gyaimuk akscome in! ts'een! [[ts'Fen!]]

Another imperative is formed with the suffix -tl [-lth]:eat it! g'gptl!look at him! neetl! [[nFletl!]]take it from me! dV watktl [[de watktl a 4.11!]]

The imperative first person plural is formed in various wayslet us sit down! kaltse wdnEm! [wa/nEm!]]let us look at him! sTntse dEp nFest ! [sha'unza] [[sZT/ntse

dEp dgiest!]]let us look at him! watse dEp neestl! Hwialtse dEp niest '1]let us go up the river branch! gyilA`.. ts'altlegua [[gyil'av

tslitlegua!]]The imperative negative is formed with gyilA.'Idse! do not

[gilau see later under "Negation" [[# 257, # 270]]; za (dse) [[the Boasform]] is a special modal particle # 132. ]

Note 1. - It will be noted that in the negative and interrogativethe first person singular ends in 7 [7], while in the indicative it endsinn [TT]. In the former case the person is evidently considered absent.

Note 2. - The first person singular has frequently, instead of-7, the suffix -En6. In transitive verbs is used when there is nodefinite object; for instance, I strike it, t,75usken.ut f[t(T'uskenut]], butI strike my beast, to'usiT kgye) [[tZilus-o- k7.1yego-]]. In the case ofintransitive verbs I am unable to give any rule. The use of -En7 or-7 depends upon the adverb accompanying the verb. It may be thatwhenever the state expressed by the verb is defined -Ciis used [mostlikely].

I am sick, siepgEni5 [[sTigpgEn5]].I am always sick, tliwna sie-pg77[[tlew5la sT/Fpg6]].

I am tired, sonatlEno [[son-g.4,1EnCi]].I am again tired, tlagyik sonZt17, Rtlagyik son-57417n

I am hungry, kitZEn7 [[;(c17/En,77].I am always hungry, tlb"..wina kItFy7 Rt17,/w7la k(te.'yZi]].

I am asleep, qst'a(,qE26 HqstVciEnO]].I want to sleep, hasaran dEm qstaqo [[has7./ran dEm

qstSA5]]

Note 3. - When the word terminates with a vowel, y is insertedbetween the end of the stem and .73 [a] of the first person singular. Thesame is done in the case of the first person of the possessive pronoun

86

- rrI knot, wulayo LiwurglyS]j. I use it, hlyut f[la'avyudj, mymother, nays [rnia`,/yOl]. Frequently a k is found inserted. I am notable to explain its use [compare the euphonic k (also k) # 8]

Participle.# 83. It seems that the present participle is formed by redup1i-

cationto speak, lgyaq [[ellgyaq]].speaking, EElgyaq [[EE'lgyaq]].

to sew, tlSok.sewing, tltloopk f[t1t1-6/opk]].

rrto eat, yawij1k Lora wiqkajj.eating, h7y-lwiqk [[he-ya-/wiqk]].

The past participle is _ormed by the suffix -de (see passive)'to sleep, qstP.q. [rciestP-qllhaving, slept qs.t.qde.[[qst.qde-]].

to walk, iahaving walked, iTd-e-

to say, h7u.having said, ha7ud7 Dialudefl.

Passive.# 84. It seems that the passive is somewhat irregular. It

terminates generally in -k, joined to the stem by s or tto tell, matl.told, matlk.to strike, tiCius.struck, t'Susk [[tIC-/usk]].

There are a number of other forms:to kill, ts'ak.killed, tsIFIcsa.

to hate, lEbalEqs [[lEbV1Eqs]].hated, lEbalEqdg. [[lEb-a7/1Eqde]].

to do,done, walde

to say, h-gu.said, h-a--ude. [[h-g/ude]].

From these passive forms a present, past, future, etc areformed in the same way as from the stem.

87

# 85. Inchoative, formed by reduplication:I get sick, sisitepgEn"6"[[sisTvepgEn5]).I get hungry, kukIte'En7 [[kuketZ/En71].I get tired, se-son-StlEn7).

# 86. Imitative, formed by sis- and by reduplication combined'I feign to be sick, sissisTepgEn7 [[sissisT'epkEn7]]I feign to be hungry, siskukIte"EgEnZ UsiskukftE/EgEn011I feign to be tired, sissisEin.VtlgEnO [[sissis7n57/t1gEnc7]].I feign to sleep, sisqaqstalcisEn7 UsisqaqstaicisEn311

# 87. Following, now, I have a series of examples which morethan anything else should illustrate the use of the transitive and the

intransitive verb. Because they are taken exclusively from thetranslations of the Gospels, let it once again be briefly noted that

mE = ma, dEp = dup, e = T, tla = ltha.

mEsEm = ma shim, Et = it, nE = na [[etc. ]]

En = un (in).Matt. 18:26 Mry7n, ghadTkgaudun a goi, ada n'dum libalda

tk;nrdadT. gwan = Herr, habe Geduld mit mir, und ich will dir allesbezahlen = Lord, have patience with me, and I will pay thee all.

Matt. 8:19 n'dum gwilthy7kun da... = ich will dir nachfolgen,

= I will follow thee....Matt. 8:21 Miya'n anauk za gha ksh.gauzum doulthra n'dum wa',&a

nagw-gdir = Herr, erlaube, dass ich zuvor hingehe, damit ich meinenVater begrabe = Lord, suffer me first to go and bury my father.

Matt. 16:18 Petert nu,gun, ada lak lauba gwai n'dum wil ha"in

na Church grit = du bist Petrus, und auf diesem Felsen will ich meine

Kirche aufbauen = thou art Peter, and upon this rock I will build my

church.

Matt. 16:19 ada n'dum gilginam haZz.ash ga kingdomsh ga

1.11k-gga gwan = und ich will dir die Schlitssel des Himmelreiches geben

= And I will give unto thee the keys of the kingdom of heaven.

Matt. 18:29 ada n'dum libalda da gwan = und ich will

dir (es) bezahlen = and I will pay thee [[it]].

88

Matt. 5:17 gilau haligaz.aud shim za goidukshTlth n'dumlthnthia wilalaut dilth prophetsit: althga goidukshilth n'dum

yazai dit = glaubet nicht, dass ich gekommen bin,

damit ich auflOse das Gesetz und die Propheten: ich bin nichtgekommen, damit ich es auflne, sondern damit ich es eralle = Thinknot that I am come to destroy the law, or the prophets: I am not come

to destroy, but to fulfill.Matt. 22:44 dlign a nakshimy-a.c7na, wagait n'dum wil dau

nibilthgaushk gunt a lthrig.ashashTunt = setze dich zu meiner Rechten,

bis ich legen werde deine Feinde zum Schemel deinerSit thou on my right hand, till I make thine enemies thy footstool?

Matt. 23:29 ... awil ma shim zipzaba wildau prophetsit, ada

ma shim g.anTiuna n'toigiadum = denn ihr bauet die

Grg.ber der Propheten und ihr schmackt die Grgber der Gerechten...= because ye build the tombs of the prophets, and garnish the

sepulchres of the righteous.Matt. 10:17 ada ma shim am-a7-nT giadit = hutet euch aber vor

Menschen = But beware of men.Matt. 20:22 althga ma shim wilai gau gwunCIT shimt. Althga ma

shim da' aklthk gulth ma dum shim lilaksh di gu ha'aksha ltha dumakshiit? = ihr wisset nicht, was ihr bittet. Kgnnet ihr nicht trinken

den. Ketch, den ich trinken werde = Ye know not what ye ask. Are ye

able to drink of the cup that I shall drink of.Matt. 20:21 ma dum ginam dum wan dupkad71 da klthgri

gieb, dass meine zwei Mane sitzen... = Grant that these my two

sons may sit....Matt. 26:17 rildl hashagun dup dum wil gwildum zouun ma dum

wil gaba Passovert? = wo willst du, dass wir bereiten, damit du issestdas Osterlamm? = Where wilt thou that we prepare for thee to eat the

passover ?

89

Matt. 4:9 tk5/11.-gwai gau dum ginamri da gwan, zida klthnashg7ut

gun, ada ma lthaudr = dies alles will ich dir geben, so du niederfnlstund mich anbetest = All these things will I give thee, if thou wilt fall

down and worship me.

Matt 26:75 hawalthk ga algia.g.a zCiuzut, ada gwilrma dum

ksh-inagout = ehe der Hahn krghen wird, wirst du mich dreimalverleugnen = Before the cock crow, thou shalt deny me thrice.

Matt. 22:29 ma gishgTshin shimt, althga ma shim wilaish ga nal\illth7dukshum Damish ga... = ihr irret nicht kennet ihr die heilige

Schrift... = Ye do err, not knowing the scriptures....John 2:19 ... ada n'dum gik hai'in dit = ...und ich will ihn

wieder aufbauen = ...and in three days I will raise up.John 6:40 ada n'dum gik ginran = und ich will ihn wieder

auferwecken... = and I will raise him up on the last day.John 7:8 al hawalthk ga n'dum di gau rialgiadit grarin = aber ich

will noch nicht mit geben jetzt auf das Fest = I do not go up yet unto

this feast.John 20:15 malthilth ma wil shgu da goi, ada n' dum g7 dit=

saget mir den Ort, und ich will ihn holen = tell me the place and I willget him. [[King James: tell me where thou hast laid him, and I willtake him away. ]]

Luke 9:61 n'dum yagunt, Mryrn = ich will dir nachfolgen, Herr

= Lord, I will follow thee.Luke 10:3 na hashhaiz shim hoigia.ga da wagia da shpagait

gibout = ich sende euch als die L;.'mmer mitten unter die WOlfe = I

send you forth as lambs among wolves.

Luke 12:5 ada gwun.137yiltk ga shim... = ich will euch

aber zeigen = But I will forewarn you.Luke 12:18 ada n'dum zipzaba.galikl7ksha dit; ada nrnin'durn wil

lridadau .66-mina gralsh gat = und ich will grOssere (Scheunen) bauen

90

and ich will dort hinein sammeln alle meine Ernte = I will , build

greater [[barns]] and there will I bestow all my harvest. [[King

James: my fruits and my goods, ]]Luke 20:3 n'dum di gtradak shim da gaut = ich will euch auch

nach etwas fragen = I will also ask you one thing.Luke 20:8 ada althga n'dum di ligi maltha 017 gwashim... = und

ich will euch auch nicht sagen... = Neither will I tell you...Luke 22:16 gup althga n'dum gik gapt... = ich werde nicht

wieder davon essen... = I will not any more eat thereof.Matt. 24:42 ma zun shim 1171tht; awil althga ma shim wilaish ga

sha ga dum da z_oiduksh ga M7ya,"n shim ga = darum wachet; denn ihr

wisset nicht den Tag, wo kommen wird euer Vater = Watch therefore:

for ye know not the day [[King James: the hour]] your Father [[King

James: Lord]] will come [[King James: doth come]].

Matt. 24:26 gilau ma za shim hapt = gehet nicht heraus = go not

forth.Matt. 13:18 ma ,gun shimnakri5 wiltkulzieunshk ga wila w-"1

hilkzurramuksha dit = so hOret nun das Gleichniss von dem S'a!emann

= Hear ye therefore the parable of the sower.

Matt. 19:19 ... dTlth ma dum shiebun shila giadun nTwa71dat lip

nqgun. . . = und du sollst lieben deinen NW.chsten wie dick selbst = and,

Thou shalt love thy neighbor as thyself.Matt. 28:5 'Ewil wilaiyir ma shim gwilthgagTelsh ,Tesusit = denn

ich weiss, ihr suchet Jesum = for I know that ye seek Jesus.Matt. 22:18 gau ma .g.un shim shanadut? = weshalb versuchet

ihr mich = Why tempt ye me.Matt. 22:21 ninilth ma ,gun shim ginam dish Caesar... =

deshalb gebet dem Kaiser.... = Render therefore unto Caeser....Luke 22:42 amilth ma anaukt, ma La ha'aksha gwaya goi = wenn

du es willst, so nimm du diesen Kelch von mir = if thou be willing,

91

remove this cup from me.Luke 7:46 althga ma di lauzilth.gouuzTa gum_goushrit = nicht

mit Oel salbst du mein Haupt = My head with oil thou didst not anoint.

Luke 15:23 ada- ma shim da_g_oidukshlth shiyagum lthgum

mishmtishit = und bringet ein gemastetes Kalb her = And bring hither

the fatted calf.

John 2:8 sld- °una ma shim zuzit, ada ma shim ginam da mry-an

Malgiadit = schOpfet nun und gebet es dem Speisemeister (Herr,Oberaufseher des Festes) = Ladle out now and give it to the chief of

the food [[master, inspector-general of the festival]]. [[King James:

Draw out now and bear unto the governor of the feast. ]]

John 8:13 ma lipgeluksh mag.aunshk gunt = du zeugest von dir

selbst = Thou bearest record of thyself.John 8:40 ada at ma shim shigilth zaqudat graa = jetzt aber

sucht ihr mich zu tOsdten = But now ye seek to kill me.

John 4:27 gau ma gun dadgluk dida? = weshalb redest du mit

ihr ? = Why talkest thou with her ?John 7:52 ma di wak gunT grilth Galilee? = bish du auch aus

Galilla = Art thou also of Galilee.John 6:34 lth7 ma wila ginam anal nahod un dl" gum = immer

gieb das Brod, von dem du sprichst, uns = Lord evermore give us

this bread.John 20:15 malthilth ma wil sher da goi, ada n'durri

sage den Ort mir und ich will ihn holen = tell me the place and I will

get him. [[King James tell me where thou hast laid him, and I will

take him away. ]J

John 21:15 Simon Peter, ... ma gashTebuntir ash dup gwa =

Simon Petrus, hast du mich lieber, als diese (mich haben) =

Simon Peter, ...lovest thou me more than these [[have me]].John 6:26 ma shim gwilthgagueltr = ihr sucht mich = Ye seek me.

92

John 528 gilau ma shim 17.shana7lthk ga gwa = wundert each

daraber nicht zi Marvel not at this.

John 4,'.35 ada ma shim ni. lak shikshindointk gut = and sehet auf

das Feld = look on the fields.John l82,9 gaulth ma shim wil tkaTsha drya gu yaa gwa ? = was

bringet ihr fur Kiage wider diesen Menschen? = What accusation bring

ye against this man'John 18'31 shim Ca-.1th ada ma shim lip dapt "a7n'lip wilalaut ga

shimt = nehmet ihr ihn hin u.nd richtet ihn nach eurem eigenen Gesetz

= Take him and judge him according to your law.John 196 shim lip ggith, ada ma shim lizagwa da lak g.uz-algui =

nehmet ihn selber hin und schlagt ihn ans Kreuz ! = Take ye him, and

crucify him.John 3J1 ada ma nakn-o na kshta-muk dit, ada al ma lthgukshin

ma dum maltha n'da wil watk ga dit... = und du horst sein Sausen,

aber du kannst nicht sagen, woher er (der Wind) kommt... = And thouhearest the sound thereof, but canst not tell whence it [[the Wind]]

cometh....John l3:7 gau wal7 althga ma wilait = was ich thue,

das weisst du jetzt nicht... = What I do thou knowest not now.

John 6 36 ltha ma shim niazat... = ihr habt mich gesehen...= That ye also have seen me....

John 653 arn7 ma za shim wha gapsh ga na shamesh gaLthg7Ithk gish ga giat ga. di-1th ma za shim wha aksh ga... = wenn ihr

nicht esset das Fleisch des Menschensohnes und wenn ihr nicht trin-

ket... = If you do not eat the flesh of the Son of man, and drink his

blood.... [[King James Except ye eat the flesh of the Son of man,

and drink his blood.. 0 .]]

Mark 1102 ada ma shim dag.oiduksht = und ftThret es her = lead

it here. [[King ..Tames bring him. ]]

93

(Mark 12 15 gau ma gun shim shanhadut? = weshalb versuchetihr mich?) = [[Mark 12:15 Why tempt ye me ?]]

Mark 14:6 gau ma gun shim shiTwanau did57? = was bekt:mmert

ihr sie ? = why trouble ye her?Mark 1210 ai.nith ma shim lizk di gu n'Ithodukshum Darnisha

gwa? = habt ihr ouch nicht gelesen in der heiligen Schrift dieses?(ain ist eine andere Negation als althga und wird spqter genauer

charakterisirt werden; man beachte ma shim... ) = And have ye not

read this scripture. [rain is a negation other than althga and will becharacterized more exactly later; notice ma shim. 1]

Mark 4:13 ainith ma shim wilai di gti wiltkulnZ:Unshk ga gwa ?

ada n' da ma dum shim wila wilai tic-".a.nT wiltkulnukne-unshk gut? =

versteht ihr dieses Gleichnis nicht? und ihr wolit alle anderenGleichnisse'verz.teher ?= Know [[King James: understood]] not this

parable? and how then will ye know [[King James: understand]] all

parables?Mark 1:40 amTma za anaukt, da' aklthkgun ma dum shakshanu--

= wenn du es willst, so kannst du mich reinigen = If thou wilt, thou

canst make me clean.Matt. 17..16 ada nan dagpiduksh dada n.a disciples gunt = und

ich habe ihn zu den-ten 7:u'ingern gebracht = And I brought him to thy

disciples.Matt. 25:35 nan lirgtTangwagantit, ada ma shim gilakshat; nan

lukshzabana, ada ma shim zilumga dirt = ich bin durstig gewesen,und ihr habt mich get rnket; ich bin ein Fremdling gewesen, und ihrhabt mich beherbergt = I have been [[Kind James: was]] thirsty, and

ye have given [[King :lames gave]] me drink: I have been [[King

James: was]] a stranger, and ye have come unto me [[King James:

took me in]].

Matt. 25:36 nan shrepk ga nut, ada ma shim ziiaiyu ya; nanItidhgna da walp dakle-it ada g.0 tzoidukshi rn. t a goi = ich bin krank

94

gewesen, and ihr habt mich be suchet; ich bin im Gef.ngniss gewesen,

and ihr seid zu mir gekommen = I have been [[King James: was]]

sick, and ye have visited [[King James: visited]] me I have been

[[King James was]] in prison, and ye have come [[King James:

came]] unto me.Luke 22 35 nan da gwilth hash-haiz shimt... = ich sandte euch

= I sent you.

John 17'25 o hoigiagum Nagwa, althga n't wilaiyin halizogut,

ada nan al wilaiyint = gerechter Vater, die Welt kennet dich nicht,ich aber kenne dich = 0 righteous Father, the world knows [[King

James: hath not known]] thee not, but I know [[King James: have

known]] thee.

John 17:4 nan lthaudint a lak halizog_ut = ich habe dich verklgret

out Erden I have glorified thee on earth.John 1:50 nan nTazun = ich sah dich = I saw thee.John 131 ada althga nan wilait = und ich kannte ihn nicht = And

I knew him notJohn 17.12 ashihahokshk-gii dash dupniat, ada nan dakdok

na zum WET.nt; na gitginamun da goi, ada nan habilbaul dit = w°a!larend

ich bei ihnen war, da erhielt ich sie in deinem Namen; welche du mirgegeben hast, die bewahrte ich = While I was with them in the world,

I kept them in thy name; those that thou have given [[King James:

gave]] me I have kept.Mark 1532 dup dum wil nrsh dit = damit wir es sehen = that we

see it. [[King James: may see]].Mark 212 wagait hawalthk ga dup di nTlth n'lth v11.1 da gwa =

noch nie haben wir solches gesehen = Never have we seen such. [[King

James: We never saw it on this fashion. ]]

Mark 1g36 adat lryagut ga dup Simon ga dTith na shiksheOlt ga

and es folgten Simon und die, die bei ihm waren, ihm nach = And

95

Simon and they that were with him followed after him.Mark 3.12 agwTrnaksh gut dup naun drlth waigiant t'in gwilth-

gav, int c raussen fragen deine Mutter und deine Brt{der nach dir =

thy mother and thy brethren without seek [[King James: ask]] for

thee

Mark L20 adat 11-rqucridakshish dup nagw7t gish ga zum

agwYkshai. ga = und sie liessen ihren Vater im Schiffe zurUck = And

they left the r father [[King James: father Zebedee]]in the ship.

Mark 9.5 sha'unza dup zipzaplth gwilidalth guba htiwa-lp = lasst

cans drei Hateri bauen = let us build [[King James: make]] threetabernacles:

96

V. FORMATIVES

# 88 Under this name we combine affixes and independent

auxil,aries They submit to the following classification:

A deperident formatives (affixes):

1) placed before (prefixes)2) placed after (suffixes)

3 se rted within [[infixes]]

13 independent formatives:

I aux.liary [[verbs]] of time and modality

2) adverbs

3) prepositions

4) conjunctions

5) interjectionsAddendum: Certain afformatives appear, [[it is]] true, some-

times as independent words, sometimes as mere structural elements.

Thus, ksha (- oat, forth, leave) a is found as a free-standing, inde-pendent word with the meaning "to go out, " "to leave. " [[Compare

1889 Boas Report. p 879' # 4. KsEr (singular)-ksq (plural) = to

leave the house; p. 887: Formation of words, ksci = out and to leave

the house ±; The same occurs with tiki, sha, gwilth, shila, and hT.

aksha- The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German): is a prefix which"out. " 'forth. " [[It indicates the movement from inside a

place as seen by the person outside. ]]Luke 13 28j 20:12, 24:50; Mark 9:47, 1:43, 1:44 5:40, etc.See -4 106.

b, The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German):kshu, see Rau [[g.au (B.: = to go]]: (B.: ksEr) = to go out..0

probat iy related to kshab. ksliauk, see gau (B. : = to go out, to go forth, to leave is

the plural of the singular kshil (see there),Mark 1046, 5 :13, 16:8; John 4:30; Matthew 27:32, 8:32,8:34, 9 :32.

97

as much as because these [[afformatives]] in by far the most

cases were portrayed in the text [[of the Gospel translations]] as

affixes, I have, thus, also treated them as such here in the grammar.As to the particles na, ma, and dup, I here refer to the chapter

on verbs ( 'Hi 74-87) where I believe I have previously furnished

enough [linformation]],A. Dependent Formatives

1. Prefixes

ga-

# 89. ga (# 33) expresses the meaning "more" with respect to

numter (plurality) rather than intensity:Mark 4,33 adat ga_gash ga tkInTsh ga gau gish ga disciples gut

ga : und er legte alles seinen VIngern aus = And he explained every-

thing to his disciples [[King James: and with many such parables

spc,ke he the world unto them, as they were able to hear it. ]]

Mark 5;42 ada shim winksh ga galashanalthashk gut ga = undsie entsetzten sich in hohem Grade = and they were amazed to a high

degree, [[King James And they were astonished with a great

astonishment. ]]hak-

# 90 h7k (# 33) indicates a plurality of subjects, of objects,or, of actions and of the nomina actoris [[nouns of agent]] stemming

from the latterMark 15'16 adat wil shag.ait hukhEitk gish ga tk-gni7t ga = und sie

riefen alle zusammen = and they called all together. [[King James!

and they call together the whole band. ]]

Mark 6:7 ada wilt gwunhakhilitk gish ga kapault ga da dupkadEl

gish ga aw-gt ga = und er berief die ZwOlfe zu sich = And he called unto

him the twelve.

98

gwilth-

# 91. gwilth is indicative of something repeating or continuing or

occurring at different locations ( "everwh.ere, " "around").

Mark 67 ada wit hrlqush gut gwilth hashhaizt ga... = und erfing an, sie umher zu senden.... = and he... and began to send them

forth.

Mark 6 12 ada gwilth adoultht ga = und sie gingen umher And

they went out.

Note. Compare again at this point the more rarely seen plural

prefixes lu, li, la in the section on plural formation # 31.shil-

# 92. shil- comitative expresses a very close association [[as

in "together with"]]°Mark 6022 dilth shilwant ga = und denen, die dabei sassen = and

them that sat with him.Mark 14754 adat shilawa-nsh ga tkulhrikwa-ulimlthk gaga = und er

sass zusammen mit den Knechten = and he sat with the servants.

klthna-

# 93. This prefix has the meaning "down":Mark 311 ada klthnadauk gut gish ga hazaklthk gut ga = und sic

fielen vor ihm nieder = they... fell down before him.Mark 5:33 ada klthnashgriutk gut gish ga hazaklthk gut ga = und

sie fiel vor ihm nieder = the woman... fell down before him.klthriun-, klthurn-

# 94. The examples are:Matt. 513 amuksha dum kshadalth ga dit dT.lth durn.t kltht.Tun

giaksh da gashashrgiadit = nur dass man es herausschiAte und dass

die Ft.rsse der Menschen es niedertreten = ...but to be cast out and

to be trodden under foot of men.

99

Matt. 13:30 ada ma shim klthum dakdakltht... = und bindet es

in Bi:ndel... = and bind them bundles.Matt. 14:24 awil klthum-bashkshit ga = denn der Wind war

zuwider 7-- for the wind was contrary.

Matt. 7:6 .. op zit klthiitungiakshit auf dass sie dieselben

nicht zertreten = in order that they not trample them. [[King James:

lest they trample them. ]]Mark 15:19 ada klthurrigulgaisha- gut gish gut = und er fiel auf

seine Kniee nieder = and he fell down on his knees. [[King James:

and bowing their knees worshipped him. ]]In most cases this prefix also is based upon the idea "down. "

How then are Matthew 13:30 and 14:24 to be explained?

bak-

# 95. This prefix has the meaning "up, " "upward ":

Luke 6:12 ash gut bakg.aush ga lak sh.g.unTshta gish ga dum

gigrengwakltht ga = und er ging herauf auf einen Berg, urn zu beten =

that he went up on [[King James: out onto]] a mountain to pray.Luke 2:42 ada wilt bakhapt ga = da gingen sie herauf = they went

up to Jerusalem,man-

# 96. [[This prefix]] "man" likewise indicates the direction

"up, " "upward":

John 20:17 "a7wil hawalthk ga mandoulthT ash ga Nagwacirga =

denn ich bin noch nicht hinaufgefahren zu meinem Vater = for I am not

yet ascended to my Father.John 4:14 ... dum ludham na aksha dash nrat g`u ltha dum wila

manhathaudak ga dit wa.g.ait aw-a- whati sha.b.gmg_undidElshit = ... es

wird ein Brunnen des Wassers in ihm werden, das in das ewige Leben

quillet 7-- but the water I shall give him shall be in him a well of water

springing everlasting life.

100

John 5:1 adat manzaut gut Jesus ga Jerusalem ga = und Jesuszog herauf gen Jerusalem = Jesus went up to Jerusalem.

kba-

# 97. This prefix is found only in combination with ga (singular)

and dok (plural) and has the meaning "away":John 10:29 ada althgat nat in da'aklthk gulth dumt kbadokt gish

ga zum anonsh ga Nagw-gt ga = und Niemandem ist es mOglich, dass er

sie wegnimmt, die in der Hand des Vaters sind = and no man is able

to pluck them out of my Father's hand.

Mark 14:36 kbag-a7 ha'aksha gwaiya goi = nimm diesen Kelch von

mir = take this cup from me.Mark 6:40 ada ama kba hukwant ga = und sie setzten sich nach

Schichten (sie setzten sich immer ein gutes StUck von einander = and

they sat down in ranks.

another. ]]

[[They sat down always a good bit from one

[[tiki-]]

# 98. tiki = down, downward:Mark 15:36 dum nTizum za dum ligi goiduksh Elijah a dumt tiki

ga dit = lasst uns sehen, ob Elias kommt und ihn herab nimmt = let us

see whether E-li -as will come to take him down.Mark 15:30 ada tikiyrna lak zuz-Ezut = und steige herab vom

Kreuz = and come down from the cross.Addendum: In addition to "tiki, the still shorter form Agin

(B.: tgyZ):

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 887 in list of sentences of syntactic interest:1. I might fall down k-g/inade- gyFiEn.

2. you might fall down ko-einaEn gyVEn.]]

Matt. 12:11 ada amiza lagilaklak dalth zum wilagilthapahalTshquaitk ga shat... = und wenn es (das Schaf) in eine Grube herab-gilt an einem Sabbath... = and if it [[the sheep]] fall into a pit [[King

101

James: grave]] on the sabbath.libilt-

# 99. Meaning: "against, " "opposed to in a hostile sense,

For example:John 19:12 tkarlsh na- gu lip geluksha king ga dit libilthouit ga

dit Caesart = alle, welche sich selbst zum KOnige machen, sprechen

wider den Kaiser = whosoever maketh himself a king speaketh against

Caesar.John 19:11 althga n'dum shgriilth gutgiada gwan a ma dum

libiltwaltk gut = nicht h5ttest du Macht, zu handeln wider mich = Thoucouldest have no power at all against me [[King James: to act against

me]].lthim-

# 100. The concept "against" also probably underlies this

prefix. It is very rarely found:lthim,gush (singular), lthimzushgosh (plural) = to be angry or

annoyed,

lthmhaitiksh = enemy; adversary (Luke 21:15).Luke 21:15 [[Awil n'dum ginam zum-iga da gwashim dilth

wilgaush gut, gu dum wha cl"iklthk ga shim dumt lthim-

haitksha dit ligi dum kshta dit. = Denn ich will euch Mund and

Weisheit geben, welcher nicht sollen widersprechen mOgen, noch

widerstehen alle eure Widersacher. = For I will give you a mouth andwisdom, which all your adversaries shall not be able to gainsay nor

resist. ]]ta-

#101. "ta" appears only in combination with gauk (= before, in

front of) in the meaning "to go before" or "first, " "to go ahead, " "at

the head":

102

Mark 11:9 ada housh ga tazauzut ga = und es sprachen, die

vorne gingen = And they that went before... cried, saying Hosanna.Matt. 21:9 ada housh ga tag.augsh ga nazazTout ga giat ga = and

einige Menschen gingen vor = And a few men [[King James° the multi-

tudes]] that went before.di-

# 102. "di-" has the meaning "to become, " "to make":

Luke 18:26 dish rig da gu dum dilamautksha dit ? = wer kann

denn selig werden? = Who then can become [[King James: be]] saved.

Luke 6:19 awil kshawEtk gish ga gutgiat gish nTat, adat

dilamautk gish ga tk-E..nTt ga = denn es ging Kraft von ihm aus, und er

heilte sie alle = for there went strength [[King James: virtue]] out of

him, and healed them all.da-

# 103. "da=" has a causative meaning and is used particularly

with verbs of progress (compare # 102):Mark 4:28 lip dagpiduksh da yob a na gian dit = von selbst bringt

die Erde ihre FrUchte = For the earth bringeth forth fruit of herself.

Mark 9:2 adat dahabat gish ga giepshum shgunish = und er

ftihrte sie auf einen hohen Berg = and leadeth them up into a high

mountain.sha-

# 104. "sha" likewise has a causative meaning for the most

part; it appears with verbs of "movement away" or "out" [[and is]]

frequently denominative in the meaning "to effect something':Mark 15:20 adat shadogash ga gwishgviaTshk gut gish niat = und

sie zogen ihm den Purpur aus = they took off the purple from him.

Mark 10:50 adat sha gunmagash ga na wash gut ga = und er warf

sein Kleid von sich = And he, casting away his garment.

103

shri-

# 105. 'Ishii" means "to cause" (compare #104):

wilai = to know shuwilai = to teach

[[in the sense of knowledge rather than

acquaintance ship]]

wa. = name shawg = to name

ksha-

# 106. Meaning: out, forth, leave:Examples:

Luke 1:68 adat kshagigTaksh ga n'zapt ga = und er hat erlOset

sein Volk = for he hath... redeemed his people.

Luke 2:38 ...babOishk. gut gish ga dum kshagigiakshit ga ash

ga Jerusalem ga die da warteten auf die ErlOsung zu Jerusalem

= to all them that look for redemption in Jerusalem,

17Z-

# 107. Meaning: in, at, within, into.

Examples:

Luke 2:49 alth ma shim wilai dum g.up 17fwglu da walpsh ga

NagwFdr ga? = wis set ihr nicht, dass ich sein muss in dem Hausemeines Vaters ? = wist ye not that I must be in the house of my Father

[[King James: must be about my Father's business]].Luke 2:48 nT radakdauklthk ga gag.audumt dish nagwadun a dup

gwilthgag7iunt = siehe, mit schweren Herzen haben dich dein Vater und

ish gesucht = Behold with heavy heart have your Father and I sought

you [[King James: behold, thy father and I have sought thee sorrow-

ing]].

1T-

# 108. As lu was essentially inessive, thus, the meaning of 17

is essentially adessive (at, on, with, among):

104

Luke 10:34 adat 17c1ha dit gish ga na lip lak yezish gut ga = and

er setzte ihn auf sein eigenes Thier = and set him on his own beast.

Luke 13:13 adat lTdaush gaga'anont gish ga laka ga und er

legte die Ha"nde auf sie = And he laid his hands on her.

.gul-

# 109. This prefix gul is perhaps linked to the imperative

"gul" = "come, " the only instance where it appears to be independent.

Then the few examples would be explained as follows:Mark 6:35 ada lthaguldoulthsh ga sha ga = und als der Tag zu

Ende ging (als es kam zum Fortgehen der Sonne) = and as the day

came to an end [[as it came to sunset]] [[King James: and when the

day was now far spent]].Mark 15:31 dilamautk ga da.gulgigiadit = er hat Anderen gehol-

fen (indem er zu ihnen kam) = he has helped others [[during the time

that he came to them]] [[King James: He saved others]].

tkul-

# 110. tkul = at, on, to, toward, against (compare libilt- # 99

which was used only in a hostile sense):Matt. 22:25 ...ada zak dit, althga klthga, adat tkulqudakshish

ga naksht gish ga waikt ga = ...und er starb ohne Nachkommenschaft

und er hinterliess sein Weib seinem Bruder = and he died without

offspring and he left his wife to his brother [[King James: and the

first, when he had married a wife, deceased, and, having no issue,

left his wife unto his brother]].Matt. 18:6 ... yagai ga'am dish nTat n'za tkulzipshilth

wile-kshum laubum mina da dunirgni. dit... = dem ware besser,

dass ein grosser Mahlstein an seinem Ha lse hinge... = it were better

for him that a millstone were hanged about his neck.

105

gwun-

# 111. "gwun" has the meaning "to that place" and "to this

place" [[hither and thither]]:Mark 6:7 ada wilt gwunlaTikhaitk gish ga kapault ga da dupkad-51

gish ga awa = da berief er die ZwOlfe zu sich = And he called unto

him the twelve.Mark 15:44 adat gwunhaitk gish ga centurion ga = und er rief zu

sich den Hauptmann = And he called unto him the chief [[King James:

and calling unto him the centurion]].ha-

# 112. "ha" points out an object or fact whereby a tool,causative, or simultaneous circumstance is denoted (compare ## 17,

18):

Mark 4:9 ada houit ga na zumo dada dum han.aknoksh dit, amt

nakni5 dit = und er sagte: wer Ohren hat, urn damit zu hOren, derhore = and he said unto them, He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.

John 18:25 wai hahaitk gish Simon Peter gish ga giamukshit ga

= aber Simon Petrus stand und wgrmte sich (er wgrmte sich durchdas Dortstehen) = And Simon Peter stood and warmed himself [[he

warmed himself by the standing there]].k 'am - (gum )

# 113. (Boas:) k'am- (in the Gospel translations: gum) miser-able, good for nothing, from kamtse:

kamEleleq = good for nothing to speak = to play (compare # 24)

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888]]Matt. 15:27 ada.g.up w571 hash-hashit gaba gumtkauk ga

thal dada na halitkauk ga gamry-Sntk ga dit = und doch essen die Hunde

die Brosamen (schlechte Essen), die herabfallen von den Esstischenihrer Herren = yet the dogs eat the crumbs [[bad food]] which fall

from their masters' table.

106

Luke 18:39 gumgaudun goi = habe ein (unglckliches)

mitleidiges Herz mit mir (gaud = Herz) = have a [[sad]] sympathetic

heart with me [[gaud = heart]] [[King James: have mercy on me]].

q- (k-)

# 114, (Boas:) q-, to eat, to receive:qpZian(77, to smoke = to eat smoke .qgyat, man-eater.qana/7, bread-eater,qlFan'o/n, to receive payment for burial (17, into; an'o'n,

hand) .

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888]]

In the Gospel translations k -:Luke 8:42 ltha kapT1 da g7belt shinith kgaulth gut = sie war

zwOlf Jahre alt (gaulth = Jahr) = she was twelve years old [[ gaulth

year]] [[King James: For he had only one daughter, about twelve year'

of age, and she lay dying. But as he went the people thronged him]].

hr-

# 115. "WI" denotes simultaneousness and immediate succes-

sion:

Luke 1:44 -swil nT, htgoiduksha amhoum dhoiyagun da zurriciya,

ada wil liigabakshk ga lthquaumlthk ga da zum nashgiVumlthk gut a

lthgwishei dit = denn siehe, als die Stimme defines Grusses an meinOhr drang, da htipfte mit Freuden das Kind in meinem Leibe = For lo,

as soon as the voice of thy salutation sounded in mine ears, the babe

leaped in my womb for youLuke 7:11 ada wil wale ga, da hTtkulTn gwa, adat.gaush ga

gu!zap ga wat gulth Nain = and es begab sich darauf, dass er in eine

Stadt mit Namen nain ging = And it came to pass then [[King James:

the day after]] that he went into a city called Na -in]].

ksh-

# 116. uksh-" always has, as it seems, comitative-sociative

meaning:

107

Matt. 23:9 ada gilaush kshnagwak ga shim dash ligit na a lakhalrzoLut = und nicht sollt ihr Jemanden Vater nennen auf Erden = and

call no man your father upon earth.Matt. 2:9 braashta ga na nTzit gish ga naka-gishTa7shk gaga,

ksbgaugut gish dupnTat = der Stern, den sie gesehen hatten in Morgen-

lande, ging vor ihnen hin = the star, which they had seen [[King

James: saw]] in the east, went before them.tka-

# 117. This auxiliary [[which is]] to be mentioned again in thechapter on numerals [[# 238]] has the meaning ''total, " "entire, "

complete, " "whole, " "all":Matt. 17:2 ada sha tkalukshgiatk gut gish ga hazazaklthk gut ga

= und er wurde verklgrt vor ihnen (= zu einem ganz fremden

Menschen gemacht) = and was transfigured before them [["-- made into

completely strange man]].John 9:2 ligi na nagiatk ga dit, g.un am,g,ait yaga, tkashirunshk

gut? = (wer hat gesUndigt, dieser) oder seine Eltern, dass er ist ganzblind schon geboren? = [[who did sin, this man]] or his parents, thathe was born already completely blind [[King James: who did sin, this

ma, or his parents, that he was born blind?]]wilth , wulth

# 118. "wilth-, " "wulth-" have the meaning "away, r0 "forth":

John 11:39 wilthga laubit = nehmet den Stein weg = Take ye away

the stone.John 20:1 adat nTsh ga wilthg-Stk gish ga laup wilthgak gish ga

laup = und sie sahen, dass der Stein fortgenommen war = seeth the

stone taken away from the sepulchre.Mark 5:10 ada shimt gwunOt gish niat dumt wha wulth hashhaizt

gish ga lakyOp ga = und er bat ihn sehr, dass er sie nicht aus derGegend fort schicken solle = and he besought him much that he would

108

not send them away out of the country.Matt. 2802 adat wulthgTggulsh ga laup ga = und er walzte fort dep

Stein = and he rolled away [[King Jamesg back]] the stone,tgwa-, tgwi-

# 119. "tgwa, " in front of vowels utgwi, " = round about, about,

all around, aroundgMark 332 ada tgwawantk gut ga wilhElgiat ga ada houit gish

nTat = und urn ihn he rum sass das Volk und sie sprachen zu ihrng =

And the multitude sat about him, and they said unto him.John 1n44 tgwa dukdadaklthk gaga anont ga dilth shishiat gish

ga... = verbunden um seine FIgnde und Vlsse = bound about his hands

and feet [[King James bound hand and feed].John 20g44 ada wil twiyeltk gut ga = und sie wandte sich urn

and she turned herself about [[King Jamesg she turned herself back]].John 21 020 ada tgwiyeltk gish Peter ga = und Petrus wandte

sich urn = Then Peter, turning about.riksh-

# 120. This prefix appears joined

1) to bag

Matt. 14029 ada ltha Okshba-sh Peter gish ga agwYkshau ga... =und als Petrus aus dem Schiff getreten war... = And when Peter hadstepped [[King Jamesg come]] down out of the ship.

Likewise Mark 502 [[Ada ltha akshba gish ga agvir kshau ga,

ada dilt gut ladaltk gut ga gault ga yZita ga wilhokshk gish ga whati

shakshgum haik ga, wItk gut gish ga shpagait n'toigiat ga = Und als

er aus dem Schiff trat, lief ihm alsbald entgegen aus den GAbern ein

besessener Mensch mit einem unsaubern Geist = And when he was

come out of the ship, immediately there met him out of the tombs a

man with an unclean spirit. ]]

109

2) to Law

Matt. 21021 ma Ziksh,gau lakakshit = wirf dich hinaus in's [[ins ii

Meer! = and be thrown out into the sea [[King James be thou cast

into the sea.Compare [[this prefix to]] ksha- (# 106) with which it is related

phonetically and semantically (oksh- with a short o- has the meaning

''to fall").In addition to 'oksh -, Ziksh- is also found in the same meaning

John 2n9 [[Ltha ilkshgoltht gish ga gilhouli ga, ada wilt nish galagum gumdouz gut, ada lTdaush ga 1Crwalum zum aksh ga, dilth anai

ga = Als sie nun austraten auf das Land, sahen sie kohlen gelegt undFische drauf, und Brot = As soon then as they were came to land, theysaw a fire of coals there, and fish laid thereon, and bread. ]]

Matt. 1806 [[Ada al ligit na dumt in lthimzoshin gaul dada guba

gwa giT shimhoudiksha dada goi, yagai ga'-am dish nTat'nza tkulzip-

shilth wilEkshum laubum mrila da durrifEnT dit, ada za likshoik ga da

wil lthaba akshit = Wer aber '..rgert dieser Geringsten Einen, die anmich glauben, dem ware besser, dass ein Mghlstein an seinen Ha lsgehgnget, und er ersguft wUrde im Meer, da es am tiefsten ist = Butwhoso shall offend one of these little ones which believe in me, itwere better for him that a millstone were hanged about his neck, andthat he were drowned in the depth of the sea. ]]

shin-

# 121. It is not improbable that this prefix is of the sameorigin [[as]] the independent auxiliary shin [[# 134]] in as much as

[[the]] latter indicates that something else [[other]] than that which has

been said is, in addition, incidentally possible.John 183 ada wil .gpiduksht gut ash gut shindoksh ga guldum

laouqsh = und er kommt, indem er mit sich finart Fackeln = and he

comes, while carrying torches [[King James: Judas... cometh thither

110

with lanterns and torches and weapons]]Matt. 16:5 ada lthat vrat ga disciples gut ga nakdaush da ga-

adat gaulsh ga dumt shindoksh ga anai ga = und seine JiInger waren

hertibergefahren und batten vergessen mitzunehmen Brod = And when

his disciples were come to the other side, they had forgotten to take

bread.2. Suffixe s

-sh

# 122. The suffix -sh is used for the definite, the exclusive:Mark 6:30 ada shagait y7sh ga Apostles gishga = und es

kamen die Apostel zusammen zu... = And the apostles gathered them-

selves together.Mark 9:4 ada -6.17wansh dup Elijah ga... = und es erschien

Elias... = And there appeared E-li -as [[King :Tames: unto them]].

-lth

# 123. In contrast to the preceding suffix -sh 122), the

character of the general, of the indefinite, is associated with this

[[suffix]]. It indicates, as a result of this basic meaning, that some-thing is either not certain that is questionable, or has not yetoccurred, but will occur. It appears, therefore,

a) with completely general, indefinite statements,b) in negative sentences,c) in interrogative sentence sd) in imperative sentences,e) in conditional clauses,

Examples:

of a):

Mark 15:31 ada gik dT housh ga manpriests ga dilth hilkgadami-

shit... = auch sprachen die Hohenpriester und Schriftgelehrten...also spoke the high priests and scribes [[King James: Likewise also

111

the chief priests mocking said among themselves with the scribes .]].Mark 11027 ada gik gutgoi duk s ht gish ga Jerusalem ga; ada astir

yt gish ga zum temple ga, ada gutgoiduksh ga manpriests ga dTlthhrik.g.adamTshit ga, dilth tashilgiat gish nTat = und abermals kamen siegen Jerusalem und als er in den Tempel ging, da kamen die Hohen-priester und Schriftgelehrten und die Aeltesten zu ihm = And they

came again to Jerusalem; and as he was walking in the temple, therecome to him the chief priests, and the scribes, and the elders.

John 1 n5 wai shiebunsh Jesus ga dup Martha ga, crilth lthgoukt

ga, dTsh Lazarus ga = Jesus aber liebte Martha und ihre Schwesterund Lazarus = Now Jesus loved Martha and her sister and Lazarus.*

of b)g

Luke 404 althga amuksha anailth dum hadidalshlth giat = nicht nur

von Brod lebt der Mensch = man shall not live by bread alone.Luke 4011 op za lip gvigndumukshlth shTun alth ligi laup = auf

dass du nicht deinen Fuss an einen Stein stossest = in order that younot hit your foot against a stone [[King James lest at any time thoudash thy foot against a stand].

of c)!

John 304 n'dalth dum wila gik kshalaklaklth giat zida ltha alwudagiat? alth dum gik gwisha ziintk ga dalth na nashgriumlth gish

naut... ? = wie kann ein Mensch geboren werden, wenn er alt ist?Kann er auch wiederum in den Leib seiner Mutter gehen... ? = Howcan a man be born when he is old? can he enter again [[King James,a second time]] into his mother's womb and be born?

Mark 13035 awil althga ma shim wilailth n'dalth dum dazoiduksh*

ga Mry5nsh ga Valp ga, zahT hi:Vbel shin, za shriilukt shinith -a7tk, ligi

Note carefully the difference between di-1th and di -sh!to be read g_oiduksh instead of dazoiduksh.

112

zida ltha algiakt shinith z-6`uz = denn ihr wisset nicht, wann der Herr

des Hauses kommt, ob am Abend, oder ob zur Mitternacht, oder urnden Hahnenschrei? = for ye know not when the master of the house

cometh, at even, or at midnight, or at the cock crowing?of d):

Mark 6:36 hashhaizlth = schicke (sie) fort = Send [[them]] away

[[King James: Send them away]].Mark 9:47 kshag-aTlth = nimm es heraus = pluck it out.

of e):

Mark 13:7 ada amiza da ltha ma shim nakni5lth = und wenn ihr

horen werdet = and it you shall hear [[King James: And when ye shall

hear]].Luke 16:30 yag_ai amizatgaudilth gaul dalth w-itk ga dalth

shpag_ait sondern wean Einer aus der Mitte der Todten zu

ihnen Binge.... = but if one from the middle of the dead went to them

[[King James: but if one went unto them from the dead]].

# 124. in and un (Boas: En and r'an) have causative meaning.Matt. 20:7 Fwil althgat ria t'in hakhalthalshinurn = denn Niemand

hat uns arbeiten lassen = for no one has let us work [[King James:

Because no man hath hired us]].Luke 12024 adat g.up tkaug.unt ga Shimoigiat ga Lakaga = und

Gott nahret sie dock (tkauk = essen) = and God feeds them for sure

[[ tkauk = to eat]] [[King James: and God feedeth them]].[[1889 Boas Report, p. 886: Derivatives, # 1, ]]

-T

# 125. The suffix 2r is found in interrogative sentences*:Mark 7:18 ainalth di dalgagaulshk ga shimT? = seid ihr denn

auch so unverstgridig? = Are ye so without understanding also?

This -T is not to be confused with the pronominal suffix 7.[[# 45, Personal Pronoun chart: dependent first person singular(absent) pronominal suffix; and # 47, b): T (B.: E)]].

113

Mark 818 ada ainith ma shim nishtT? = and ihr sehet nicht? =

see ye not-kea.

# 1260 (Boas) Quotative, formed by lea, which is derived frorramElead, hearsay it is said that he is coming, leVEdEksk°a.

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 886 Derivatives, # 4.]]

1.1111

# 127. The suffix -urn always indicates an attributive relationship and occurs in two constructions that are difficult to reconcile.

It is joined namelyI. to the attribute and specifically

a) to many adjectives after which substantives then follow;

b) to many adverbs after which verbs then follow.Here, thus, the attribute occurs in front and appears to be

characterized by -um.The opposite appears to be the case

IL whenever -urn is joined to the first of two substantives fol-lowing each other (a type of status -constructus formation), then thesecond substantive has a genitive relationship to the first.

Examples of I,

Luke 58 awil hadageum yFyilt denn ich bin ein slindiger Mensch

= for I am a sinful man.Luke 2.36 prophetum hanak ga = eine Prophetin (ein prophet-

isches Weib) a prophetess [[a prophetic wor a-ni]

Examples of 1, bo

Mark 1049 haldum bin == stehe auf! , Stand up! [[King James,

rise. ]]Mark 10 50 halclumb-a-t = er stand auf = he stood up [[King

Tame s° he rose)].

Mark 719 wil althgat zilum g.au gaudit = denn nicht: gehet es

hinein in sein Herz == Because it entereth riot into his heart.

114

Mark 710 adat ligit ria hadag_um algiag_a dada nagw7dit dTlth

naud:it> dum gup zagut -7 und wer Vater oder Mutter flucht, der soilsterben (hadak = schlecht, algiak = sprechen) = and whoso curseth

father or mother, he shall die [[ hadak = bad, algiak = to speak]]

f[King James let him die the death]].Examples of

Mark 146 adat gapsh ga locusts dT1th hon7yum gilhoulT ga' = und

er ass Heuschrecken und wilden Honig (Honig der Wildnis) = and he

did eat locusts and wild honey [[honey of wilderness]].

Mark 15043 ada gpiduksh Josephum Arimathaea ga = und es

kam Joseph von Arimathia = Joseph of Ar-im-a-thae -a came.-k

# 128. The suffix -k is used for the formation of the passive(# 84) as the following examples will show (frequently connected to the

stern by means of sh or

Luke 1076 shifw7tk ga dalth Prophet gish ga g_alaka = ein

Prophet des Hgchsten genannt werden = to be called a prophet of the

highest [[King James And thou, child shall be called the prophet of

the Highest],Luke 2027 ada wilt dazTintk ga Haik gish ga zum temple ga = und

er wurde durch den Geist in den Tempel gefuhrt = and he was led by

the spirit in the temple [[King Jamesg And he came by the Spirit into

the tennple]J.Luke 10g26 gau damtk ga dida wilalaut ? = was ist geschrieben

im Gesetz ? = What is written in the law?

Addendum This passive formation by means of [[the]] attached

k is by far the most common. For the rarer formations by means of

-sa (sha) and -61-e- ( -di and -da) reference is made to # 84.

[[Schulenburg forms sha, -di, -da]]

115

# 129. The -k occurring at the end of some words has nothing todo with the passive suffix in those few cases where it is obviously

caused by a following initial g- (# 8).Luke 226 hawalthkga zit nish ga. Christk gish ga Miyan ga

wenn er nicht vorher den Christ des Herrn gesehen hA...tte (Statt

Christk also Christ) = if he had not before seen the Lord's Christ[[Also Christ instead of Christk]] [[King James before he had seen

the Lord's Christ]},Luke 4 12 gup althga ma dum shpaltgaudsh ga MTyln ga

Shimoigiatk gun ga = du solist nicht versuchen den Herren, deinenGott (Shimoigiat) = Thou shalt not tempt the Lord thy God

[[Shimoigiat]].

3. Enclosing Formativeq-ka

# 130. (Boas q-ka, misfortune, happeningqhasVepka, having sickness,wulaqtla.otk, when a landslide went down,

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888 Formation of Words. ]]

B. Independent Formatives1. Auxiliaries of Time and ModaLty

# 131. In a manner similar to that in the Semitic languages,the temporal references are incorporated into the modals, "ltha"

signifies that which is completed and lasts or continues; "wil" thatwhich has just made itself mainfest; and ''dun.i" that wh =ich is subse-quent, no matter whether starting from a present or past point oftime, [[and]] is thought impending.

"no." has perfect meaning similar to "ltha" but seems to be

differentiated from the latter in that it appears without relation toanother fact in a simple statement.

All these auxiliaries (Itha, wil, dum, na) will be discussedlater in more detail in sections on the perfect [[# 282-# 285]] and on

116

temporal joining [[# 322-# 336]].

# 132. "za" is a modal particle which expresses [[the idea]]

that it is a question of something unfactual, whether of something not

yet become fact, only intended or wished, or of something whose

actuality is not yet established (is uncertain). --- Resembling the

Greek (Iv , it always gives speech a certain subjective coloring.Mark 8:26 gilau za am z7in.un a gulzabut = gehe nicht hinein in

die Stadt = go not into the town [[King James Neither go into the

town]].

Mark 6:37 nrishimt in gTen da za gabit = gebet ihnen zu essen

= give them to eat [[King James for they have nothing to eat]].

# 133. "gup" is an auxiliary of strong, affirming meaning:

a) only, just, directlyb) necessarily, of necessity, mustc) universally general, all, always

Examples pertaining to this [[auxiliary]] are

Mark 1232 Mry 7n, shimhou hou'unt, ash ga .gup gault ga =

Meister, du hast recht geredet, denn es ist nur cin (Gott) = Master,

you have spoken correctly, there is only one [[God]] [[King James:

Master thou hast said the truth: for there is one God]].

Mark 137 awil du.rngup wal diva gwa = denn es muss also

geschehen = for it must so occur [[King James: for such things must

needs be]].Mark 514 adat malthilt gish ga.gulzap ga, dilth gup tria-riTsh ga

lakyFp ga = and sie verkiindigten es in der Stadt and in der ganzen

Gegend = and they announced it in the town and in the entire region

[[King James: and told it in the city and in the country]]°Luke 12:31 shim yagai gup gwilthgagalsh ga na kingdomt ga =

doch ihr mu-sst trachten nach dem Ko"nigreiche = however you must

aspire to the kingdom of God [[King James: But rather see ye the

kingdom of God]].

117

Luke 22g16 gup althga n'dum gik gapt = ich werde niemals

wieder davon essen = I will never again eat of it [[King James] I will

not any more eat thereof]].Matt. 4g1.0 awil ltha zup damtk ga dit, dum.g.up lthaudun ga

Mry-in ga... = denn es steht geschrieben, du sollst anbeten denHerrn.. = for it is written, Thou shalt worship the Lord....

Mr. Boas mentions the following examples-

I am sick a long while, r'ap slyepkEn-5.I am in the habit of eating, r'ap ra.'wiqgEnoI must sleep, r'ap qstVqEno.I am repeatedly (always) hungry, r'ap tla'wola kte-/y.7.

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 888g Derivatives, # 4. ]]

# 134. "shin" has a presumptive, dubitative nature; withnumerical data it indicates inaccuracy. (Compare # 121)

Mark 523 [[wrong verse citation]]Mark 13g35 althga ma shim wilailth n"dalth dumgoiduksh

ga Mryansh ga walp ga, zahT hVbel shin, za shrillukt shinith -a7tk, ligi

zida ltha algiakt shinith z3uz, ligi za ltha zunitha.ga shin = denn ihrwisset nicht, wann der Herr des Hauses kommen wird, ob des Abends,oder urn Mitte der Nacht, oder zur Zeit wenn der Hahn kilht oder desMorgens frti.he = for ye know not when the master of the house cometh,at even, or at midnight, or at the cockcrowing, or in the morning.

Mark 8A6 ada wil lip '1"gagut ga, ash ga houit ga, Wil wha

anaitgum shin = and sie gedachten bei sich, indem sie spracheno Dasist es, dass wir nicht Brod haben = And they reasoned among them-selves, saying, It is because we have no bread.

# 135. gin indicates that the opposite of the factual is assumed:John 514 gilau za gik hadak gun, yagai zahadak ga gin za

zpiduksha da gwan = nicht wieder stindige du, sondern schlimmeres

kOnnte dir widerfahren = sin no more, lest a worse thing could happen

to you [[King James sin no more, lest a worse thing come unto thee]].

118

John 814 zZ5 lipgeluksh magAurishk ga nT, gin adag_up shimhou

na ma.gaunshk grit = wenn ich auch von mir selbst zeugen wifrde, so

ware mein Zeugnis wahr = if I also would testify of myself, then would

my testimoney be true [[King James, Though I bear record of myself,

yet my record is true]].# 136 "lugwil' may indicate completion,Mark 15g44 adat lrishgnalthk gut gut Pilate ga ziltha al lugwil

gozagut = and er verwunderte sich, dass er schon todt war = and he

wondered [[King James Pilate marvelled]] that he was already dead[[King James if he were already dead]].

John 723 ma lthikltha'undin shim a goiyr, d na wil lugwildimautk ga gaul da yoga da hal.ishquaitk ga shat? = zIrnet ihr denn

fiber mich, dass ich gesund machte einen Menschen am Sabbath? = areye angry at me, because I have made a man healthy [[King James

every whit whole]] on the sabbath?2. Adverbs

# 137. First of all, under this category come the pure adverbialexpressions like shim, wr. = "very, " "very much, 'greatly, " "very

well"; dil = "soon, "almost" gik = "again,Afterward appear formations like lthawil (constructed from

ltha which designates that which is completed and lasts or continues

[[# 20, 5)]], and wil which designates that which has just occurred[[# 20, 4 ]1) = all the time, 90 "always, " [[and]] shimhou (shim =

"very much, "greatly, 'very well" [[# 59]], [[and]] hou =

"to speak") = "truly, verily, all of which are used like adverbs and

therefore are listed under this heading.Finally, the list of those adverbs which are characterized by

the auxiliary syllable -urn belong here. Since ample mention [[has]]

already [[been]] made (# 127): only the most important for the logical

systematic treatment of adverbs are stated here

119

We divide the adverbs into those of place time, and manner.Adverbs of Place

# 138. gwa and gwai (# 54) are pronominal = "here'

Mark 14:32 wan shim a gwa setzet euch hierher! = Sit ye hereMark 13:21 nr gwait Christi; ligi nT gwit = siehe hier ist

Christus; oder sieh' dort ist er = Lo, here is Christ; or lo, he isthere.

# 139. nTric (# 57) is also pronominal = there

John 6:3 ada ga wil want ga dilth na disciples gut ga =und daselbst setzten er und seine JI7nger sich = and there he sat withhis disciples.

John 19:18 nrnish gut wil lizagwut gish ga lak.guzEk ga = dortaber tOdteten sie ihn am Kreuze = and there they killed him on the

cross [[King James: Where they crucified him, and two other withhim]].

John 10:40 ada n-Tnish ga wil dligt ga = und daselbst blieb erand there he abode.

# 140. yagwa = here:

John 6:9 hriw-a-1 lthgwa yCit-a7 yagwa = es ist ein Knabe hier =

There is a lad here.John 6025 n'da wila goidukshunr yagwa ? = wann bist du

hierhergekommen? = When camest thou hither?# 141. zilum = into inside [[penetration into something, some-

times as seen from the outside, but often figurative]]:Mark 7:18 ... gu ligi gau watk ga dida gralag.ut adat zilum gau

giadit... ...dass das, was von der Aussenseite kommt undhineingeht in den Menschen.... = that whatsoever thing from withoutentereth into the man.

Mark 15:46 adat liTishgat gish ga zum n'toigiat ga zilum yezk

gut gish ga laup ga = und er legte ihn in ein Grab, das in einen Felsen

120

hineingehauen war = and laid him in a sepulchre which was hewn outof a rock.

# 142. logum = on or in something (down from above?) [[move-

ment downward as seen from below]]:

John 5:4 ...1:*git na ga kshaaugum logum bat- = wer nun

zuerst hineinsteigt.... = whoever now first climbed in [[King James:For an angel went down at a certain season into the pool, and troubledthe water: whosoever than first after the troubling of the waterstepped in was made whole of whatever disease he had]].

John 4:6 ada wil shiTnalthsh Jesus gish ga wil yat ga, gun logumdhat gish ga awash ga nisha'aksh ga = weil nun Jesus mude von derReise war, setzte er sich nieder auf den Brunnen = because now Jesuswas tired from the trip, he sat down on the well [[King James: Jesus,therefore, being wearied with his journey, sat thus on the well]].

# 143. yaga = down, downward [[movement downward as seen

from below]]:

John 4:47 adat gwanZsh ga dum yaga-.gpiduksht ga = and er batihn, dass er herab kame = and besought him that he would come down.

John 4:49 Mryan, yaga goidukshin = Herr, komme herab = Sir,come down.

# 144. haldum = up

Matt. 9:9 ada wil haldum bat ga, adat yakut ga = und er standauf und er folgte ihm = and he stood up and he followed him [[KingJames: he arose, and followed him]].

# 145. gik = back (with the verb "to come'`) [[return]]:

John 14:3 ...dum gik gpiduksha-n77, ada n'dum lip dok shimt =... so will ich dock zur6!ckkommen und selbst euch hinnehmen = I will

come again, and receive you unto myself.# 146. hazukshum is found also in the meaning "back":

121

Matt. 2703 adat hazukshum da.gutgoiduksh ga gwilit ga wil giapshgabigm dala ga ash ga manpriests ga di:1th tashTlgiat ga = und erbrachte zurii'ck die dreissig Silberlinge den Hohenpriestern undAeltesten = and he brought back the thirty silver pieces to the highpriests and elders [[King James and brought again the thirty piecesof silver to the chief priests and elders.

Luke 4g20 ada wilt kbagash ga shaZinshk gaga, adat hazukshumginamt gish ga tkulw-aTulirnithk gaga = und er machte das Bach zu undgab es zurUck dem Diener = And he closed the book and gave it back tothe servant [[King James gave it again to the minister]].

# 147. kbishum, kbashim in conjunction with shgri° = bow down(to the ground)g

Luke 24g12 ada kbishum she rut gish ga zilum nizk gut ga... =und er bilckte sich nieder und sah hinein = and he bowed down andlooked in [[King James Then rose Peter, and ran into the sepulchre;and stooping down, he beheld]].

Mark 107 althga tkularn alth dum kbashimshgriT alth n'clumithTlthalth na dakltha zauksht = ich bin nicht werth, dass ich mich vorihm nieder bticke und die Riemen seiner Schuhe auflOse = I am notworthy to bow down before him and loosen the throngs of his shoes[[King Jame so the latchet of whose shoes I am not worthy to stoopdown and unloose]].

# 148. guluksha = through, throughout, acrossgMark 9g30 adat guluksha liyak gish ga Galilee ga = und sie

gingen durch Gall lga = and passed through Galilee.

Mark 11016 ada althgat anauklth dumt guluksha shinIggwa ditligit nalth ligi... ash ga zum temple ga = und er erlaubte nicht, dasshindurchtrii!ge Jemand... in dem Tempel = And would not suffer thatany man... through the temple.

# 149. agwT = outsideg

122

Mark 3032 nT agwimaksh gut dup naun d-71th waigiant twin

gwilthgagri'unt = siehe. draussen stehen deine Mutter und deine Bru"der

und fragen nach dir = look, your mother and your brother stand out-side and ask for you [[King James Behold, thy mother and theybrethren without seek for thee].

John 20011 ada al agwi tkulhaitk gish Mary gish ga n'toigiat ga '-

aber ausserhalb stand Maria vom Grabe... = but outside Mary stoodat the grave [[King James But Mary stood without at the sepulchra.

# 150. zinsh is an adverb whose sense seems to be approxi-mately "away, " "gone" ("to have no longer, " "no longer be thereTh

Mark 14g52 adat qudakshash ga halthau ga, adat zakautgum zinsE

g-euk gut = und er liess die Leinwand fahren und floh nackt von ihnen

= And He left the linen cloth, and fled from them naked.Mark 1242 ada goiduksh ga gault ga gw-eum zinsh zagum hanak

ga = und es kam eine arme Wittwe = and there came a certain poor

widow.

Mark 10012 amiza yagai harigk ga za shamagalth naksht,

ada zit naksh gulth gik gault. zinsh whazaudit ga = wenn aber ein

Weib sich scheidet von ihrem Manne und nimmt einen Anderen zum

Gatten, so bricht sie die Ehe = and if a woman divorces herself fromher husband and takes another for a husband, then she commitsadultery [[King Jame s o And if a woman shall put away her husband,

and be married to another, she committeth adultery]]# 151. wagait dau = 'far off, " "distant, " "from afar, " at a

distance"Mark 5 6 ada lthat nTsh Jesus gish ga... = und als er sah Jesup

von ferne = and when he saw Jesus afar.Mark 14054 ada wag.ait dau gut wil }rigut gut Peter ga = und von

ferne folgte Petrus ihm nach = And Peter followed him afar off.

123

Addenda: geluksh = backward, back.zaga = right across, diagonally or nearly opposite.

Adverbs of Time

# 152. A specific expression for 'today" does not occur; it isfound in paraphrase in all situations:

Mark 14:30 sha giaon = heute = today [[King jamesg That thisday]].

Luke 23:43 sha gwai dumg.up hokshk _gun (la goi ash ga zum

Paradise ga = heute (diesen Tag) wirst du mit mir im Paradiese sein= Today [[this day]] shalt thou be with me in paradise.

# 153. "tomorrow" is called zagairep (B. g tsegyets'e'ip)Matt. 6:30 [[Gun amizat shz,as..an-o-untk ga Shimoigiat ga. LakTga

kraugum gilhoulit, gu dalthil da da sha gra7n, ada zagazTep za zilumdalthk ga da zum guldum lak, alth dum yagai wha z111th dumt wish-

wa-shum shimT? 0 niishTin alashgum shimhoudiksh? = So denn Gott das

Grass auf dem Fe lde also kleidet, das dock heute stehet, un morgenin den Ofen geworfen wirdg sollte er das nicht vielmehr euch tun, oihr Kleinglaubigen? = Wherefore, if God so clothe the grass of thefield, which today is, and tomorrow is cast into the oven, shall he notmuch more clothe you, 0 ye of little faith?]]

Matt. 6034 [[Gun gilau uphouitk ga .g.agaud shim wilawal za-

gazTep, awil dum lip uphouitk ga gauda za-gaziepa dum lip wila w-a71

dit. Ltha am lip gushgou hadaka da,griel da shat. = Darum sorgetnicht fu"r den andern Morgen; denn der morgende Tag wird fur dasSeine sorgen. Es is genug, dass ein jeglicher Tag seine eigne Blagehabe. = Take therefore no thought for the morrowg for the morrowshall take thought for the things of itself. Sufficient unto the day is

the evil thereof. ]]

"day after tomorrow" = (Boasg tsenatq'tsegyets°Vip)

"yesterday" [[is called]] gazrep (Boas: gyets'e"ip)

124

John 4252 [[Ada wilt gtnadakt gish ga n'da ga hour ga da hi

gitwilhaitkshish ga walt ga. Gun houit gish niat, Gaziep da lthat wa

dupkaul da hour dat qudaksha da fevert. = Da forschte er von 'linen die

Stunde, in welcher es besser mit ihm geworden war. Und sie

sprachen zu ihm: Gestern urn die siebente Stunde verliess ihn dasFieber. = Then enquired he of them the hour when he began to amend.

And they said unto him, Yesterday at the seventh hour the fever lefthim. ]]

"day before yesterday" = (Boas nat&\.'da gyets'e"ip)

# 154. lthawil (ltha-wil) = for all time, always [[# 131, # 137]]

John 8:29 awil lthawila walu da gau ga anaugut ga = denn alleZeit thue ich, was ihm gefallt = for I do always those things that pleas,.him.

John 18:20 lthawila shawilaigiamg_ushk gu da zum synagogue gut

= alle Zeit habe ich gelehret in der Schule = all the time have I taughtin the school [[King James I ever taught in the synagogue]].

John 634 ltha ma wila ginam anai nahou'un da gum = immergieb das Brod, von dem du sprichst, uns = always give the bread toUS of which you speak [[King James: evermore give us this bread]].

# 155. gianZin = now, at present

John 884O ada al ma shim shigilth zaqudat gran = jetzt abersucht ihr mich zu tOdten = But now ye seek to kill me.

John 4:23 ada lthazoiduksha hourt gr.a-On = aber es ist dieStunde jetzt gekommen = but now the hour has come [[King James: But

the hour cometh and now is]].

# 156. c1T1 = soon:

John 13:30 ada wil diltsh ga kshtfut ga = da ging er bald heraus= then he soon went out [[King James: He... went immediately out]].

John 13:32 ada dilt ga dumt lthaudit ga = and bald wird er ihnverlaren = and shall straightway glorify him.

125

# 157. whahrya" (wha-hr-y1) = not long afterward, soon

Mark 10:52 whahryat ga ada wil sha nrazk gut ga = und

alsobald, da ward er sehend = And immediately he received his sight.Mark 14:43 whahTy3:sh ga houit ga = alsobald, als er noch

redete = And immediately while he yet spake.

# 158. hazish, hazush = "henceforth, 'I "from now on" or

"thenceforth, " "from that time on":John 8:52 hazish wilaiyimt giaon shgli hadak ga da haiga da

gwan = nun wissen wir, dass du den Teufel hast = Now we know that

thou hast a devil.John 21:6 ada wilt makshit gut, ada wil hazish lthgukshk gish ga

dumt shegit ga... = da warfen sie es (das Netz) und konnten es nichtmehr ziehen (wegen der Menge der Fische) = then they threw it [[the

net]] and could not pull it [[because of the multitude of fish]] [[KingJames: They cast therefore, and now they were not able to draw it

for the multitude of fish]].

# 159. altha = early:Matt. 20:1 ... gu altha kshil dadT gunitha7gut... = welcher frA

am Morgen ausging... = which went out early in the morning.

Luke 14:22 [[wrong verse citation]]

# 160. gha, ghalFm and lam gha occur as adverbial expressionsin the meaning ''a little time, " "a little while":

Mark 6:31 zul shim1TiOunshk ga shim a wilgoishut ada gha

lTshquaitk ga shim = kommt, gehet besonders in eine Wii'ste und ruhetein wenig (ganz kurze Zeit) = Come ye yourselves apart into a desert

place, and rest awhile [[a very little while, an extremely short time]].

John 5:35 ada na shashuk ga shim da ghalam gulthzwisheradashim gish ga na goibat = ihr aber wollt euch eine kleine Weile freuen

caber sein Licht = and you want to rejoice a little while in his light

[[King James: and ye were willing for a season to rejoice in his

light]].

126

# 161. gakpa = often (Boas: sometimes, at times, occasionally.now and then, from time to time). [[Here Schulenburg gives the Boas

gloss of this adverb but does not give the Boas orthography, the term

itself. He gives the gloss in German, not in English as is usual. ].]

Mark 9:22 adat ,gakpat dagauda dida zum n'lagut di-1th zum

akshit = und oft hat er ihn gebracht in's Feuer und in's Wasser = Andofttimes it hath cast him into the fire, and into the waters.

Matt. 17:15 [[Schulenburg does not give the verse example, but

says instead:]] It occurs in the same meaning. [[The example is:

Miyan gumgaudun 5: ltheilthgum yaa yrit: awil ma' o1 dit, ada shimgul

ga dit; awil lthgwila gakba cladge. zum'nlagut dTith gakba

zum akshit. = Und sprach: Herr, erbarme dich ilber meinen Sohn!

denn er ist mondsiichtig und hat ein schweres Leiden; er fgllt oft ins

Feuer und oft ins Wasser. = Lord, have mercy on my son: for he islunatick, and sore vexed: for ofttimes he falleth into the fire, and

oft into the water. ]]

# 162. arngait = already:John 6:64 a-wilt arn,g.ait wilait gut Jesus... = denn Jesus wusste

schon... = For Jesus knew already [[King James: For Jesus knew

from the beginning]].John 13:37 gaulth gun lthgukshk gulth n'dum amg,ait yIgun

giaZn? = warum 1st es unmOglich, dass ich dir nachfolge jetze schon?

= why is it impossible, that I follow you now? [[King James: Why

cannot I follow thee now?]]John 15:27 awll na ltha amgait hakhokshk ga shim da'T goi

wilhrshidak gut = denn ihr seid bei mir gewesen schon von Anfang an

= for you have been with me already from the beginning on [[King

James: because you have been with me from the beginning]].

# 163. hashba is found, it is true, in only a few places and

seems here to have the meaning: "already, " "now":

127

John 15:3 ltha al hashba shikshakshk ga shimt a ni-nr algiaga no

houyir da gwashim zunwal dit = ihr seid jetzt rein urn des Wortes

willen, das ich zu euch geredet habe = Now ye are clean through the

word which I have spoken unto you.

# 164. lugwil = before, beforehand, in advance:Mark 6:33 adat hapt ga amy5t gish ga tkg..nrsh gagulzipzap ga,

ash ga amwgluksht ga, adat gilwil goltht ga = und sie kamen aus allenStgdten und indem sie gut gingen, kamen sie ihnen zuvor = And they

came out of all cities and in going well, they came to him beforehand[[King James: and ran afoot thither out of all cities, and outwentthem, and came together unto him]].

# 165. hawFanT = henceforth, from now on

Matt. 26:64 hawganT ada ma dum shim nish ga wil dhash gaLthg5lthk gish ga giat: = von nun an werdet ihr sehen den Sohn des

Menschen sitzen... = Hereafter shall ye see the Son of man sitting...# 166. kshgauk = first, at first, first of all.Mark 4:28 -6:wilt lip dagoiduksh da yi5b a na gian dit; kshzauza

yenshit, ada... = denn von selbst bringt die Erde ihre Frucht; zuerstdas Gras, und... = For the earth bringeth forth fruit of herself; firstthe blade.

John 18:13 adat kshgaugum dag_audit gish ga awash Annas ga =

und zuerst firhrten sie ihn zu Mannas = And led him away to Annas

first.# 167. shrigra.5n = finally, at last:

Matt. 26:60 shrigia-6n ada wil gutgoiduksh ga dupkadc7lt ga... =

zuletzt traten herzu zwei.... At the last came two....Adverbs of Manner

# 168. shimhou = truly, verily [[# 137]]:John 14:12 shimhou, shil-nhou, houyir da gwashim = wahrlich,

wahrlich, ich sage euch = Verily, verily, I say unto you.

128

Luke 23:43 shimhou da gwan = wahrlich, ich sage dir = Verily Isay unto you.

# 169. shim = very, very much, greatly, very well, in front ofverbal and nominal expressions (compare shimhou # 168):

Mark 5:23 ada shimt gigrenak gut ga = und er bat ihn sehr = And

he besought him greatly.Mark 5:10 ada shimt gwunOt gish nTat = und er bat ihn sehr =

And he besought him much.

# 170. In addition to shim, the language also uses an evenlonger form in front of verbals and nominal expressions: shimzul(compare # 24):

Mark 6:26 ada shimg.ul shrepk gish ga.g.audsh ga king ga = und

es ward sehr betrubt das Herz des Kgnigs = And the king's heartbecame grieved [[King James: And the king was exceedingly sorry]].

Mark 10:14 ada shiriu1 lthi.T.ndrt ga = da ward er sehr zornig

= then he became very angry [[King James: he was much displeased]].

# 171. wr = very, very much, greatly, very well [[# 137]]:Mark 5:38 ... dflth wil wrbauk gish ga wTheldit ga = und

sehr weinten viele = them that wept and wailed greatly.

# 172. wram (wr-am) is an intensification of the former:Mark 5:7 wram hou = laut schreien (hou = sprechen) = cried

loudly [[hou = to speak]] [[King James: and cried with a loud voice]].# 173. shimgit, in addition, is found in the meaning "very,

very much, II "greatly, " "very well":Mark 15:43 ada gpiduksh Josephum Arimathaea ga, gault ga

shimgit giadum ama councillor ga... = und es kam Joseph von

Arimathia, ein sehr ehrbarer Rathsherr.... = and Joseph ofvAr-im-a-thae -a came, a very honorable counsellor[[King James:

vJoesph of Ar-im-a-thre'/-45'., an honorable counsellor, ...came]].

129

Mark 1::43 adat shimgit yaoulthemakt = und er bedrohte ihn

hart = And he threatened him severly [[King James: And he straitly

charged him]].Mark 8:25 ada shimgit nTazk gut ga = und er sah gut = and he

saw well [[King James: and saw every man clearly]].

# 174. gidi expresses the idea of being fixed, remaining = to

hold "fast" or to "seize, " to stand "still":Mark 12:12 ada wilt shigilth gidiga dit ga = und sie trachteten

danach, wie sie ihn griffen = And they sought to lay hold on him.

Mark 12:13 ada wilt hashhaiz ga nazazToush ga Pharisees dIlthHerodians gish nrat, ash ga dumt gidigT.t gish ga wila algiakt ga = undsie sandten Einige der Pharisger und der Diener des Herodes zu ihm,damit sie ihn in seiner Rede fingen = And they sent [[King James:

send]] unto him certain of the Pharisees and of the servants of Herod[[King James: of the Hg-rF/-di.'-''ns]], to catch him in his words.

Matt. 2:9 wil wa ada wil gidi dhlt gish ga lakaush gawil dYsh ga ltheTwaumlthk gaga = ...bis dass er kam und stand stifleoben uber, wo das Kindlein war = until it came and stood still above

over where the young child was [[King James: till it came and stood

over where the young child was]].

# 175. shidi = as usual, often, frequently:Mark 10:1 ada shTdi houit ga hia7qush gut gik shriwilaigiamzut

ga = und wie es seine Gewohnheit war zu sprechen, so fing er aber-

mals zu lehren an = as it was his wont to speak, thus he began againto teach [[King James: and as he was wont, he taught them again]].

Luke 22:39 ada wil doultht ga, shTdi waIt ga, ash ga awash ga

shgunishum Olives ga = und er ging fort nach seiner Gewohnheit auf

den Oelberg = And he... and went, as he was wont, to the mount of

Olives.

# 176. um z in = apart, separately, secretly, privately:

130

Mark 13:3 ada astir dh-Et gish ga lak shzunishum Olives ga,adup gish ga temple ga, adat .g.umzin gtTadakt gut dup Peter ga, dish

James... = und als er auf dem Oelberge sass, dem Tempel gegenilberfragten ihn besonders Petrus und Jacobus = And as he sat upon themount of Olives over against the temple, Peter and Jacob asked himprivately [[King James: Peter and James and John and Andrew askedhim privately]].

Matt. 24:3 ...ada z.umzin g_utgpiduksh ga disciples gish nTat...

= ...da traten zu ihm seine Jliger besonders... = the disciples cameunto him privately....

# 177. alu seems to be the opposite of Lumzin in the meaning

"freely, " "publicly, " "openly":John 7:13 ada am althgat rig za aiu algiaga dalth wila wilt, awil

libYshit gish ga Jews ga = Niemand aber mochte offen heraus [lber ihn

sprechen, dean sie farchteten sich vor den Juden = Howbeit no man

spoke openly of him for fear of the Jews.John 7:26 .g.ukshtanT., al alt a'algiak dit, ada althga gaulth hou

di ash niat = siehe, er redet aber frei, und sie sagen ihm nichts =behold he speaks openly [[King James: But, lo, he speaketh boldly]]and they say nothing unto him.

# 178. ligi = perhaps, by chance:John 10:34 ligi wha damtk ga na wilalautk ga shimi... ?

stehet nicht etwa geschrieben in eurem Gesetz... ? = is not by chancewritten in your law... ? [[King James: Is it not written in yourlaw... ?

John 8:42 ada althga za ligi lip dazpidukshk gi... = und nichtmochte (za) ich etwa von mir selbst gekommen sein... = and I wouldnot like [[za]] to have come by chance to me myself [[King James:

neither came I of myself]].

131

# 179. gik = again, anew, once more [[# 137, # 229, # 287,

# 289th

Luke 20:11 adat gik haiz ga gault ga tkulwaTulimlthk gaga = und

abermals sandte er einen Knecht = And again he sent a [[King James:

another]] servant.Luke 24:6 althga \val da gwa, yag.ai ltha gik d51sh ga dit = nicht

ist er hier, sondern er lebt wieder = he is not here. but he lives again[[King James: but is risen]].

# 180. hazukshum [[# 288]] also is found in the same meaning

as gik:

Mark 9:12 ... adat hazukshum hoigiag.un tkgiar gaut = ...und er

wird alles wieder zu rechte bringen = and restoreth all things.# 181. amuksha = only, except for:Mark 9:8 amukshat Jesus ga hokshk gut gish dupnTat = nu?' war

Jessus bei ihnen = only Jesus was with them [[King James: saveJesus only with themselves]].

Mark 4:27 [[wrong verse citation]]Mark 5:37 ada althgat anauklth dumt yga dit ligit nT., amukshat

Peter, dish James... = und nicht liess er zu, dass Jemand ihmnachfolgte, ausgenommen Petrus und Jacobus = And he suffered no

man to follow him save Peter, and James [[King James: and Johnthe brother of James)].

# 182. gup also has the meaning "only":Matt. 19:5 nTnr gwai dumt g.un-a7dukt da y5Ia nagw-a7dit

dTlth naudit, ada dumg,up hokshk ga dada naksh dit = denn aus diesem

Grunde wird ein Mann seinen Vater und seine Mutter verlassen und

wird nur sein bei seinem Weibe = For this cause shall a man leave hisfather and mother and shall only be with his wife [[King James: and

shall cleave to his wife]].

132

Matt. 19:17 gup gaul ga amt ga = nur Einer ist gut = only one isgood [[King James: there is none good but one]].

# 183. shak = together:

Mark 12:7 ada al Agai lip na shagahoudash ga hilkgashindointkgut ga = aber die Weinartner sprachen zusammen unter einander =But the vine dressers spoke together among one another [[King JamesBut those husbandmen said among themselves]].

Mark 12:42 gri shag,ait kbrgmsh centit = welche zusammen einen

Heller ausmachen (einen halben Cent) = which together amounts to amite [[a half cent]] [[King James: which make a farthing]].

# 184. naga = one another or each other, among one another:Luke 24:32 ada naga hou'unt ga = und sie sprachen unter

einander = and they spoke among one another [[King James: And theysaid one to another]].

Luke 13:1 ...CI nagalilthgut gish ga nha lthwailil dash Pilategish ga naga7mgauksht ga = ...welcher Blut Pilatus vermischt hatteunter einander mit ihrem Opfer = whose blood Pilate had mixedamong one another with the sacrifices [[King James: whose bloodPilate had mingled with the sacrifices]].

# 185. nTnT = thus, so [[# 57, # 139]]:

Matt. 13:49 ninT dum wal da da zida ltha shab7 halizog.a = alsowird es sein, wenn das Ende der Welt gekommen ist = So shall it be[[King James: at the end of the world]].

Matt. 18:35 nTrci" dum di wg.lsh ga Nagw-alic ga lakgga gwashim...

= also wird auch mein himmlischer Vater euch thun... = So likewiseshall my heavenly father do also unto you.

# 186. In addition to the pronominal ninT, shga is found in thesame meaning = thus, so:

Mark 2:5 ada lthat nisht gut Jesus ga shga gashimhoudikshit ga= und als Jesus sah ihren Glauben = And when Jesus saw their faith.

133

Mark 12:31 dumzup shila shg,a shTebun shilagiadunt = du sollstlieben deinen Ngchsten (wie dich selbst) = Thou shalt love thy neighbor

as theyself.3. Prepositions

# 187. The prepositions denote a formal designation of place,of time, and of logical relations.

Ordinary prepositions like zum = in or into. lak = on, etc. , areto be differentiated from [[other]] derived [[prepositions]] like w-Etk

(to have come hither) from (something) hither [[to this place]]. etc.# 188. zum = in, into (compare # 20, 1):

John 10:23 zum temple = im Tempel = in the temple.John 10:25 n'zum wash = im Namen = in the name [[King James°

in my Father's name]].# 189. lak = on, upon:

Luke 10:10 shim kshahaba na lak gaina dit = gehet heraus auf

ihre Strassen = go out upon your streets [[King James: go your waysout into the streets]].

Luke 15:15 adat haizt gish ga na lak Zazuksh gut = and er

schickte ihn auf seinen Acker = and he sent him upon his fields [[King

James: and he sent him into his fields]].# 190. lakau, lak = on, upon (something) thither [[away from

the speaker or point contemplated]]:Matt. 23:36 tk-inTgau gwa dum.goiduksha dad7 lakau wilshidak

ga giada gwa = alles dieses wird kommen aber das Geschlecht dieserMenschen = All these things shall come upon this generation.

Matt. 5:45 awilt nTat ga kshgwa'ansh ga na giamukshit ga

lakau hadadak ga dit...dT1thzun wIsha lakau hakhoigiaza. dit... = denner ist es, der seine Sonne aufgehen lgsst Ciber die BOsen. ound regnen

lgsst liaber Gerechte... = for he maketh his sun to rise on the evil...and sendeth rain on the just....

134

# 191. whati = without:

Luke 18:2 gu ga whati nakbizriut gish ga Shimoigiat ga LakTga

= welcher ohne Furcht vor Gott (war) = which [[was]] without fear of

God [[King James: which feared not God]].

Luke 18:6 housh ga whati hoigiagum hadabit ga = das Sprechendes ungerechten Richters (ohne Gerechtigkeit) = the speech of theunjust judge [[without justice]] [[King James: Hear what the unjust

judge saith]].

# 192. shpa_g_a = in the midst or center of, amid:

Mark 5:5 ada tlanTsh ga hVbel ga dilth ziTtshta ga, wait gish ga

shpaaait sh.gunTshta ga, dilth shpaLait n'toigiat ga = und er war alle

1\11,chte (Abende) und Tage auf den Bergen und in den Grabern = and he

was every night [[evening]] and day [[King James: And always, night

and day, he was]] in the mountains and in the tombs.Mark 10:43 ada al althga dum di wal da shpaga shimt = aber

also soll es unter euch nicht sein = But so shall it not be among you.# 193. nadau = "on the other side of, " "across":John 3:26 ...nadau da Jordan = jenseit des Jordan = ...on the

other side of Jordan [[King James: beyond Jordan]].John 10:40 ada wilt gik zaush ga nadau gish ga Jordan ga = und

er zog wieder jenseit des Jordan = And he went again across Jordan[[King James: And went away again beyond Jordan]].

John 6:1 ...wilt zagazaut gut Jesus ga nadaush da gish galakakshum Galilee ga = Jesus fuhr weg durch das galilgische Meer =Jesus went across [[King James: over]] the sea of Galilee.

# 194. quclFon = along:

Matt. 3:5 tk-inTsh ga zakzozut gish ga qudFnsh ga Jordan = alle

Under lgngs des Jordan = all countries along the Jordan [[King James.all the region round about Jordan]].

# 195. zogash = at, on, by, to, along:

135

Matt. 4:13 ada dh-at gish ga Capernaum ga, ga zozash gaaksh ga, nIzo.g.ash ga Zabulon dT.lth Nephthalim ga und er lies s sich

nieder zu Capernaum, welches liegt am Meere, an den GrenzenZabulons und Nephthalims = and he... dwelt in CM-p'e'rl-n%.-i.fm, which

is on [[King James: upon]] the sea coast, on [[King James: in]] the1.1borders of Za-bu -lon and Neph 11

Matt. 4:18 ada ashT y7,sh Jesus gish ga zog.ash ga akshum

Galilee... = und als Jesus am galilgischen Meer entlang ging... = andas Jesus went along the sea of Galilee [[King James: And Jesus,walking by the sea of Galilee]].

# 196. hazaklthk (singular), hazazaklthk (plural) = in front of(in the presence of people)

Mark 6:41 dumt daut gish ga hazazaklthk gut ga = dass siedieselben vor sie legten = that they laid these in front of them [[KingJames: and gave them to his disciples to set before them]].

Mark 13:9 ada dum makshk ga shim da hazazaklthk ga govern-orsit dT1th kingsit = und sie werden euch ftihren vor Fri'rsten and KOnige

= and they were led before sovereigns and kings [[King James: yeshall be brought before rulers and kings]].

# 197. gauk = before, ahead [[of]], according to time and place:John 15:18 wilai shim na dTt libalukshu da.g.auk shimt = wis set,

dass sie (die Welt) mich vor euch gehasst hat = ye know that it [[theworld]] hated me before you [[King James: before it hated you]].

Matt. 28:7 ada nT ltha* doulth dada-zauk shimt a Galileet = undsiehe, er wird vor euch hingehen in Galila = and behold, he goethbefore you into Galilee.

Here dum is probably used instead of ltha [[# 131, # 277,# 282, # 322]].

136

# 198. hagau = behind, after or following (in the presence of

people):

Mark 8:33 bUyina hagauyrit Satan = gehe hinter mich Satan = Get

thee behind me, Satan.Mark 5:27 ada dT,goiduksht gish ga shpagait giat gish ga hagaut

ga = und auch sie kam aus der Mitte des Volkes hinter ihn = and also

she came out of the midst of the people behind him [[King James:

When she had heard of Jesus, came in the press behind, and touched

his garment]].

# 199. tkula'n = behind, after, following (according to time and

place):Luke 23:26 ...dumtgplzakt gish ga tkul-gnsh Jesus ga =

...damit er es (das Kreuz) tri.ige hinter Jesu her = that he might bearit [[the cross]] after Jesus.

John 1:27 Cf. nTiff_goiduksha dida tkura-na... = der ises, der

nach mir kommen wird... = he it is, who will come [[King James:who coming]] after me....

# 200. watk (singular) = come, having come from, signifiesorigin, source of something to this place (compare # 12, b).[[Schulenburg considers watk the passive form of w-a-. See # 84 on the

formation of the passive and "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German):watk (passive of wg) "come" is also used in the meaning "originate(in), " "proceed, " "flow (from). " watk translated into German:gekommen, or "come, " the past participle formjF

Matt. 16:1 adat shpaltgaud ga ash gut gwunFsh ga dumt

gwuniazunsh ga shinlaiduksh ga w-gtk gut gish ga lak-a-ga = und sie

versuchten ihn, indem sie ihn baten, dass er ihnen ein Zeichen vomHimmel zeige = and tempting desired him that he would shew them a

sign from heaven.

137

Matt. 18:35 ...zida whazumzaud shim a na hadak ga waik shimwaik ga dagag.aud shimt = ...wenn ihr nicht die Fehler eurer Brnervergebet von euren Herzen = if ye from your hearts forgive not hisbrother their trespasses [[King James: forgive not every one hisbrother his trespasses]].

# 201. amyr (am-yr) away, from*:John 10:32 vThe'l da ama halthalsha ltha gwunrazunri da gwashirn

amyrt gish ga Nagwrt ga = viele gute Werke habe ich erzeiget euch vonmeinem Vater = Many good works have I shewed you from my Father,

John 8:47 wil althga amyr shim ash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakrga= denn nicht seid ihr von Gott = for [[King James: because ]] ye arenot of God.

# 202. rwr = thither or that way, to [[expressing motion awayfrom the speaker or reference point]].

Matt. 3:13 ada wil zoiduksh Jesus ga wr...tk gut gish ga Galilee

gish ga Jordan awash John = da kam Jesus aus Galilga an den Jordanzu Johannes = Then cometh Jesus from Galilee to Jordan unto John.

Mark 9:14 ada ltha goiduksht gish ga awash ga disciples gut ga

= und er kam zu seinen Ji.ingern = and... he came to his disciples.# 203. wazait = until, up to:John 13:1 ltha wilt shipsHiebunt ga wag.ait wil Shaba ga = er

liebte sie bis an's Ende = he loved them unto the end.John 16:24 wazait gYaZin = bis jetzt = until now [[King James:

Hitherto]].# 204. adup(k) = opposite, facing:

Mark 12:41 ada dhrsh Jesus gish ga adupk gish ga n'tar'amw.a-.1

ga = und Jesus setzte sich gegenuber dem Gotteskasten = and Jesus satopposite to [[King James: over against]] the treasury.

amya is the plural of wrtk (# 200): compare the chapter onplural formation (# 34) [[Chapter II]].

138

Mark 11:2 haba lthgwa zulzaba I:dupk ga shimt = gehet hin inden kleinen Ort gegentiber von euch = Go to the little place opposite yol,

[[King James: Go your way into the village over against you]].# 205. Paraphrasing is also popular:Luke 7:1 lthat shadab-ish ga tkg.nTsh ga nahouit gish ga zum

.g.azumZish ga giat ga... = als er ein Ende all° seinen Reden gemacht

vor dem Volke (eig. in den Ohren des Volkes) = when he made an end

of all his discourses before the people [[really in the ears of thepeople]] [[King James: when he had ended all his sayings in theaudience of the people]].

Mark 12:6 [[wrong verse citation]]Mark 2:12 ada wil doultht gish ga ga tk-inTt ga = and

er ging weg vor Allen (vor den Gesichtern Aller) = and went forth

before all [[before the faces of all]] [[King James: before them]].# 206. Most extraordinary is the paraphrase in the following

sentences (mT.y7n = lord, chief):

John 1:48 hawalthkgut hiTitk gunt Philip, n'da da

rriTyln shun figut, ada nan nTazunt = ehe dich rief Philippus, wo du

warest unter dem Feigenbaum, da sah ich dich = Before that Philipcalled thee, when thou wast under the fig tree, I saw thee.

John 1:50 nan niazun da rriTy-in shun figut = ich sah dich unterdem Feigenbaum = I saw thee under the fig tree.

(It is thought the situation forbids a polite miyIn = lord [[or sir]]instead of [[the familiar form of]] you. )

Note: In Tsimshian no preposition corresponds to "for, ""because of, " "on account of, " "for the sake of. " Rather, in order toexpress this relation, the language always makes use of the para-phrase with gun (= instrument, cause):

John 14:11 amilth aint halthalshilthzun shimhoudiksh shim

goi = wenn nicht, so glaubet mir doch urn der Werke willen (wenn

139

nicht, so mOgen die Werke der Grund eures Glaubens an mich sein =if not, thus believe me for the sake of the works [[if not, thus mightthe works be the reason of your belief in me]] [[King James:, or elsebelieve me for they very works' sake]].

John 12:11 -a7wilt niat ga .gungadoulthsh ga hrldit ga Jews gadenn seinetwegen gingen viele Juden hin = for his sake many Jewswent away [[King James: Because that by reason of him many of theJews went away]].

gunw-il is also used with preference (# 12, b)..Matt. 18:20 7,wil nrda wil shag.ait wan dupkadF1 dit ligi gwilaun

dit a na wai yrigunwEl dit... = denn wo zusammen sind Zwei oderDrei urn meines Namens willen.... = for where two or three aretogether for the sake of my name [[King James: For where two orthree are gathered together in my name]].

Luke 18:29 althgat nalth giat gra: lthat in qudaksha na walp dit,ligi... ash ga na kingdomsh ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-a-gazunw7.1 dit... =

es giebt keinen Menschen, welcher sein Haus verlgsst, oder... um

des Reiches Gottes willen.... = There is no man that hath left house,or... for the kingdom of God's sake.

a, -37.

# 206 a. The words a and 3: seem to be only phonetic variants.They appear extremely often in the sense of a preposition for theplace or the time where, occasionally for the place to which one isgoing, and rarely for the place from which one comesprobablydepending on the governing verb. Generally, but not always, theyrelate to something in the presence or proximity of the speaker.

Pertinent examples:

Matt. 28:7 ada ni dum doulth dadZgauk shimt a Galileet = andsiehe, er wird vor euch hingehen in Gall lga = and, behold, he goethbefore you into Galilee.

140Matt. 21:11 Jesus a gwai, prophetum Nazareth r Galilee =

Jesus ist dieser (in diesem), der Prophet von Nazareth in Gall lgaThis [[in this one]] is Jesus the prophet of Nazareth of Galilee.

4. Conjunctions

# 207. As conjunctions are found:

ada (joining sentences)

di- (joining words)

waibut

al

and

yag.ai but [[in the sense of "on the contrary"]]

dha then, at that time, at the momentc

ash, ashT while, during

ltha as, when

wil then

wa,g.ait dum (wil) until

hi as soon as

cSchulenburg translates dhl' into German as "da, in demAugenblick" in contrast to his translation below of the conjunction wilas "da, dann. " According to "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German),dill' is the Boas form cre. See Language Sample I where the Tsimshianform da is translated into English as "just. 'I See also LanguageSample IV where the Tsimshian form d'gitatEt with the number 8footnote notation of dhri is translated into German as Her setzt ihn"[[ "he sets him"]]. dliihere is the singular verb form: to sit, to sitdown; to be; to stay, to tarry; to set; (B. d' a).

141

hawalthk

hawEnilth,1not yet, before

zida as soon as, whenever

dum1. for the designation of the future

2 to introduce clauses of intent

dum wha in order that... not,

so that... not

op za in order that... not,

so that...not

"gwil for

gun because,

for that reason, therefore

consequently

amT if = real

amiza if = unreal

gin: the opposite is taken as the factual.

z"6" although, even though

142

althga amuksha

ligi or

yagai di not only-- -but also

5. Interjections# 208. As [[interjections]] the following occuro, Matt. 1125 ninF'unt o Nagw-it = ich preise dich o Vater

thank thee, 0 Father.

aha = expression of aversion (Mark 15:29)

ni

zukshtF

gukshfihT.

= look, behold

tsaq = Oh shame! Oh fie!

143

VI. NUMERALS

A. The Cardinal Numbers

# 209. The [[biblical]] texts which are at my disposal offer littlesupport for the treatment of the difficult chapter at hand. Fortunately.Dr. Boas has devoted his particular attention to the subject.

In accordance with his division, there are seven classes ofnumerals [[classified]] according to the type of objects counted

I. The first of these classes is used in counting whenever thenumber refers to no definite object (abstract);

II. the second class applies to flat objects and animals;III. the third to round objects and divisions of time;IV. the fourth to human beings;

V. the fifth to long objects (here the numerals have the suffixkan (shgun) [[Schulenbures term]] = tree),

VI. the sixth to canoes;VII. the seventh to measures; Mr. Boas supposes that these

numerals are composed with anon hand).

[[1889 Boas Report, p. 880.]]# 210. Mr. Boas gives the chart of cardinal numbers [[shown

on pages 144 and 145]]. [[Hereafter all Boas citations in this sectionon cardinal numbers refer to the chart of cardinal numbers in the1889 Boas Report, p. 881. ]]

Numeral One# 211. gT.g.k (first class), griel (third class), gual (fourth class)

and .gam' ma (sixth class) occur:a)' gi.-57k (Boas: gyakt) is used whenever the number does

not refer to a definite object (abstract):

Matt. 10:29 ada althga gi5k za tikilaklaga da lakyObit za wha

wilaishga Nagwat shim ga = and nicht alit einer auf die Erde ohne

The Boas Chart of Cardinal Numbers [[cardinal number chart correction according to the Boaschart: add kCIA.1 tE k12/1 to number 11, under "Men. "]]

No. CountingFlatObjects

RoundObjects Men

1 g yak( gakt g'ElrEl

2 t' EpciVt t'EpciFit gFupEl t'EpqadS.'/1

3 guaint gua'nt gutlF" gulV1

4 tqalpq tqalpq tq'npq tcialpqdail

5 kctonc kct7Cnc kctcinc kcEnecSY1

6 k' alt k'aldV1

7 t'EpeS/lt t'EpqVlt t'Epq'alit t'Epqaldt./1

8 guandMt yuktVlt yuktVit yuktread.11

9 kctErria`/c kctEmVc kctEmVc kctEmacV1

10 gy'ap gy'ap k(pgfel k(a,1

11 gy-5,k(

12 t'Epqa't k441 tE t'Epqadlil

Long Objects Canoe s Measure s

k.'alwutskanAg'a'opskan

go a/ltsk*an

tqZ/apsk'an

k' Et3/Ents ka an

'gloltskan

t'Eepq'altskan

7krtlaEdskan

kctEmVetskan

kcpe

k'''amget

ge' alpVeltk

galtska-a-,Intk

tclilpqsk

kctVonsk

k 'aA ltk

t'Ep4./ltk

yuktntk

kctEmIck

gy'apsk

kl'al

guilbEl

gulVont

tqalpqaloInt

kctZinsiloint

k"'S*1dElo'nt

t'Ep41dEloi nt

yukt1,1dElo'nt

kctEmasilo nt

kcp7o/nt

The Boas Chart of Cardinal Numbers continued.

No. CountingFlat Round LongObjects Objects Men Objects Canoes Measures

20 kyecreel kyedV130 gulgIwulgyap gullEgyitk

40 trEpqadVlgyitk._tqalpqwulg ya/p

50 kce6ncwulgyap --100 kcEnEcV1 -

200 kcpal

300 kCp'al tE kcEnEcn --400 kyedV1 -

500 kyEd.'1 tE kcEnEcal600 gulnEgyitk --700 gulia?lEgyitk tE kcEnEcM800 tqalpqtVlEgyitk900 tqalpqtVlEgyitic tE kcEnEcV1

1000 Ic(p'al

146

Wissen eures Vaters = one [[King James: of them shall]] not fall onthe ground without the knowledge of your Father [[King James: with-out your Father]].

Note: gTak is questionable in the following example°Matt. 12:11 nalth giada shpaz,a shim, gir za grala da matit ga

dit... = welcher Mensch ist unter euch, welcher ein Schaf hat... =What man is [[King James: shall there be]] among you, that [[KingJame s: shall have]] has one sheep....

b) gel (in Boas: g'ElrE1) is used whenever the numberrefers to words like grain of mustard seed, land, hour, hut, day,city, pound, and pearl which are all looked upon as round (with hourone would probably have to think of the round shape of the clock ).

Examples:

Luke 5:12 ada wil wilt ga, ltha- dh7t gish ga girelt gazulzap ga= und es begab sich, da er in einer Stadt war = And it came to pass,since he was in a city [[King James° in a certain city]].

Luke 5:17 ada wil welt ga grielt ga sha gish ga... = und esbegab sich auf einen Tag... = And it came to pass on a day [[KingJames: on a certain day]].

c) gaul (in Boas: kl1) is used whenever it refers tohuman beings;

Examples:

Mark 5:22 adazoiduksh ga gault ga t'in algiaLushk ga

synagogue ga = und es kam Einer der Obersten der Schule = And...there cometh one of the rulers of the synagogue.

Mark 10:37 ginamlth "6: gum dum wanum, gaul nakshimyaZint,

ada gaul nakmedakTaiint = gieb uns, dass wir sitzen, Einer zurRechten, und Einer zur Linken = Grant unto us that we may sit, oneon thy right hand, and one on they left hand.

d) gam 'met (Boas: k'amVet) is used for canoes.guma, instead of .g.arn'rngt, is also found. John 6:22

147

Luke 5:3 ada wil mok gut gish ga ga agwikshau ga =und er trat in ein Schiff = And he entered into one of the ships,

John 6:22 [[Ltha gazrep ga adat nrsht ga wilhelgiat ga makshkgut gish ga nha daush da gish ga lakaksh ga wha gik gTaush

ga agwikshau gut, amuksha nigh ga wil shrntk gish ga disciples gut ga

ada althga di mok gish Jesus ash ga disciples gut gish ga zumagwikshau ga, amuksha laga'unshk gaga disciples gut ga z.adoulthitga = Des andern Tages sah das Volk, das diesseit des Meers stund,dass kein ander Schiff daselbst war denn das einige, darein seineJanger getreten waren, und dass Jesus nicht mit seinen Angern in dasSchiff getreten war, sondern allein seine ,J-nger waren weggefahren =The day following, when the people which stood on the other sea sawthat there was none other boat there, save that one whereinto hisdisciples were entered, and that Jesus went not with his disciplesinto the boat, but that his disciples were gone away alone. ]]

Numeral Two# 212. For this [[numeral two]] is found dupkT. (class 2, Boas:

t'Epcalt), ecilbel (class 3, B.: gOlupE1), dupkad-O-1 (class 4, B.:t'EpquadS.'1), g.aubsh.g.un, also written zauupshg_un (class 5, B.:g'S.'opsk'an), and .zulbeltk (class 6, B.: ealpe'eltk). [[correctionsaccording to the Boas chart:

class 2: t'Epcia-/t

class 3: go/upEl

class 4: tlEpqadV1class 5: gtavopsk'an

class 6: ealp-e/eltkExamples:

a) dupk3 (in front of flat objects and animals):

Luke 2:24 dupkg.t ga doves ga, ligi duplCa: da klthgtrum pigeonsga = ein Paar Turteltauben oder zwei junge Tauben = A pair of

148

turtledoves, or two young pidgeons.Mark 6:38 dupka daluwalum zumakshit = zwei Fische = two

Fishes.

Matt. 10:10 ...ligi duple -itlth g7daz = noch zwei ROcke = nortwo coats.

b) g7bel (in front of flat objects and animals):Mark 8:19 kapil da zwolf (KOrbe) = Twelve

[[baskets]].

Mark 14:1 ltha zoucrish ga gVbelt ga sha ga = nach zwei Tagen= After two days.

Mark 5:13 ada shazait gO"bel shinith wil thousand = and zusam-men waren sie (Sgue) bei 2000* = they [[swine]] were about 2000.

c) dupkac13-1 (in front of human beings).

Luke 24:4 gwun makshk gish ga dupkadO-lt ga giat gish gaga... = da traten herzu zwei (Menschen)M;!nner... = then two[[human beings]] men went near [[King James: two men stood bythem]].

Luke 18:10 dupkad771 ga yiTta ga... = zwei = Two

men....d) ggubsh.g.un, also gauupshz.un (in front of long objects;

the numerals here have the suffix shs_un = tree)Luke 22:38 MIV5.-n, nT, zaubshg_un.g.awaiam d7uzk ga gwa = Herr,

siehe, hier sind zwei Schwerter = Lord, behold, here are two swords.Matt. 18:8 ... ya.gai aina ltha dum wila.g.auupsh.g_unza'anont ligi

g,auupshg_un gashashTunt... ...denn das du zwei 1-1Znde oder zwei

habest... = rather than having two hands or two feet.e) .gulbeItk (in front of ships):

Not the animals, but the thousands are counted.

149

Luke 5:2 ada nTsh ga....gulbFltk gut ga agwr.g.akshau gish ga

awash ga lakdTga = und er sah zwei Schiffe am See... = and he saw[[King James: and saw]] two ships on the lake [[King James: standinvby the lake]].

Numeral Three# 213.

a) gwan (B. : gld..nt) [[correction: guarit]] is used inabsolute position:

John 21:11 [[Ada wil mok gish Simon Peter ga, adat wil amshegish ga at gish ga gilhoulT ga, holtk go gish ga likle-kshum lirwalum

zum aksh ga, gel ga wil gwishtinshault ga da qwisht3-nsha wil giap dagwan ga: ada z75- ga, adas.up althga b-e'aksh ga at ga.= Simon Petrus stieg hinein, und zog das Netz auf das Land vollgrosser Fishche, hundertunddreiundfiinfzig. Und wiewohl ihrer soviel waren, zerriss doch das Netz nicht = Simon Peter went up, anddrew the net to land full of great fishes, an hundred and fifty andthree: and for all there were so many, yet was not the net broken.

b) gwilT (B.: gutrei) is used for divisions of time and forround objects like the following examples will show:

Mark 9:5 shirunza dup zipzaplth gwilr dalth guba hriwalp = lasstuns drei Hirtten bauen = let us build [[King James: make]] threetabernacles.

Mark 15:29 adat in gik haiin dida gwi1T da shat = und bauest ihnin drei Tagen wieder auf = Ah, thou that destroyest the temple, andbuildest it in three days.

In addition to these regular [[terms which]] agree with the terms

on Mr. Boas's chart, another term "gwun'' is found in a few places.Phonetically [[gwun]] is probably united with gua/nt but in use itseems to be identical with gwilt. The situations in question are:

150

Matt 12:40 awil nTw7lt ga na wa.-.1sh Jonah gish ga n'da liTgwunsh7

dit ga ada gwiiTsh ga hotel gish ga zum bansh ga. , = denn wie Jonas

drei Tage and drei Nqchte war im Bauch... = For as Jonas was threedays and three nights in the [[King James: whale's]] belly.

Mark 8:2 awil ltha gwun sha dalth hakhokshk ga da goi = denn

sie sind drei Tage bei mir geblieben = for they have now remained[[King James: have now been]] with me three days.

Numeral Four

# 214. Only tkalpk (B. : tq7.1pq) is found:

John 4:35 giamgia tkalpka giamga = es sind noch vier Monate

= There are yet four months.John 11:17 ltha al tk-a-.1pk sha dash ga da lirshgtrut gish ga

zum... = schon vier Tage hatte er gelegen im... = he had lain in thegrave four days already.

Numeral Five# 215. gwishtinshaul, also written qushtinshaul, (B.:

kcEnEcV1: class 4) and gwisht-c7nsh kctZinc: class 3) are found:Luke 16:28 awil gwishtinshaul waikiak g7.t = denn ich habe noch

ft!Inf Brikler = For I have five brethren yet.

Mark 6:38 gwishtFinshit [[ ]] arif (Brode) = Five [[loaves]].

Numeral Six

# 216. I find only,g.ul and .g.aul (B.: ea1/4,1t third class) [[correc-tion: k"Lt]] which are both used in the same way and are alsoprobably the same word:

John 12:1 ash ga ltha gimgia .g.ulsha dash ga dum Passover ga =-

es waren noch 6 Tage vor den Ostern = it was six days before Easter[[King James: then Jesus six days before the passover]].

Luke 24:13 zault ga wil giapsh ga furlongs ga shzanakt gish ga

Jerusalem ga = sechzig Meilen weft entfernt von Jerusalem = sixty

miles distance from Jerusalem [[King James: which was from

151

Jerusalem about threescore furlongs]].Numeral Seven

# 217. dupkaul (B.: t'Ep4.11t: third class) and dupkuldaul(B. : t'EpqaldV1: fourth class).

a) dupkaul:

Mark 8:5 ada houit ga, Dupkaul dit = und sie sprachen: sieben(Brode) = And they said, Seven [[loaves]].

Mark 8:6 adat doksh ga dupkaul dit ga anai ga = und er nahmdie sieben Brode = and he took the seven loaves.

Luke 2:36 ada am dupkaulsh gazaulth ga n'dh-a't gish ga naksht= und sie hatte sieben Jahre gelebt mit ihrem Manne = and had livedwith a husband seven years [[King James, from her virginity]].

b) dupkuldauL

Mark 12:20 dupkuldaul ga na nawaikiat ga sieben Brader sindgewesen = have been seven brothers [[King James Now there wereseven brethren]].

Numeral Eight# 218. yincla (B.: yuktVIt: third class) and yill.d.tha occur

equally in use [[and are]] probably only different [[in]] style (compare.g.ul and Laul # 216):

Luke 1:59 ltha yala a sh7., dit ga = nach acht Tagen = aftereight days [[King James: that on the eighth day]].

Luke 2:21 ada ltha rdhoigiaksh ga yukla a sh7dit = und als achtTage vergangen waren = And when eight days were accomplished.

(yrikltha-a-dual, fourth class, will be mentioned undernumeral "eighteen").

Numeral Nine

# 219. kshtamaush (B.: kctEmVc: third class) andkshtamashaul (B.: kctEmacS/1: fourth class).

a) kshtamaush:

152

Mark 15:34 ada ltha kshtamaushit ga hour ga = und UM dieneunte Stunde = And at the ninth hour.

b) kshtamashauLLuke 17:17 n'cla da g 1.7 kshtamashaul dit? = wo sind die Neune?

(neun = where are the nine ? [[nine men]].

Numeral Ten

# 220. Only kapT1 (B.: kcp7'el: third class) and kapaul([[B.:]] k(pS.1: fourth class) are found.

a) kapil:

Luke 19:24 ada ma ginam dish niat gif wil didau kapil dapoundsit = und gebet es dem, der zehn Pfund hat = and give it to himthat hath ten pounds.

Luke 19:17 am shimoigiadun da kapil da_gulzipzabut = du sollstHerr sein Ner zehn Stgdte = You shall be master over ten cities[[King James: have thou authority over ten cities]].

b) kapaul:Only in (following) compounds.

Numeral Eleven

# 221. kapaul da* gaul (B.: 1c4p'Al tE k'Vl: fourth class):

Luke 24:9 adat malthash ga tkrnTsh ga gau gish ga kapault ga dagaul = und sie verkilndeten alle Dinge den Elfen = and told all thesethings unto the eleven.

Matt. 18:16 [[wrong verse citation]]Numeral Twelve

# 222. kapil da eVbel [g7pel] (third class) and kapaul dadupkad71 (B. : k4A1 tE t'EpqadVle fourth class):

a) kapil da gi7bel (g7pel):

(kapaul) "da" (gaul) compare # 50 = (ten) "with present" (one).

153

Luke 8:42 ltha kapil da gO'belt shinith kgaulth gut = sie warzwolf Jahre alt = she was twelve years old [[King James: For he hadone only daughter, about twelve years of age]].

Luke 2:42 ada ltha kaprlsh ga kgaulthk gut ga da g73'bel = und als

er zwolf Jahr alt war = And when he was twelve years old.

b) kapaul da dupkadi5L

John 6:67 ada hough Jesus gish ga kapault ga da dupkadc71 = da

sprach Jesus zu den ZwOlfen = Then said Jesus unto the twelve.

John 6:70 nha ligi wha kshaniazili gut nrishim kapaul da dupka-

dal = habe ich euch Zwglfe nicht erwghlt? = Have not I chosen youtwelve.

John 6:71 gault gish ga kapault ga da dupkad7lt = es war Einervon den ZwOlfen = it was one of the twelve [[King James: being one of

the twelve]].

# 223. The terms for higher numbers, as my [[biblical]] textspresent them to me, now follow one after the other

a) 14:

Matt. 1:17 nrnr.g.un tk7niwil shishaw7nt ga giat w-Itk ga dish

Abraham awash David shgait kapTi da tka"lpka wilshilw7ntk ga giat =

daher sind alle Geschlechter von Abraham bis auf David zusammenvierzehn Geschlechter = From there are all the generations fromAbraham to David together fourteen generations [[King James: So allthe generations from Abraham to David are fourteen generations]].

b) 18: kapaul da yirkltha-a-dual (B. 1(41A,l tE

yuktle.ae.41, fourth class):

Luke 13:4 [[DTith n'ThIsh da kapaul da yaltha-a-daulda na wil

rigainash da giepshum wa-lbum Siloam, adat lriga.g.un da, haligas.aud

shim alth z,,ahrikake-shk ga dalth, tk-gnilth zoga dash ga Jerusalem gaai.

= Oder meinet ihr, dass die achtzehn, auf welche der Turm in Siloahfiel: und erschlug sie, seien schuldig gewesen vor alien Menschen,

154

die zu Jerusalem wohnen. = Or those eighteen, upon whom the towerin Siloam fell, and slew them, think ye that they were sinners aboveall men that dwelt in Jerusalem. ]]

c) 30: gwilT wil giap (B.: gule"'Wulgyap):

Matt. 13:8 ...nag..az-gou da gwili wit giapa tkuliy7dit =

etliches dreissigftltig = some thirtyfold.Matt. 27:3 adat hazukshum dagutgoiduksh ga gwitit ga wil giapsh

.gabTem data ga... = and er brachte wieder die dreissig Silberlinge...= he... brought again the thirty pieces of silver.

d) 38:

John 5:5 gif ga ltha gwilTsh ga wil giapsh ga gaulth ga da

yrikdFlt* ga... = welcher achtunddreissig Jahre... = which [[KingJames: had an infirmity]] thirty and eight years...

e) 40: tkalpk wil giep (B.: tcglpqwulgya/p):Matt. 4:2 ada lthat tkalpksh ga wil giepsh ga sha ga, &nth

tkalpk ga wil giepsh ga "Stk ga ga raltht ga, ada wil qudTit ga = and als

er vierzig Tage und vierzig Ngchte gefastet hatte, da hungerte ihn= And when he had fasted forty days and forty nights, he was after-

ward an hungred.

Mark 1:13 ada ninrsh ga wil dhat ga gilhoulT gish ga tkalpkut gawil giapsh ga sha ga = und er war daselbst in der Wilste vierzig Tage= And he was there in the wilderness forty days.

f) 46: tk-5.1pk wil giap da glut

John 2:20 UNThTsh gasunhoush ga Jews ga, TO:lpka wil giap da

gaul da gaulthat zaba temple gwa, ada al ma dum hai'in dalth gwilT.'

dalth sha hi? = Da sprachen die Juden: Dieser Tempel ist insechsundvierzig Jahren erbauet; und du willst ihn in dreien Tagen

yrikalt (B. : yuktV1t: fourth class) [[see No. 8, Class IV, onthe Boas chart of cardinal numbers]] is perhaps to be united withyrikla (# 218).

155

aufrichten? = Then said the Jews, Forty and six years was this templein building, and wilt thou rear it up in three days ?]]

g) 50: gukshtiTnish wil giap kctO'newulgy p)

Mark 6:40 [[Ada ama kba hrikwant ga, na gaga-el ga wil

qushtinshaul ga, drth na guksht7nish ga wil gipgiapt ga. = Und sie

sezten sich nach Schichten, je hundert und hundert, funfzig und

ftInfzig. = And they sat down in ranks, by hundreds, and by fifties. ]]John 8:57 hawalthk ga gwishtinishilth wil giaplth kgaulthk

shin... = du bist noch nicht fitnfzig Jahre alt... = Thou art not yetfifty years old...

h) 60: gaul wil giap:Matt. 13:8 na.gaz-a7ou da gaul da wil giapa tkuliy7 dit = etliches

sechzigaltig = some sixtyfold.i) 70: dupkaul wil giap, third class:

Luke 10:1 [[Wai, na tkul7n gwa ada wilt lip gan'dalthilt ga

dupkaul dit ga wil giapsh ga nagazl'out ga, adat nada dupkadnum hash-haizt gish gagaukt gish ga tk-gnish ga gulzipzap ga drlth n"da ga, gup

ligi n'da ga dum wil lip goiduksht ga. = Danach sonderte der Herrandre siebenzig aus, und sandte sie je zween und zween vor ihm herin alle Stnte und Orte, da er wollte hinkommen; = After these thingsthe Lord appointed over seventy also, and sent them two and twobefore his face into every city and place, whither he himself wouldcome. ]]

k) 84: yrikdal wil giap da tk-glpk.

Luke 2:37 ada ltha yadal da wil giap da tkIlpk da shinithga.ulthilth da zinshzakt = und (es war da) eine vier und achtzig Jahrealte Wittwe = And [[it was then]] a four and eighty year old widow

[[King James: And she was a widow of about fourscore and four

years]].1) 99: kshtamaush wil giep da kshtamaush.

156

Matt. 18012 alth dumt wha qudaksha kshtamausha da wil giepdit da kshtamaushi... ? = wird er nicht die 99 (S chafe) verlassen... ?= doth he not leave the ninety and nine [[sheep]]... ?

Luke 1504 [[N'dalth giada gwashim, za wil hifwanith gwish-

tinshaul dalth matt ada za gwrtk gulth granga dit, alth dumt whaqudakshalth kshtamaush a dalth wil giap da kshtamaush a libaLait

gilhoulit, ada zat gwilth ygka nha gwak ga dit, wagait dumt wil wrdit? = Welcher Mensch ist unter euch, der hundert Schafe hat, und so

er der eines verlieret, der nicht lasse die neunundneunzig in der/I

Wuste und hingehe nach dem verlornen, bis dass er's Linde? = What

man of you, having an hundred sheep, if he lose one of them, doth notleave the ninety and nine in the wilderness, and go after that which islost, until he find it. ]]

m) 100: qushtinshaul (compare numeral five # 215):Matt. 18g12 [[INda,gagaid shimt ? Zida girelth wil qushtin-

shaulth matika gaul da gTadit, ada za libazait ba gT.5ga dit, alth dumt

wha qudaksha kshtamausha da wil giep dit da kshtamausht ada dumtgdau shpag.ait sliz.unTsh dit, a dumt gwilthgagifela libaLait 137 dit ? =

Was dtinket euch? Wenn irgendein Mensch hundert Schafe hatte, undEins unter denselbigen sich verrirteo las st er nicht die neunund-neunzig auf den Bergen, gehet hin, und suchet das verirrete ? = How

think ye? if a man have an hundred sheep, and one of them be goneastray, doth he not leave the ninety and nine, and goeth into themountains, and seeketh that which is gone astray?]]

Matt. 13g8 [[Ada al nagazaou da qualthgl dada y7but,

adat da,gpiduksha na gian dit, nagazaou da qushtinshaul wil tkuliygdit.

nag.azaou da gaul da wil giapa tkuliyr dit, nagazaou da gwilT wil giapa

tkuliyr dit. = Etliches fiel auf ein gut Land, und trug Frucht, etlicheshundertaltig, etliches sechzigrAltig, etliches dreizigfg.ltig. = But

others fell into good ground, and brought forth fruit, some an

157

hundredfold, some sixtyfold, some thirtyfold. ]]Mark 6:40 [[see Mark 6 :40 under g) 50]]

The form gwishtinshaul occurs:

Luke 15:4 [[see Luke 15:4 under 1) 99]]

[[as well as the stylistic]] qwishtinshaul:John 21:8 [[Ada wil.gutig,oiduksh ga shila disciplest gish ga

lthgwa zum agwThshau ga awil althga Trkshnakt dish ga gilhouli ga, ligi

gO"bel shinith wil qwishtinshaulth cubitsilth sh.g.anakt, ash gut zogum

gguklthsh ga at ga holtk gut gish ga lriwalum zum aksh ga. = Die

andern JUnger aber kamen auf dem Schiffe, (denn sie waren nichtferne vom Lande, sondern bei zweihundert Ellen, ) und zogen das Netz

mit dem Fischen. = And the other disciples came in a little ship; (forthey were not far from land, but as it were two hundred cubits, )dragging the net with fishes. ]]

n) 153: gel wil qwishtinshaul da qwishtMasha wil giap da

gwan (absolute):

John 21:11 [[Ada wil mok gish Simon Peter ga, adat wil amshegish ga at gish ga gilhoulr ga, holtk ga gish ga lik1Fkshum liTwalum

zum aksh ga, griel ga wil qwishtinshault ga da qwishtan.sha wil giap dagwan ga: ada zo shimgul wThe'lt ga, ada gup althga be-aksh ga at ga. =

Simon Petrus steig hinein, und zog das Netz auf das Land voll grosserFische hundertunddreiundflifzig. Und wiewohl ihrer so viel waren,zerriss dach das Netz nicht. = Simon Peter went up, and drew the netto land full of great fishes, an hundred and fifty and three: and for allthere were so many, yet was not the net broken. ]]

o) 200: g7;'bel wil qushtin.shaul:

Mark 6:37 dumgadoultha-numT ada dup dum gTklth gr'bel dalth

wil qushtinshaulth bidilth shgadauklth gulth wune-ya... ? = sollen wir

denn hingehen und zweihundert Pfennig werth Brod kaufen.... ? = Shall

we go and buy two hundred pennyworth of bread... ?

158

John 21:8 eirbel shinith wil qwishtinshaulth cubitsilthshzanakt = ...etwa zweihundert Ellen entfernt = about two hundredcubits distance [[King James: as it were two hundred cubits]].

p) 300: gwilida wil kshtinshaul (B. k(A tEkcEnEcg..11):

John 12:5 gaulth nazun wha w"a",/atk ga diya giT...gouruziga althgwilTdalth wil qushtinshaulth bit... ? = weshalb ist diese Salbe nichtverkauft ftir dreihundert Groschen... ? = Why was not this ointmentsold for three hundred pence... ?

Likewise Mark 14:15 [{Awl' n'dum as wallatk ga dit, nrclumt gistga gwilTda wil kshtinshaul bidit na dum dal dit. ada nrdum ginamtk gadida gagw7a dit. Ada diTala alalgiakshit gish niat. = Man kOnnte dasWasser um mehr denn dreihundert Groschen verkauft haben, unddasselbe den Armen geben- Und murreten Mper sie. = for it mighthave been sold for more than three hundred pence, and have beengiven to the poor. And they murmered against her. ]]

q) 500: gwisheeinsh wil qushtinshaul.Luke 7:41 gaul ga gwisht7nshit ga wil qushtinshaulsh ga bit ga

e'shk gut ga = der Eine war flifhundert Groschen schuldig = the oneowed five hundred pence.

r) 4000, 5000, 10, 000, and 20, 000 were always formedwith [[the English word]] thousand in my [[biblical]] texts.

4000: Mark 8:9 [[Tk-ilpk ga wil thousands ga shgabot ga:adat wil hashhaizt ga. = Und ihrer waren bei viertausend, die dagegessen hatten; und er liess sie von sich. = And they that had eatenwere about four thousand: and he sent them away]].

5000: Mark 6:44 [[Ada shgab7sh ga hq trin gapsh ga analga gwishtZinsha wil thousanda yOtat. = Und die da gegessen hatten, derwaren fanftausend Mann. = And they that did eat of the loaves wereabout five thousand men. ]]

159

John 6:10 [[Ada housh Jesus ga, Wanda giadit. Ada al zirsh gakTauk gish ga wil wilt ga. Ada wil wansh ga giat ga, gwisht3nshashinith wil thousandlth shgabZ5it. = Jesus aber sprach: Schaffet, dasssich das Volk lagere. Es war aber viel Gras an dem Ort. Da

lagerten sich bei firnftausend Mann. = And Jesus said, Make the mensit down. Now there was much grass in the place. So the men satdown, in number about five thousand. ]]

Matt. 14:21 ada shLabOsh ga na tkauk gut ga gwisht7nsha wilthousands ga y3ta ga = und es hatten gegessen fdnftausend Manner =and five thousand men had eaten [[King James And they that hadeaten were about five thousand men]].

10, 000 and 20, 000: [[Ligi n'clalth wilsh king, za dumt inbaklth shila kingt alth wildogiatk, za wha gha kshLaugum dhIt ada zashagaudgut a za liki dumt da°57k1thk gut dTlth na kapTlum thousandk gutalth dumt lrid7.1sh ga dum goidukshit gish ga dumt in bakt ga shikshtoltga g3tbel ga wil giapsh ga thousands ga ? = Oder welcher Kgnig willsich begeben in einen Streit wider einen andern Kgnig, und sisst nichtzuvor, und ratschlaget, ob er kgnne mit zehntausend begegnen dem,der ilber ihn kommt mit zwanzigtausend? = Or what king, going tomake war against another king, sitteth not down first, and consultethwhether he be able with ten thousand to meet him that cometh againsthim with twenty thousand?]]

Note: Here one should have expected gwishtinshaul; thethousands alone, not the men, are being counted!

# 224. The inspection of the experimental data at hand furnisher:no sure clue to the basis of the number system. The relation in whit:the naming of six, seven, [[and]] eight is to the naming of two, three,[[and]] four pointedly brings to mind an original quinary system. But

then contrary to [[that system]] is [[the fact that]] the name for nineagrees not with four, but with five. The tens are formed throughout

160

according to the decimal system. We find a trace of the vegesimalsystem with forty [[and]], more frequently yet, with the hundreds.With the latter, [[the hundreds]], we find a continuous association ofthe even hundreds in such a way that the uneven hundreds areexpressed by the addition of a hundred to the nearest preceding evenhundred number.

B. The Ordinal Numbers[[See the 1889 Boas Report, 13. 881, for the following informa-

tion and chart on the ordinal numbers, # 225; for the information on

the numeral adverbs, # 227; and for the information on the distributivenumerals, # 228. The verse examples and the comments in # 225 and# 228 in reference to the Gospel translations forms are Schulenburg'scontributions to this material borrowed from Boas. Schulenburg pre-sents the borrowed material in German, not in the English of theBoas Report. ]]

# 225. ''The first" has two forms. One [[form is]] for animateobjects; the other for inanimate [[objects]]. The following ordinalnumbers are formed by means of naanhia [[correction: naanhiV]](= "the next to") and the preceding cardinal number. In the Gospeltranslations [[the form is]] na'aniy7, written na'any7. The "second"[[which]] = next to the first (not "to one") forms the only exception tothis [[rule]]. Further, the t which is attached to the end of thecardinal numbers is probably nothing other than that euphonic terminalt (# 8).

With reference to:

animate objectsthe first: kskaoq [[correctiow ksIce/oq]]the second: naanhia kskaoq [[correction: naanhiI/ kskiVoq]]

161

inanimate objectsthe first: kstscfq* [[correction: kstso/q]]the second: naanhia kstsoq [[correction: naanhia/kstso/q]]the third (Boas):

Counting: naanhia: t'EpqrdEt/Flat Objects: naanhia tEpqadEt

/ /

Round Objects: naanhia goupElt

Men: naanhia t'Epqaddlt

Long Objects: naanhia gaopsk'angetCanoes: naanhia galpe-eltk

Measures: naanhia gulbElt

[[chart corrections according to the Boas ordinal number chartfor the "third": naanhiT/in every class precedes

tlEpq-a-/dEt

t'Epq-a7/dEt

go UpElt

t'EpqadVltgaopskangetgalp7/eltkgu/lbElt

under

I 1

I I

Counting,

Flat Objects,

Round Objects,

Men,

Long Objects,

Canoes,

Measures.]]# 226. Whenever [[it]] is evident from the sense of the sentence

that "the second... " (or the "third") is intended, only na'aniya [[from

kshg.auk (B.: kskaoq) [[correction: ksk*Aa /oq]] and kshzok(kstsq) [[correction: ksto/q]] are found in the Gospel translations.The first [[is found]] very frequently; the latter only [[in]] John 19:32[[Ada lth zutgoiduksha soldiers ga, adat guna-nzunsh gazashishish gakshzogut ga, ada gik wirgoqush ga nishtagaulshk ga n't shila iTyezitgish ga lak .g.uz-gk ga. = Da kamen die Kriegsknechte, und brachendem ersten die Beine, und dem andern, der mit ihm gekreuzigetwar. = Then came the soldiers, and brake the legs of the first, andof the other which was crucified with him. ]]

162

the Gospel translations]] (without the subsequent numeral term) isused.

Mark 12:30,31 ...einr kshzaug.a da yaoulthemg.ushgut.

Nataniy7 da gwa = ...dies ist das erste Gebot. Das zweite ist dies.Mark 12:30 this is the first commandment.

Mark 12:31 The second is this [[King James: And the secondis, namely this]].

Mark 12:21 adat ga7t ga na'aniy-i7t ga ada zakt ga... = und der

Zweite nahm sie und er starb = And the second took her, and died.C. The Numeral Adverbs

# 227. The numeral adverbs are identical to the forms whichare used for the counting of round objects and time divisions (thirdclass).

Therefore only a few examples [[are given]] here:

Luke 17:4 ada amilth tkash dupkaulth hadak ga da gwan T. gel

da shat, ada za dupkault za hazukshum iyeltk ga da gwan = und wenn

er siebenmal sitndigen wt?rde an dir an einem Tage und siebenmalwieder kg.me zu dir = And if he trespass against thee seven times in aday, and seven times again come to three [[King James: and seventimes in a day turn again to thee]].

Mark 14:30 hawalthk ga za g7belth algiaklth Z7uz, ada gwilrma dum ksh-Snaaout = ehe der Hahn zweimal kraht, wirst du mich

dreimal verleugnet haben = before the cock crow twice, thou shaltdeny me thrice.

D. The Distributive Numerals# 228. The distributive numerals are formed by placing

"mEtlE" in front of cardinal numbers; for example "one (round) toeach" = "mEtlE gIE'rEl. " [[correction: gtE/rEl]]

This "mEtlE" is written meltha in the Gospel translations.

163

John 2:6 [[Ada daush ga g_aul dit ga guldum akshum laup ga, diwilalaum shikshakshinshk gish ga Jews ga, meltha g"Vbel ligi gwili

shinith guldum'oulth shga dikdauyint. = Es waren aber allda sechssteinerne Wasserkrtlge gesetzt nach der Weise der Adischen Reini-gung, und ging in je einen zwei oder drei Mass. = And there were set

there six waterpots of stone, after the manner of the purifying of theJews, containing two or three firkins apiece. ]]

John 19:18 [[1\linish gut wil lizagwut gish ga lak zuzak ga, adadupkadolsh ga shilawalt ga, meltha shta gaul gaga nashtauksht ga, adalrishpagait haitk gish Jesus gut. = Allda kreuzigten sie ihn, und mitihm zween andre zu beiden Seiten, Jesum aber mitteninne. = Wherethey crucified him, and two other with him, on either side one, andJesus in the midst. ]]

E. Indefinite and Other Numeral Terms# 229. The definite numeral term for "one" is also used for the

indefinite "another. " In most cases, gik (# 179), in addition, isplaced in front of this one [[the indefinite numeral]].

John 19:37 ada gik hou gal da N'lthZdukshum Damishit = und

wieder spricht eine andere heilige Schrift = And again anotherscripture saith.

John 14:16 ada dumt ginam gik gTiel da gung_undoulthumgauda da

gwashim = und er wird euch geben einen anderen Trost = he shallgive you another Comforter.

Note: In many cases the compound word lukshgiat (= another

human being, a stranger) is also used:John 21:18 ada lukshgiada dumt in bilant. = ...und ein

Anderer wird dich erten... = and another shall gird thee....Luke 20:16 ada dumt ginamsh ga shindointk ga gish ga

lukshgigiat ga = ...und er wird geben seinen Garten an Andere = andhe will give his garden to another [[King James: he shall give thevineyard to others]].

164

# 230. nag.azaou = several, some, a few, others:Mark 12:13 ada wilt hashhaiz ga nagazaoush ga Pharisees dTlth

Herodians gish nrat = und sie entsandten Einige der Pharisg.er undHerodianer zu ihm = and they sent a few of the Pharisees and

Herodians unto him [[King James: and they send unto him certain ofthe Pharisees and of the 1-1-r3/-di-lii.ns]].

Mark 12:5 nag_az-a-out ga wakwunezagut ga, ada nazaz--out ga

yezit ga = Etliche stgupten sie und Etliche tOdteten sie = beating some,and killing some.

# 231. ab7-) = few, a few:

Mark 6:5 ...amukshat lTdaush ga zalanont gish ga ab-5t gashipshrepgum giat ga = ausgenommen er legte wenigen Kranken

seine lignde auf = save that he laid his hands upon a few sick folk.Luke 13:23 alp-Ore-11th dilamautkshit ? = werden Wenige selig

werden? = are there few that he saved?# 232. z-6-shk = little, slight [[unimportant]]:

Luke 7:28 althga hokshk gulth.g.awTre-ksha dash John a shpa.gait

tkb-..nT kshaqulthal dida han-Inag_ut: ada g.up zawile-ksha z-c-) z-cishk ga da

dash ga na kingdomsh ga Shimoigiat ga LakTga ash nTat = nicht gibt

es einen GrOsseren unter alliden von Weibern Geborenen alsJohannes; doch wenn er auch noch so gering 1st im Reiche Gottes, soist dieser grOsser als er = Among those that are born of women thereis not a greater prophet than John [[King James: the Baptist]]; but hethat is least in the kingdom of God is greater than he.

Luke 7:17 ada alt na z7S-shk ga da nat shalthT1 da dit, nTnT zFshk

ga da drshrebunshk ga dit = und welchem aber wenig vergeben wird,

der liebt wenig = but to whom little is forgiven, the same loveth little.# 233. hel = many, wThe-1 = a great many (compare # 171):

Matt. 22:14 awil hnda hilkhriitksha dit, ada amlb7) kshanak-nTshk ga dit dum = Viele sind berufen, doch sind nur Wenige

165

auserwUhlt [[King James: For]] many are called, yet [[King James:but]] few are chosen.

John 7:31 ada heft gish ga giat ga shimhoudikshit gish nrat =and viele Menschen glaubten an ihn = And many of the people believed

in [[King James: on]] him.Luke 7:47 ltha shalthiltht ga na hadak ga dit, gu wTh71 da dit =

die SUnden sind ihr vergeben, welche sehr viele waren = the sins areforgiven you, which are a great many [[King James: Her sins, whichare many, are forgiven]].

# 234. zu = much (contrary to z3-shk # 232):

Luke 7:47 -gwil zu shrebunshk ga dit = denn viel hat sie geliebt

= for much has she loved [[King James: for she loved much]].Luke 21:3 yagaig.azil. ladalth da gw7um zinsh zagum hanas,p.

gwaya tkFnidit = doch mehr legte hinein diese arme Wittwe als sieAl le = this poor widow cast [[King James: hath cast]] in more than

they all.# 235. tkTnT = each, every; all:

Matt. 7:17 nrw-5,1 tk7.ni" a-ma zun t'in da,g,piduksha 7,ma malt... =

also bringt ein jeglicher guter Baum gute Frucht... = Even so everygood tree bringeth forth good fruit.

John 3:26 tka-nTgiada zut_gpiduksha dash /fiat = alle Menschenkommen zu ihm = all men come to him.

# 236. Lou'uzg.un = only, single, sole:Matt. 5:36 awil lthguksh ga ma dum shamaukshk ligi dr>uzk ga

zpuluzgun da nagoushint = denn du vermagst nicht ein einziges Haarvon dir weiss oder schwarz zu machen = for you cannot make a single

hair of you white or black [[King James: one hair white or black]].John 19:36 althga dum bilotk gulthsou'uzzun dalth na shaipt =

ihr sollt ihm kein einziges Bein zerbrechen = you shall break nosingle bone of him [[King James: A bone of him shall not be broken]].

166

# 237. mila = both with one another, both together; also in thecase whenever both parts themselves are composed of multiple parts:;

Luke 1:6 ada mila hakhoigiakt gish ga zalsh ga Shimoigiat gaLakr.ga = sie waren alle beide fromm vor Gott = they were both

righteous before God.

Luke 7:42 ada ltha althga daulth dum luklibalshit, ada wil milag.umg.aud gish dupnTat = und da sie nicht hatten zu bezahlen, schenkte

er es ihnen beiden = and since [[King James: when]] they had nothing

to pay, he forgave it to them both [[King James: he frankly forgavethem both]].

# 238. tka = entire, total, complete, whole, all; an adverbialterm for the sum of all, the totality (compare tkani # 235):

John 20:12 adat nTsh ga wil wansh ga dupkad7lt ga angels gamukshmaukshk gut ga = und sie sieht sitzen zwei Engel in ganz weisser

Kleidern = And she sees two angels sitting in completely white clothes

[[King James: And seeth two angels in white sitting]].Luke 11:34 ada tka holtksha tkamau'un da , ada

tka stizgutksha tkamau'unt = (wenn dein Auge einfgltig geworden ist),

dann ist dein Leib ganz voll von Licht... , dann ist ganz finster deinLeib =[[when thine eye has become innocent]] then is thy body com-pletely full of light... then is thy body completely dark [[KingJames: when thine eye is single, thy whole body also is full of light;but when thine eye is evil, thy body also is full of darkness.

# 239. If it refers to a person, the adjectival ordinal numberis, as a rule, replaced by another term: shTlgiat.

Luke 2:7 ada wilt clazoiduksh ga shTlgiadum ltheilthgum yCitat

ga = und sie gebar ihren ersten Sohn = And she brought forth her

firstborn son.Mark 12:20 ada naksh ga shilgiat ga = und der Erste heirathete

= and the first got married [[King James: and the first took a wife]].

167

# 240. kb177 = half:

Matt. 11:27 [[wrong chapter and verse citation but translatedas follows]]: ada ma zida ltha gaga zurriFk dit, du.m wai'in kbre-um

dglat = und wenn du seinen Mund aufgethan haben wirst, wirst dufinden einen halben Dollar = and if you will have opened his mouth,you will find a half dollar.

Mark 12:42 adat lirdalthash ga g"6"belt ga mites ga gu sha.g.ait

kbigmsh centit = und sie legte hinein zwei Scherflein, welchezusammen einen halben Cent ausmachen = and she cast in [[King

James: threw in]] two mites which together make a half cent [[King

James: a farthing]].

168

VII. THE SIMPLE SENTENCE

# 241. In this section which examines the language from the

synthetic viewpoint, I have, in general, kept to the classificationwhich Georg von der Gabelentz observed in his Chinese grammar.Yet I was determined to omit a few of the topics found there, becausethe subject matter either is not represented, at least in my sources,or is already treated in earlier places.

1. Predication of to be# 242. The simple copula "to be" remains unexpressed or

finds sufficient expression in reciprocal relationship of subject and

predicate.

For example:

John 1:1 ada Shimoigiat ga Lak Tga Algiak = und Gott war das

Wort = and God was the word [[King James: and the Word was God]].

John 4:24 haik ga Shimoigiat ga Lakrga = ein Geist ist Gott =a spirit is God [[King James: God is a Spirit]].

2. Words for to be# 243. hokshk designates the to be of location:

Luke 4:18 hokshk gaga na Haik gish ga MTy7n ga goi = der Geist

des Herrn ist bei mir = The Spirit of the Lord is upon me.Luke 6:6 ada hokshk gish ga gault ga y-Onta ga = und da war ein

Mann = and there was a man.# 244. In addition to the usual meaning "to sit, " dhg (singular)

and wan (plural) also have the [[meaning]] of "lingering, " of "tarry-ing, " of "abiding, " of "being in a place."

a) Examples of dill:John 9:5 da dh"gyii da lak halizogut, adat ritTy7i nagoiba da

halizogut = weil ich in der Welt bin, bin ich das Licht der Welt =

because [[King James: as long as]] I am in the world, I am the lightof the world.

169

John 1:1 wilhTshidak gaga ada lthT, dhT.sh ga Algiak ga = im

Anfang war das Wort = In the beginning was the Word.

b) Examples of wan:

Matt. 18:20 wil n'da wil shagait wan dupkad51 dit ligi gwilaun

dit... = denn wo zusammen sind Zwei oder Drei... = For where twoor three are [[King James: gathered]] together.

Matt. 17:22 ada ashi want gish ga Galilee ga, ada housh Jesusgish dupnTat... = und als sie in Gall lga waren, da sprach Jesus zuihnen... = And while they were [[King James: abode]] in Galilee,Jesus said unto them....

# 245. wal (plural of hilwal) means "to do" and is also very

frequently used where the usual "to be" suffices:John 21:2 shagait wal ga dup Simon Peter ga dish Thomas

ga... = es waren bei einander Simon Petrus und Thomas = Therewere together Simon Peter and Thomas.

John 14:11 ada di walsh ga Nagwa't ga goi = und auch der Vaterist in mir = and also the Father is in me [[King James: Believe methat I am in the Father, and the Father in me]].

# 246. leitk [[plural: amy-i]], come [[German past participleform]], is used in many places in the meaning "to come from, " "tocome from something to this place, H "to be from somewhere. "

For example:

John 9:16 althga wItk ga yZita gwai ash ga Shimoigiat ga

Laka-ga = nicht ist dieser Mensch von Gott = This man is not from

God [[King James: of God]].

John 7:27 al wilaiyum wil watk ga y7ta gwa = aber wir wissen,

woher dieser Mann ist (das Hergekommensein dieses) = Howbeit we

know this man whence he is.# 247. The sense of the plural form amya [[# 246]] is likewise

[[the "to bell]: from something [[or somewhere]]. Since, however,

170

ample reference to this [[has]] previously [[been]] made, I believe itsufficient here to only refer to those places---# 12, b; # 34; # 200;and # 201.

3. to become, to have# 248. In addition to other meanings (compare # 104), sha has

this one also: "to turn into something. "

John 1:14 ada sha shamet gish ga Algiak ga = und zu Fleischwurde das Wort = and the word became flesh [[King James: And theWord was made flesh]].

John 2:9 ada lthat bakt ga mTyTnsh ga lualgiat ga aksh ga natsha winet ga = als aber der Speisemeister das Wasser kostete, daszu Wein geworden = When the ruler of the feast tasted [[King James:

had tasted]] the water that became wine [[King James: that was madewine]].

# 249. The prefix di- frequently expresses to become" (corn-pare # 102):

Matt. 21:15 ada lthat nTsht ga manpriests ga dilth hiikladamishitga...dT1th wil wTamlahoudash ga gubutginthk ga... ada shimg.ult

dishTepk gut ga = als aber die Hohenpriester und Schriftgelehrten

sahen die... und die Kinder schreien...da wurden sie entrUstet = Andwhen the chief priests and scribes saw the... and the children crying... then they became irritated [[King James: And when the chiefpriests and scribes saw the wonderful things that he did, and thechildren crying in the temple, and saying, Hosanna to the son ofDavid; they sore displeased]].

# 250. sher means "to have. "For example:

John 6:47 nTat ga gu shimhoudiksha dit shishgri whatT shabl'm

gundidalsha dish niat = der, welcher glaubet an mich, der hat dasewige Leben = He that believeth on me hath everlasting life.

171

John 812 ya,g,ai dum shgri goibam g_undido-lsha dash xi-rat =

sondern er wird haben das Licht des Lebens = but he shall have thelight of life [[King James: he that followeth me shall not...butshall have the light of life]].

# 251. dadau is found in a few places in the meaning "to have";

John 1615 tkaTnTgau dadauit gish ga Nagwat ga rirly nhawg1 dit

= alles, was der Vater hat, das ist mein = All things that the Fatherhath are mine.

Mark 638 dumaisha anai dadau dada" gwashim? = wie viel

Brode habt ihr bei euch? = How many loaves have ye with you?# 252. didau appears in the same meaning more frequently

than the preceding dadau:

Luke 19024 kbagrg: pounda dash niat, ada ma ginam dish nTat gti

wil didau kapT1 da poundsit = nehmt das Pfund von ihm und gebt es

dem, der zehn Pfund hat = Take from him the pound, and give it tohim that hath ten pounds.

Luke 1925 ada houit gish nTat, MTy57n, ltha didau kapTi da

pounds a dash nTat = und sie sprachen zu ihm Herr, er hat doch zehnPfund = And they said unto him, Lord, he hath ten pounds.

Note Furthermore, as the following example may show, theTsimshian often prefers more specific verbs when we are satisfiedwith the indefinite "to have. "

Matt. 3:12 shiny-atquadit ga hashawanshk ga gish ga zum anont

ga = er trg.gt die Wurfschaufel in seiner Hand, (ha-sha-wansh-k =womit-fort-gethan wird) = he carries the fan in his hand [[ha -sha-wansh-k = with which is done away]] [[King James: Whose fan is inhis hand]].

4. yes and no# 253. To answer with yes is accomplished by the special

expression a'a (Boas: o and---from a distance---haV)

172

John 21:16 ada houit gish niat. A'A. MTy-gri = und er spricht zu

ihm: ja, Herr = He saith unto him, Yea, Lord.Matt. 11:9 ada gau haba shim ma dum shim nish dit ?

Propheti? houyil da gwashim ghalak7 da prophetit = und was seid

ihr hinausgegangen zu sehen? einen Propheten? ja. ich sage euch,der noch grOsser ist als ein Prophet = But what went ye out for tosee? A prophet? yea, I say unto you, and more than a prophet.

# 254. niadit (= it is so, " "truly, " or "indeed") is a moreemphatic form of affirmation.

John 11:27 ada houit gish nTat, Nradit, MTyln = und sie sprichtzu ihm: ja, Herr = She saith unto him, Yea, Lord.

# 255. Although in a declining sense (so that it actuallyamounts to a no), niadit also serves in connection with the adversa-tive particle yagai for the intensification and affirmation of theexpre s sion.

Luke 7:26 ada al gau na habashim da ma dum shim nTsh dit ?Propheti? Yagai niadit, houyil da gwashim, galak7 da prophetit = undwas seid ihr hinausgegangen zu sehen? einen Propheten? Aberfurwahr, ich sage euch, der ist noch viel grOsser als ein Prophet =And what went ye out for to see? A prophet? Truly [[King James:Yea]] I say unto you, and much more than a prophet.

Luke 11:27, 28 ada houit gish nTat, Gumgaulth wal nasherumlthi.ga nat in dagoidukshint, drlth mashka na dakdaugunt. Ada al houit ga.

Yagai niadit, gumgaulth wIlt in nakn7sh ga na algial-csh ga Shimoigiat

ga Lakaga, adat warandit = und sie sprach zu ihm: selig ist der Leib,der dich getragen hat, und die BrUste, die du gesogen }last! Er abersprach: Nein, vielmehr selig sind, die Gottes Wort hOren undbewahren! = a certain woman of the company lifted up her voice, and

said unto him, Blessed is the womb that bare thee, and the paps whichthou hast sucked. But he said, No [[King James: Yes, rather]]

173

blessed are they that hear the word of God and keep it.

# 256. ain = no:

Matt. 5:37 am gwai dum wila algiazunt, NTadit, NTadit: Ain,

ain... = deine Rede aber sei so: ja, ja, nein, nein... = But let yourcommunication be, Yea, yea; Nay, nay....

Luke 13 :2, 3 halignag.aud shim alth gakshlak-ilth hadadak ga di

gu Galileans a gwai alth tk7nTlth shila Galileanst ash ga wil haklak gut

ga gwa? Houyir da gwashim, Ain = meinet ihr, dass diese Galilgervor alien andern Galilgern grOssere StYrider gewesen sind, weil sie

dieses erlitten haben? Ich sage euch: nein! = Luke 13:2 Suppose yethat these Galileans have been [[Kind James: were]] sinners above allthe Galilaeans, because they have suffered [[King James: suffered]]such things? Luke 13:3 I tell you, Nay.

5. Negation

# 257. There are very many different expressions for our

simple "not. H The general and only pure definite negation is althga;all the other negative words include something more than the merenegation. (compare # 78, # 81, # 123, b)

Examples of althga:

Matt. 5:17 althga goiduk s hrlth n'dum lthuut, yazai n!clumdit = ich bin nicht gekommen um aufzulgsen, sondern urn

zu erfilllen = I have not come [[King James: am not come]] to destroy,

but to fulfill.Matt. 15:2 wil althgut* yoiyikshaza'anon dadI da tkauk ga dit

= denn nicht waschen sie ihre HA!nde, wenn sie essen = for they wash

not their hands when they eat [[King James: bread]].# 258. wha is, so to speak, a negation in the subjunctive in

contrast to the indicative althga.

althgut seems to be only a phonetic variant of althgat.

174

It appears chiefly in final and conditional clauses (both sub-

junctive and relative).a) in final clauses:

Mark 5:7 gwuni3yri da gwan ash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakrga a ma

dum wha haguntit = ich beschwgre dich bei Gott, dass du mich nicht

quglest = I adjure you by God that you would not torment me [[King

James: I adjure thee by God, that thou torment me not]].

Mark 5:10 ada shimt gwuna gish niat dumt wha wulth hashhaizt

gish ga lakyOp ga = und er bat ihn sehr, dass er sie nicht aus der

Gegend wegtriebe = And he besought him much that he would not drive

them out of the area [[King James: And he besought him much that he

would not send them away out the country]].

b) in conditional clauses: [[see page 174a for examples]]Mark 14:38 171th ada gigrengwaklth shim, dum wil wha

laumgolth shim dagunshpaltzaudat = wachet und betet, damit ihr

nicht in Versuchung fallet = If you do not convert and become like

children, you will not come into the kingdom of heaven [[King James:

Except ye be converted and become as little children, ye shall not

enter into the kingdom of heaven]].Mark 8:30 adat yakyloulthemakt gish ga dumpt wha malthash

nTat gish ligit na-= and er bedrohte sie, dass sie Niemandem von ihm

sagen sollten -= if he does not hear you, then take one or two more

with you [[King James: But if he will not hear thee, then take with

thee one or two more]].# 259. Compounds such as the following (compare # 20) attest

to the fact that wha earlier had a more general meaning.

whahoigiak = unjust:

Luke 16:10 [[Na shimhou dida shimzul z7shgum gaut gik

shimhou da wile-ksha dit; adat na wha hoigiaga dida shimgul z-o-shgum

gaut, gik wha hoigiaga da wrreksha dit. = Wer im Geringsten treu ist,

Matt. 18:3 amiza wha yilyeltk ga shim, ada ma za shim

gubutgifilthk gut, althga dum lamzak shim ash ga na kingd,:yrnsh ga

lakgga = wenn ihr nicht umkehrt and werdet wie die Kinder, so werde

ihr nicht kommen in das Himmelreich = If you do not convert and

become like children, you will not come into the kingdom of heaven

[[King James: Except ye be converted and become as little as

children, ye shall not enter into the kingdom of heaven]].

Matt 18:16 ada al amizat wha naknEun tkayawa goulda ligi

dupkad51 dit... = wenn er dich aber nicht horet, so nimm ncch Einen

oder Zwei zu dir.. = if he does not hear you, then take one or two

more with you [[King James: But if he will not hear thee, then take

with thee one or two more]].

The Tsimshian and German chapters and verse on the preceding

page for "b) in conditional clauses" are in error,

175

der ist auch im. Grossen treu; und wer im Geringsten unrecht ist,der ist auch im Grossen unrecht. = He that is faithful in that which isleast is faithful also in muchs and he that is unjust in the least isunjust also in much. ]]

whagaud = to be heartless, to commit adulterysMark 1O019 [[Wilaiyin yaoulthemzushgut, Gilau wha-Laudunt,

Gilau shrigedunt, Gilau galgunt, Gilau bigum magaunshk gunt, Gilaunaknog_umw-En.t, Lthauda nagwIdunt dilth nau'unt. = Du weisst ja die

Gebote wohls Du sollst nicht ehebrechen. Du sollst nicht tOten. Du

sollst nicht stehlen. Du sollst nicht falsch Zeugnis reden. Du sollst

niemand tguschen. Ehre deinen Vater und Mutter. = Thou knowestthe commandments, Do not commit adultery, Do not kill, Do notsteal, Do not bear false witness, Defraud not, Honour thy father and

mother. ]]

wha-gitgum anai = (not yeast [[bread]]), unleavened breads

Mark 14'0'1 [[Ltha zoudish ga gO9belt ga sha ga, ada nTnrsh ga

half-lualgiadum Passover ga, dilth wha-grtgurri anai gas adagwilthgagalt ga manpriests ga dilth hilkgadamishit ga dumt wila

y7.m.g.um gidigat ga, ash ga dumt zagwut ga. = Und nach zween Tagen

war Ostern und die Tage der sUssen Brote. Und die Hohenpriester

und Schriftgelehrten suchten, wie sie ihn mit Listen griffen undt&teten. = After two days was the feast of the passover, and ofunleavened breads and the chief priests and the scribes sought howthey might take him by craft, and put him to death. ]]

whahTya = not long thereafter g

Mark 10g52 [[Ada housh Jesus gish neat, N'dau yali; Na shim-

houdikshun gun dimautkshints Whahryat ga ada wil sha tifazk gut ga

adat y-igut gish ga lak gaina ga. = Jesus aber sprach zu ihms Gehe

hin, dein Glaube hat dir geholfen. Und alsbald ward er sehend, und

folgete ihm nauch auf dem Wege. = And Jesus said unto him, Go thy

176

way: thy faith hath made thee whole. And immediately he receivedhis sight, and followed Jesus in the way. ]]

Mark 14:43 [[WhahTga'sh ga houit ga, Dha, goiduksh gut Judas

ga, gault gish ga kapault ga da dupkad71, adat shiksht71sh ga wT

wilhelgiat ga yirgazawaiam dO-Lizk gaga dilth gat ga, amiya gish gamanpriests ga dilth hrik.g.adamTshit, dilth tashTlgiat ga. = Und alsbald,

da er noch redete, kam herzu Judas, der ZwOilfe einer und eine gros seSchar mit ihm, mit Schwertern und mit Stangen, von den Hohenpriest-

Itern und Schriftgelehrten und Altesten. = And immediately, while he

yet spake, cometh Judas, one of the twelve, and with him a greatmultitude with swords and staves, from the chief priests and thescribes and the elders. ]]

whazulgiatkum hanlk = virgin:

Matt. 1:23 [[NT, dum waibun gaul da whag_ulgiatgum han-a-za, ada

dumt dazpiduksha lthgalthgum yO-t, ada dumt shriwa da dish Emmanuel,

gIT da shim algiaksha da da, Hoksh, ga ga Shimoigiat ga Lak57ga gum.

= "Siehe, eine Jungfrau wird schwanger sein, und einen Sohn geblren,und sie werden seinen Namen Immanuel heissen, das ist verdol-metschet: Gott mit uns. " = Behold, a virgin shall be with child, andshall bring forth a son, and they shall call his name Emmanuel, whichbeing interpreted is, God with us. ]]

whanahokshgum giat = spirit:John 6:69 [[Ada ltha g.ashimhoudikshumt ada dup wilaish nt7gun

Whanahokshgum Giat gish ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-iga. = Und wir haben

geglaubet und erkannt, dass du bist Christus, der Sohn deslebendigen Gottes. = And we believe and are sure that thou art

Christ, the Son of the living God. ]]

# 260. ain (B. : "(yen) is the adversative negation and is, assuch, mostly emphatic (compare # 256):

177

Mark 2:27 na zapsha halTshquaitk gut a giadit, al aina ya.g.ai

giada da halTshquaitk gut = der Sabbeth ist urn des Menschen willen

gemacht, aber nicht der Mensch urn des Sabbaths willen = The sab-

bath was made for man, and not man for the sabbath.Mark 7:18 ainalth di dalgagaulshk ga shimT? Ain lth ma shim

wilai di? = versteht ihr es denn auch nicht? wisset ihr es auchnicht? = Are ye so without understanding also? Do you not perceive?

# 261. wagait ain = never:Mark 2:25 wa,gait ainith ma shim di lrazk di gu gau walsh

David... ? = habt ihr nie gelesen, was David that... ? = Have ye neverread what David did... ?

# 262. gup althga = by no means, not at all:Matt. 26:33 z,73 tkai da dum lthimgushgosha dadTgwan, zup

althga dum di lthim.gosh7 = wenn auch Alle sich an dir qrgerten, so

will ich doch mich keineswegs argern = Though all men shall be

offended because of thee, yet will I by no means [[King James:

never]] be offended.

# 263. althga gau = nothing:

John 3:27 althga gaulth lip da wailth giat = nichts kann ein

Mensch nehmen = a man can take [[King James: receive]] nothing.(compare the more customary althga ligi gau # 73. )

# 264. althgat na. = nobody, no one

Luke 10:22 ada althgat /la trim wilaish ga na ga Ltheilthk gaga =

und Niemand weiss, wer der Sohn ist = And no one [[King James: no

man]] knoweth who the Son is.

(emphatic: ain (lth) na-: compare # 71, # 72. )

# 265. whati = without (# 191):

Mark 6:7 adat ginamsh ga gutgiat gish dupnrat ash ga whati

shakshgum haik ga = und er gab Macht ihnen, die ohne reinen Geist =

and gave them power, [[King James: over unclean spirits]] those with-

out unclean spirits.

178

# 266. hawalthk = not yet

John 3024 awil nThish ga hawalthk ga zilum makshash John ash

ga walp dakre ga = denn dort war noch nicht Johannes in das GefAgnis

geworfen = For John was not yet cast into prison.John 20g5 ada hawalthk ga ziindit = und noch nicht ging er

hinein = yet went he not in.

John 204 hawalthk ga 1-1.7.gw3;ntk gulth hour a goi = noch nicht ist

gekommen meine Stunde = mine hour is not yet come.

# 267. hawe-nilth, hawalth (= not yet) is related in sound andmeaning

John 14g9 ltha shganaklth hokshk gwashim, ada wagait

hawe-nilth ma wilaiyawr, Philip? = so lange Zeit bin ich bei euch und

noch nicht kennest du mich, Philippus ? = am I [[King James have 1

been]] so long time with you, and you do not yet know me, Philip

[[King James and yet hast thou not known me, Philip]]?

# 268. wa_gait hawalthk = never yet, until now not yet [[never

before]]g

Matt. 933 wagait hawalthk ga di nrshk gulth n'lthaw-gl da Israel

= noch nie ist auch solches gesehen worden in Israel = never beforehas such been seen in Israel [[King James It was never so seen inIsrael]].

Matt. 1111 wagait hawalthk ga haldum bllth gaul da shpagaitklthgu hanTnagut... = noch nie ist aufgekommen eins aus der Mitteder Kinder der Welber... = never before has one risen out of themidst of the children of women [[King James g Among them that are

born of women there hath not risen a greater than John the Baptist]].John 7g46 wagait hawalthk ga cdi wila algiaklth giadash ga na

houit ga = no ch niemals hat ein Mensch so geredet, wie er gesprochenhat = never yet has a person so spoken, as he has spoken [[KingJames Never man spake like this man]].

179

# 269. op za (= in order that... not) seems to indicate thatsomething fearful should be prevented:

Matt. 4:6 ...ada zurn,gaan.on da dumt in shinTh7qudint, op za

ligi gw-gndamukshlth shin alth laup = ...un.d sie werden dich auf denHgn.den tragen, auf dass du nicht deinen Fuss an einen Stein stossest= and they will carry in their hands, in order that you not strike yourfoot on a stone [[King James: and in their hands they shall bear theeup, lest at any time thou dash thy foot against a stone]].

Matt. 7:6 gilau ma shim ginam n'lthZ5duksha da hashh-a'shit, maza shim ligi shadaltha na bilh-a- shim da hazazlklth ga gwashaut, op

zit* klthalungiakshit... = ihr sollt nicht das Heiligthum den Hundengeben und eure Per len solit ihr nicht vor die Saue werfen, auf dasssie dieselben nicht niedertreten... = Give not that which is holy untothe dogs, and cast not your pearls before the swine, in order that theynot trample them down [[King James: Give not that which is holy unto

the dogs, neither cast ye your pearls before swine, lest they tramplethem under... ]].

# 270. In prohibitive [[imperative]] clauses, !! not" is expressedby means of gilau (compare # 82):

Luke 1:13 gilau b7shin = filrchte dich nicht = Fear not.Luke 10:20 ada al gilau za gwai za ,gun galthgwishgiTa da shim =

doch darinnen freut euch nicht! = Notwithstanding in this rejoice not.# 271. lthguksh = not possible, not to be able:Mark 3:20 ada gik shag.ait gash ga wilhelgiat ga, gun lthgunksh

gish ga dum tkauk gut ga = und abermal kam das Volk zusammen,

also, dass es unmoglich war, dass sie assen = And the multitudecometh together again, so that it was impossible that they ate [[KingJames: so that they could not so much as eat bread]].

op zit appears to be only a phonetic variation of op zat.

180

Mark 3:25 lthguksh ga dumt da'alclthk gut ga w-glp ga dum

hahaitk ga dit = es ist unmgglich, dass ein Haus bestehen kann = It is

impossible that a house can endure [[King James: And if a house be

divided against itself, that house cannot stand. ]]6. must, shall, can

# 272. zup is a previously mentioned auxiliary, # 133, whichexpresses necessity with regard to an objective or goal.

Pertinent examples:Mark 12:30 ada ma dum g.up shTebunsh ga MryFn ga... = und du

sollst lieben den Herrn... = And thou shalt love the Lord....John 12:34 dum.g.up manbazk gish ga Lthgcilthk gish ga giat ga?

= des Menschen Sohn muss erhght werden? = The son of man must be

lifted up?# 273. dum also (# 131) appears in the meaning 'shall, "

"should":

Matt. 19:16 gaulth am'm gaulth dum ? = was soll ich

Gutes thun... ? = what good thing shall I do... ?Matt. 19:19 ...dT1th ma dum shrebun shila giadun... und

du sollst lieben deinen I\TZchsten... = and, Thou shall love thy

neighbor....# 274. The expression am dum (it is good that... ) is very

frequently [[employed]] for our "shall, " "should":Matt. 19:6 gun gau ltha lainithaudash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakg.ga

am dumt wha basha.gun da giadit = was nun Gott in einan.dergefLrgt hat,

das soil der Mensch nicht scheiden = what therefore God hath joinedtogether, that shall no man sever [[King James: let not man putasunder]].

Matt. 5:48 am dum wha nahakhokshk ga shim... = ihr solltvollkommen sein = you shall be perfect [[King James: Be ye there-

fore perfect]].

181

# 275. Iklthk, more customary da'aklthk = to be able, to bepossible:

Mark 4:32 mount dataklthk ga da na zZiuzash ga lakTga lrwan dit a

wilu shakshge-utk ga dit = also dass die Vggel unter dem Himmel unter

seinem Schatten wohnen kO'nnen = so that the birds under heaven are

able to live under its shadow [[King James: so that the fowls of theair may lodge under the shadow of it]].

Mark 4:33 ...malthash ga algiak gish dupnrat, ash ga wiltdataklthk gish gut nakriciit ga = ...er sagte das Wort ihnen, als sie eshOren konnten = spake he the word unto them, as they were able tohear it.

# 276. lthguksh = not to be able, not to be possible:Mark 5:3 ada lthguksh gut na ga dumt in dadaklth ga = und

Niemand konnte ihn binden = no man could bind him.

Mark 6:5 ada lthguksh gish ga dum di wait gish ga... = undes war fi.ir ihn unmoglich, dass er that... = and for him it was impos-sible that he did... [[King James: And he could there do no mightywork]].

7. to have in mind, to want, to wish# 277. dum, which expresses the concept of future (# 131), is

also used in the meaning "to have in mind, " "to want to"2

Mark 1:41 dum w7.17.1 = ich will es thun = I want to do it [[King

James: I will]].Mark 14:58 dum .g.oldif temple gwai = ich will abbrechen diesen

Tempel = I want to destroy this temple.# 278. hashak = to want, to wish, to desire:Matt. 20:32 gau hashak shim dum wan.. da gwashim? = was

sollt ihr, dass ich euch thun soll? = what do you want [[King James:what will ye]], that I shall do unto you?

182

Matt. 13:17 wThe-I da prophets dilth am-gm da giat na hashag,a

dada dumt nigau nTiza shimt... = viele Propheten and gerechteMenschen haben begehrt, zu sehen, was ihr sehet... = many prophetsand righteous men have desired to see those things which ye see....

# 279. anauk = will, to be willing, to suffer, allow, to permit'.Mark 1:40 amT ma za anaukt, da'aklthgun ma dum shakshaniT

wenn du es willst, so kannst du mich reinigen = If you want it, then

you can cleanse me [[King James: If thou wilt, thou canst make meclean]].

Mark 10:4 anau,g.ash Moses a dum damtk ga sh7O-nshgum bish-

bashuk gut = Moses hat zugelassen dass ein Scheidebrief geschriebenwird = Moses has permitted that a letter of separation is written[[King James: Moses suffered to write a bill of divorcement]].

# 280. shag.aud = to want (with conviction), to conclude, to

counsel, to persuade; will:John 1:13 gir ga kshaqulth-ilt ga, althga amyq dalth ilthe, ligi

na shag.a,ud gulth shame, ligi na shagaud gulth giat, = welche

geboren sind, nicht von dem Gebla, noch von dem Willen des

Fleisches, noch von dem Willen eines Menschen, sondern... = whichwere born, not of blood, nor of the will of the flesh, nor of the will ofman, but. . .

John 9:31 ... adat wgiansh ga na shag,.audk gut ga, ninTsh ga

naknZit ga = ...und (wenn) er thut seinen Willen, diesen hgrt er =and [[when]] he doeth his will, him he heareth.

John 12:10 ada al shagagaudk gish ga manpriests gish ga dumt

gik dit zagwush Lazarus ga = aber die Hohenpriester beschlossen,

dass sie auch den Lazarus tddteten = But the chief priests consultedthat they put Lazarus also to death [[King James that they might put

Lazarus also to death]].

183

# 281. shigilth = to want, to desire, to strive for, to aspire toJohn 8:37 ada ma shim al shigilth zaqudrit = ihr aber wollt mich

tOdten = but ye seek to kill me.

John 10:39 .g.un.t gik hazukshum shigilth g'g,t ga = deshalb trach-

teten sie abermals danach, ihn zu greifen = Therefore they soughtagain to take him.

8. Perfect Tense# 282. ltha signifies that which is completed and lasts or

continues, and wil [[signifies]] that which has just made itself mani-fect.

ltha: the Boas form = tla; see # 76 on the formation of theperfect tense and also 1889 Boas Report, p. 883. For lthaalso see # 20, 5; # 131; # 207; # 322.

2. wil: # 20, 4; # 131; # 207; # 322.

3. ithawil: # 154.]]

Here are a few pertinent examples:Matt. 2:14 ltha haldum bat ga, ada wilt gash ga lthgriwaumlthk

gaga... = als er aufgestanden, nahm er das Kind. . = when he arose,

he took the [[King James: young]] child....Matt. 5:1 ada lthat /fish ga wi wilhelgiat ga, ada wilt mang,aush

ga lak shz.unTshta ga = als er viel Volk sah, ging er auf einen Bergwhen he saw many peoples, he went up on the mountain [[King James.'And see the multitudes, he went up into a mountaionr and when he wasset, his disciples came unto him]].

Note: Later in the section over temporal joining [[# 322]], wewill go into more detail.

# 283. While, in most cases, we could render ltha by meansof "as, " we will best translate the following combination with "after":

ltha zpudr (aoudi = to end, terminate, cease), which expresses a typeof perfect with the secondary meaning of settled or disposed of.

184

John 21g15 ada ltha goudrsh ga tkauk gut ga und nachdem sie

das Mahl gehalten hatten = and after they had held the meal [[KingJames So when they had dined]].

John 20014 ltha goudish ga houit ga gwa = nachdem sie dies

gesagt hatte = after she had said this [[King James; And when she hacithus said]].

John 1801 ada lthagoudish ga housh Jesus ga gwa = nachdemJesus solches geredet hatte = after Jesus said such things [[KingJames When Jesus had spoken these words]].

John 13012 ada lthagpudTsh gut yoiyiksh ga g.ashishiat ga =

nachdem er nun ihre Ilsse gewaschen hatte = after he now had washec,their feet [[King James So after he had washed their feed].

Mark 1014 ltha gpudish ga lalha-tk gish John gish ga walp dakle°

ga = nachdem Johannes in das Geangnis geworfen war = After Johnwas thrown in prison [[King James Now after that John was put inprison]].

Mark 16g1 ada ltha gpudish ga halishquaitk gaga = nachdem der

Sabbeth vergangen war = after the sabbath was past [[King James!And when the sabbath was pasta

# 284, sh.gabTi has perfect meaning and, so it seems, thesecondary sense that a desired [[thing]] is attained, a need is satis-fied

Matt. 14821 ada shgab7sh ga na tkauk gut ga gwishti3nsha wil

thousands ga yota ga = und gegessen hatten funf tausend IvInner (sattgegessen) = and five thousand men had eaten [[eaten their fill]][[King James And they that had eaten were about five thousand men;

See also Matt. 14020 And they did all eat and were filled]].

Matt. 14g36 ada shgabUsh ga t'in gwaltk gut ga shim dilamautk

shit ga = und welche angerUhrt hatten, die wurden sehr gesund = and

as many as had touched were made perfectly whole]],

185

Note Also, lugwil may indicate completion; compare # 136.# 285. na like ltha (# 282) has similar perfect meaning, but

seems to differ from ltha in that it appears without reference toanother fact in the simple sentenceg

Luke 2Z037 na tkullTzk ga gish ga hrikgagigiansh gut ga = er ist

unter die Uebelthgter gerechnet = he is reckoned among the wrong-

doers [[King James And he was reckoned among the transgressors]].Luke 19046 na damtk gut = es stehet geschrieben = it is written.

9. also, still# 286. drmostly in the meaning "together with, " "and"

(word combining)---often has the meaning "also",

Matt. 1903 ada drzntspiduksh ga Pharisees gish 111-at = und auch

die Phariser kamen zu ihm = and the Pharisees also came unto him.Matt. 2007 n`dau shim di haba zum shindointk gut = gehet ihr

auch hin in den Weinberg = Go ye also into the vineyard.

# 287. gik nearly has the meaning and also, likewise, too, aswell, again, anew, furthermore; that is, it arranges, by a prelimi-nary similarity, sequential elements [[# 145, # 179, # 229]]

Luke 14g12 ada gik houit gish nTat gu nat in wau'ut ga... = und

desgleichen sprach er zu dem, welcher ihn eingeladen hatte... = andlikewise he said to him who had invited him [[King Jamesg Then said

he also to him that bade him]].Luke 1406 ada gik lthgukshk gish ga dum d'ilamak gut ga gwa

und abermals konnten sie nicht Antwort darauf geben = And again they

could not thereupon answer [[King James And they could not answer

him to these things]].# 288. hazukshum which probably actually has more the mean-

ing "back" [[return]], occurs very frequently in the same sense of gik

[[# 146, # 180]]:

186

Luke 245 ada lthat wha wat ga, ada wil hazukshum yilyeltk gutgish ga Jerusalem = und als sie ihn nicht fanden, da kehrten siewiederum nach Jerusalem zurtick = And when they found him not, they

turned back again to Jerusalem.Luke 14g12 op za dit hazukshum wau'un, ada za shitiy-gwuk ga

da gwan = auf dass sie dich nicht wiederum einladen und dir vergolten

werde = in order that they again not invite you and repay you [[King

James: lest they also bid thee again, and a recompence be madethee]].

# 289. In different places where we are satisfied with thesingle "again" or "anew, " the combination of gik and hazukshum withidentical meaning occurs:

John 927 gau gun gik hashak shim da ma dum shim hazukshumnakno dida? = weshalb wollt ihr es abermals hOren = wherefore

would ye hear it again?

John 10039 Lunt gik hazukshum shigilth g7t. ga = deshalb

suchten sie ihn abermals zu greifen. = Therefore they sought again totake him.

# 290. tkulTya (= to grow, to increase) frequently has the mean-ing moreover, in addition, besides, even more

Matt. 5117 gau tkuliy7 da w71 shimt ? = was thut ihr Cberdies?= what do you do in addition [[King James what do ye more thanothers]]?

John 19:8 g.un lthat nakn-Oit gut Pilate ga houit ga, ada tkulrygsh

ga b-asht ga = als Pilatus das Wort hgrte, fiiirchtete er sich noch mehr

= when Pilate hears the word, he was even more afraid [[King JamesWhen Pilate therefore heard that saying, he was the more afraid]].

# 291. In addition to tkulTy7, mandlyT appears in the meaning

above and beyond, even more [[in addition]]:

187

Luke 18:39 ada yagait mandiy1sh ga amhout ga... = er

aber schrie noch viel mehr = but he cried even more [[King James°

so much the more]].Addenda: nishta (etymology uncertain) in connection with gaul

has the sense "another, " "one more. "For example:

John 19:32 [[Ada ltha gutgpiduksha soldiers ga, adat gun-a-ligunsh

ga gashishish ga kshzogut ga, ada gik wilaoqush ga nishtagaulshk ga

n't shila liyezit gish ga lak guza-kgag = Da kamen die Kriegsknechte,und brachen dem ersten die Beine, und dem andern, der mit ihmgekreuziget war. = Then came the soldiers and brake the legs of thefirst, and of the other which was crucified with him. j]

gimgia could have the meaning "still, " "in addition. "(John 12:1, 16:12)

[[John 12:1 Gungoiduksh Jesus gish ga Bethany ga, ash ga lthagimgiagulsha dash ga dum Passover ga, gu ga wil dh-Ish Lazaurs ga,nha zagut ga ada n't gik dOlshunt gish ga wak gut gish ga shpagaitdriit ga. = Sechs Tage vor den Ostern kam Jesus gen Bethanien. daLazarus war, der Verstorbene, welchen Jesus auferwechet hatte vonden Toten. = Then Jesus six days before the passover came toBethany, where Lazarus was which had been dead, whom he raisedfrom the dead.

John 16g12 Ashi gimgia h-elda gau dum houya da gwashim, ada

al althga ma shim grao-n. = Ich habe euch noch viel zu sagen

aber ihr kOnnet's jetzt nicht tragen. = I have yet many things to say

unto you, but ye cannot bear them now. j]10. only

# 292. amuksha = only, except for (compare # 181):

Matt. 4z10 dum gup lthaudun ga MTyZn ga Shimoigiatk gun

ga, adat amukshat nrat ga dum y7,kun ga = dass du anbeten sollst

188

den Herrn, deinen Gott, und ihm allein nachfolgen = that thou shallworship the Lord thy God and him alone follow [[King James: Thou

shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve]].Matt. 5:47 ada amilth amuksha waikia shim dhoiuksha shimt..

= und wenn ihr nur zu euren Briidern freundlich thut... = and if yesalute your brethren only....

# 293. althga amuksha = not only:

John 13:9 Mry57n althga amuksha gashishi yagai dilth gik

garanona di-1th dumLoushrit = Herr, nicht nur meine Fu"sse, sondern

auch meine HInde und mein Haupt = not my feet only but also my

hands and my head.

Matt. 4:4 althga amuksha anailth dum gundidolshlth giat,

yagai tk5117 algia.g.a gu kshaw-a-tk gut gish ga zumF.ksh ga Shimoigiat ga

Laka'ga = nicht nur vom Brod leben die Menschen, sondern von einemjeglichen Wort, das aus dem Munde Gottes kommt = Man shall not

only live by bread, but also by every word that comes out of the mouthof God [[King James: Man shall not live by bread alone, but by everyword that proceedeth out of the mouth of God]].

# 294. gup = only (compare # 133, # 182):

John 9:34 gup shpagait hadak ga na wil kshalaklagunt = nur in

S(1'.nden bist du geboren = only in sin were you born [[King James:

Thou wast altogether born in sins]].John 8:41 .gup gaul ga nagw-idum ga = wir haben nur einen

Vater = we have one Father only [[King James: we have one Father]].Mark 12:29 Mryan ga Shimoigiat gun ga, gup gaul gish ga

INATyan ga = der Herr, dein Gott, ist nur ein Herr = the Lord thy God

is one Lord only [[King James: The Lord our God is one Lord]].

Remark: althgagup does not occur.

189

11. as

# 295. nTw71 = as [[and]] compares events [[or]] facts with

another:John 20:21 niwFlda n't wila haiziga Nagw7,t ga, nini n'drwila

hash-haiz shimt = gleichwie mich der Vater gesandt hat, so sende ichauch euch = just as my Father sent me, so I send you also [[KingJames: as my Father hath sent me, even so send I you]].

Mark 10:15 ligit na dumt in wha gl'sh ga na kingdomsh ga

Shimoigiat ga Lak-iga niw5.1da* lthquaumlthk gut, g.up althga dum di

zilum aklthk ga dit = wenn Jemand nicht empfgngt das Reich Gottes

wie ein Kind, der wird nicht hineinkOnnen = Whosoever does not

receive the kingdom of God as a [[King James: little]] child, he shallnot enter therein.

# 296. hoigiak compares things or objects with one another:Mark 1:10 dil.th wil tiki-goiduksh ga Haik ga hoigiagut ga dove

gish ga laka ga = und es kam herab der Geist gleich einer Taube aufihn = and the Spirit like a dove descending on him.

Mark 4:31 hoigiaga da gal da guba nawanum mustard =gleichwie ein kleines Senfkorn = just as a little grain of mustard seed

[[King James: like a grain of mustard seed]].# 297. adigriel = same, like, equal, equivalent (a-di-grle1):Matt. 21:36 ada gik adrgriel gut wila willgwut ga = und sie

thaten ihnen gleich also = and they did like thus unto him [[King

James: and they did unto him likewise]].Matt. 20:12 ada adigilel ma wila wilFgwa dit dish nrigum = und

du hast sie uns gleich gemacht = thou hast made them equal.

If hoigiak were to occur in this position, then the sense wouldbe as though the kingdom of God were a child, while niwal (ni- ornTn7,-wal) indicates as a child receives a gift.

190

# 298. wudi seems to express a comparison 'so to speak".Matt. 26:55 alth g.utgoiduksha shimr a wudit in libilt wri

hukzgowulshum giadit a... = seid ihr gekommen, urn so zu sagenwider einen Mgrder zu handeln... ? = have you come: so to speak, soas to act against a murderer... ? [[King James: ye come out asagainst a thief.... ]]

Matt. 27:35 ada lthat 1Thokshint gish ga lakz_uzak ga, ada wilt

bishbashag,.unsh ga na wishwash gut ga, ash ga wudi na y7yukt gut =

and als sie ihn ans Kreuz gebracht hatten, theilten sie seine Kleider,indem sie das Loos darum warfen = and as they had brought him tothe cross, they dealt out his clothes by casting lots [[King James:And they crucified him, and parted his garments, casting lots]].

Note: In this last example (Matt. 27:35) yeyuk probably does not

actually mean to draw lots, but [[is]] a custom of the natives whichcalls to mind drawing lots and the sense is "while they, so to speak,

made yeyuk [[lots]]. "12. Comparative

# 299. The comparative is expressed by the prefix g.a (com-pare # 33, # 89) [[and]] in a few places [[is]] also written gha:

John 12:43 wilt gashiebun na lthaumshk ga giadit ash ga nalthaumshk gish ga Shimoigiat ga Lakgga = denn sie hatten mehr liebdie Ehre bei den Menschen, als die Ehre bei Gott = For they loved thepraise of men more than the praise of God.

John 19:11 nTnT'.g.un ya.gaigawil7ksha hadak ga t'in dagaudir d7.

gwan = deshalb hat aber derjenige grO's sere SAde, der mich dir

aberantwortet hat = therefore he that delivered me unto thee hath the

greater sin.John 4:12 alth gawilEkshunTga a nagwrdumt Jacob? = bist du

grOsser als unser Vater Jacob? = Art thou greater than our fatherJacob... ?

191

John 14:12 ada gik ghalikl7kshum halthalshr7 gwa dum zabadit = und er wird noch grOssere Werke thun, als diese = and he willdo greater works than these [[King James: and greater works thanthese shall he do]].

13. Superlative

# 300. There is not a special form for it One usually uses a

paraphrase, [[and]] shimg.ul = very (also shim, etc.; compare # 169,

# 170) is placed in front of the adjective in question.

Luke 16:10 n'S shimhou dida shimLul z7shgum (z"c7shk = small,

little) gaut gik shimhou da wi717ksha dit; adat na wha hoigiag_a dida

shirrigul zEishgum gaut, gik wha hoigiaga da wilgksha dit = wer treu im

Geringsten ist, der ist auch treu im Grossen; und wer unrecht ist imGeringsten, ist auch unrecht im Grossen = He that is faithful in thatwhich is least is faithful also in much: and he that is unjust in the

least is unjust also in much.Mark 5:7 shim lam Shimoigiat = der allerhOchste Herr = the

most high Lord [[King James: the most high God]].

14. Command

# 301. While I refer to the notes of Mr. Boas on the imperative(# 82), I would, above all, like to state here that the imperative modeusually is differentiated from declarative statements by the suffix-1th (Boas: tn. [[1889 Boas Report, pp. 884-85. ]] (Compare also

# 123 for the discussion of the character of this auxiliary syllable):Luke 9:13 gigienith a za gabat = gebet ihnen zu essen! = Give

ye them to eat.Luke 11:9 gwunTilth, ada dum ginamtk ga dida gwashim;

gwilthgagilelth, ada ma dum shim w-a-, dit; nadishdT5shlth, ada...

bittet, und es wird euch gegeben; suchet, und ihr werdet finden;klopfet an, und... = Ask, and it is given to you [[King James: Ask,and it shall he given you]]; seek, and ye shall find; knock, and....

192

Luke 13:7 gozah...haue ihn ab... = ... cut it down....Remark: In addition to this suffix, the suffix -T is found',Matt. 3:2 gelukshataitikshT shim = thut Busse = do penance

[[King James: Repent ye]].If we are concerned here with the same suffix with which we

became acquainted in # 45, it would, thus, then have the meaning of agood-natured dat. commod. [[The meaning of this phrase is unknown.]j

as in the German, "Do penance unto me!" The use is, of course,completely sporadic.

# 302. n'dau is a special imperative form with the meaning"go":fg

Matt. 8:9 n'dau, ada doulth dit = geh', und er geht = Go, andhe goeth.

Mark 6:38 n'dau shim nilth = gehet und sehet! = go and see.Luke 10:3 n'dau shim = gehet hin! = Go your ways.# 303. Likewise (independent only in imperative sentences)

gul (= "come") appears. Compare the prefix gul-, # 109.Matt. 14:29 .g.ul = komm ! = Come.

Matt. 11:28 gul shim 7 goi = kommt her zu mir ! = Come unto

me....Mark 5:23 gul 1T.Clau zalanon dish niat = komm und lege die

lignde auf sie! = come and lay thy hands on her....Mr. Boas has g.ul za instead of k'altse; compare the modal

particle za, # 132.# 304. nIzrf is likewise a special imperative form with the

meaning "bring here":

Mark 9:19 n'zia -5: goi = bringet ihn her zu mir = bring him unto

me.

Mark 12:15 n'zu penny cr5 goi = bringt mir einen Pfennig her ! =

bring me a penny....

193

John 21:10 nIzil nag.azTou ltrwalum zum aksha. = bringet her

einige Fische... ! = bring a few fish... ! [[King James: Bring of the

fish... .]]# 305. Sentences of exhortation are very frequently begun with

shiVunza (etymology uncertain):Mark 12:7 shiVunza dup zagwut = lasst uns ihn tgdten! = let us

kill him....Mark 14:42 slitrunza walukshum = lasst uns gehen! = let us

go....Mark 4:35 shil'unza dup haba daushdat = lasst uns hinii'ber-

fahren! = Let us pass over unto the other side.Matt. 26:46 haldum golthun, shriunza w1lukshum = stehet auf,

lasst uns gehen! = Rise, let us be going....Mr. Boas transcribes [[shri'unza as]] sOintse, # 82,# 306. In one place ula-nzaH is used instead of shu'unza (but

with what difference?).Mark 1:38 lInza dup haba gik na.g.az-iou da .g.ulzipzabut = lasst

uns in die ngchsten Stgdte gehen! = Let us go into the next towns....Addendum: wa/tse, mentioned by Mr. Boas in # 82, probably

was composed from the verb stem w5".. (= "arrive) at and the modal

particle za, # 132.15. Interrogative Sentences

A. Simple hiterrogative Sentences

# 307. The word order here is entirely that of declarative

statements. Apart from the possible sentence stress, only modalsuffixes indicate the interrogative. (Compare at this point # 123

[[and]] # 125; with the forms stated in the charts in # 77 [[and]] # 80

bear in mind the pronoun components !)

# 308. The suffix which characterizes the interrogative is T

(Boas: el [[See # 77 and 1889 Boas Report, p. 883. ]]

194

John 9:27 hashak shim alth dum dT disciplesk ga d57. gwashimT?

= wollt ihr, dass ihr auch seine Janger werdet? = will ye also be hisdisciples ?

John 10:34 ligi wha damtk ga na wilalautk ga shim7...

stehet nicht geschrieben in euerm Gesetz... ? = is it not written inyour law... ?

John 11:9 alth ligi wha kapil da eirbelT gwilth hour da gel dashat? = sind nicht 12 Stunden an einem Tage? = Are there not twelvehours in the day?

John 14:9 ada wag.ait haw7nilth ma wilaiyawr, Philip? = and dukennst mich noch nicht, Philippus ? = and you know me not yet,

Philip? [[King James: and yet hast thou not known me, Philip ?]]#309. The suffix -lth, with which, as I pointed out in # 123,

the character of the general, of the indefinite, is always associated,also naturally indicates interrogative sentences. I have previously in

that section [[# 123]] given a sufficient quantity of examples to which Iwill simply make reference here.

B. Alternative Expressions# 310. Alternative expressions are connected by ligi, ligi - --

ligi (= "or, " "eitheror").For example:

Mark 11:30 na baptismsh John, alth watk ga dalth lakyT ligigiat? = Die Taufe des Johannes, war sie vom Himmel oder vonMenschen? = The baptism of John, was it from heaven, or of men?

Mark 12:15 alth dup dum ginam di, za ligi dup dum wha

ginamt? sollen wir ihn geben, oder sollen wir ihn nicht geben? =-Shall we give it or shall we not give it? [[King James shall we give

or shall we not given]Remark: Here, in addition, ligi, # 178, and za, # 132, may be

called to attention.

195

C. Interrogative Adverbs

#311. n'da gun = how?

John 8:33 n'da gun al hou 'un da... ? = wie sprichst du denn...

= how sayest thou then... ? [[King James How sayest thou... ?]]

John 9:15 nIc1a za_gun wila nTazk gut? = wie list du sehend

geworden? = how have you got sight? [[King James Then again the

Pharisees also asked him how he had received his sight. ]1John 14:9 rilda g,_unt hou'unt... ? wie sprichst du? = how do

you say? [[King James: how sayest thou then....]1# 312. gau gun = why? wherefore?

Mark 15:34 gau ma gun qudakshut? = warum hast du michverlassen?= why hast thou forsaken me?

Mark 11:3 gau ma ,gun shim wila-gwa gwa ? warum thut ihr

das ? = Why do ye this?

Mark 12:15 gau ma gun shim shanh7dtit ? = weshalb versuchet

ihr mich? = Why tempt ye me ?John 8:46 gau _gun whagashimhoudiksha shim 7 goi ? warum

glaubt ihr nicht an mich? = why do ye not believe me?John 20:15 hanak, gau gun wThouitk gunt ? = Weib, weshalb

weinst du? = Woman, why weepest thou?# 313. n'da, n' da express the following

a) where?

Luke 8:25 n'dada gu na gashimhoudiksh shimt? wo ist euer

Glaube ? = Where is your faith?Luke 17:17 rild-5: da gt-f kshtamashaul dit? = wo rind die Neune ?

= but where are the nine ?

Matt. 2:2 ndb," da gu kshalaklaga da king da Jewsit? = wo ist der

geborene KOnig der Juden? = where is the king born of the Jews ?

[[King James: Where is he that is born King of the Jews ?]]

196

John 9:12 ada wil houit gish niat, da? = da sprachen sae

zu ihm: wo? = Then said they unto him: Where? [[King James- Then

said they unto him, Where is he ?]]b) from where? from which place? whence?

Here, in addition to n'da, the even more distinct and bettern'da wil wl7tk (singular), n'da wil amy-S: (plural), appears:

Mark 6:2 nrdat wil daw-altk ga da ya57gwa na houdit? = woher

kommt diesem Marine sein Reden? = from where comes this man hisspeech? [[King James: From whence hath this man these things ?]]

Mark 8:4 rildalth dum wila sha Blzaida dalth giada gwai alth anal

azuldau gwa? = woher nehmen wir, um diese Menschen zu sagttigen,

Brod in dieser Wilste? = from whence take we bread in this wildernessto satisfy these men? [[King James: From whence can a man satisfythese men with bread here in the wilderness ?]]

John 19:9 n'da da gu wil viitk gunt ? = woher bist du gekommen"

= from which place have you come? [[King Jame Whence art thou? ]]

Matt. 13:27 n'dalth wil amiyalth lukshgigedum kiauga da?

woher sind denn die Unkrg,uter? = from whence are then the weeds?

[[King James: from whence then hath it tares ?]1c) to which place? whither ?

John 13:36 Miy-In, n'da dumgauyint? Ada dnamak gish Jesusga, Lthgukshk ga ma dum yagut gral7n, a n"da dum gauyrit = Herr,

wohin gehest du? and Jesus antwortete: es ist unmOglich, das s dumir jetzt nachfolgst, wohin ich gehe = Lord, whither goest thou?Jesus answered him, Whither I go, thou canst not follow me now....

John 11:34 nrdalth ltha ma shim wil shgti dia? = wohin habt ihr

ihn gelegt? = whither have you laid him? [[King James: Where have

ye laid him?]]John 16:5 n'da dum g.auyint? = wohin gehst du? = Whither goest

thou?

197

d) when?

Luke 21:7 n'dalth dum da w71 dida g7i.na hou unt ? wann wird

das geschehen, von dem du sprichst? = when will that of which you

speak come to pass ? [[King James: but when shall these things be ?]]

John 6:25 Rabbi, n'da wi la goidukshuniyagwa? = Rabbi, wann

bist du hierher gekommen? = Rabbi, when have you come here?[[King James: Rabbi, when camest thou hither ?]1

Matt. 24:3 malthilth 7 gum, n'dalth dum da w71 nahouunT?

sage uns, wann wird geschehen, wovon du sprichst? = tell us whenthis whereof you speak will happen? [[King James Tell us, when

shall these things be ?]]

# 314. n'dalth shganaklth (shz.a-nak) = how long?

Mark 9:19 n'dalth shganaklth dum hokshk gT a gwashim? wie

lange soil ich bei euch sein? = how long shall I be with you?Mark 9:21 n'dalth sh.g.anaklth da wil dida? -Li wie lange ist das

her ? = How long is it ago...# 315. dumaisha = how much?

Mark 8:5 dumaisha anai dadau did. gwashim? = wie viel Brode

habt ihr bei euch? = how much bread have you with you?

# 316. n'cl7. shzabF = how often? how oft?

Matt. 18:21 n' da." sh_g,.abO dum g_umgaudif da waig77 da hadak ga

dadFgoi? = wie oft muss ich vergeben meinem Bruder, der an mirsundigt = how often must I forgive my brother who wrongs me?

[[King James: how oft shall my brother sin against me, and I forgivehim ?]]

Matt. 23:37 n'dalth sh.gab-Olth n'clum shTgilth sha,gait gouun na

klthgriunt... = wie oft habe ich versammeln wollen dein Kinder... =how often will I have gathered your children... [[King James: howoften would I have gathered thy children together. 0]1?

198

VIII. THE COMPLEX SENTENCE

AND

THE MEANS FOR JOINING THE CLAUSES TOGETHER

Preliminaries# 317. There is not a formal influence of clause upon clause or

the manifestation that certain forms in the clause preceding and inthe clause following influence one another according to certain laws.The logical connection between the clauses finds its expression solelyin introductory relative words and conjunctives. Instead of speakingof the complex sentence, one may also speak of the joining of simple

clauses, and therefore only the auxiliary words which serve to bindclauses together are to be treated in this chapter.

A. Adnominal Clauses

# 318. The reader is directed here to the respective sections on

relative words and on interrogative words.Matt. 604 ada Nagw-idun ga gri t'ingumzin nlizun, dumt in 5:1.6

kshfgunt = und dein Vater, welcher heimlich dich sieht, wird dirOffentlich vergelten = and thy father who sees you secretely will

reward you openly [[King James and thy Father which seeth in secrethimself shall reward thee openly]],

Matt. 7 24 gun tkanish na t'in naktiT na algiagou gwa, adatwalandit, dum shilawilgiant7 da wilg,aushgum y5tat, gu t'in zaba na

vialp dada lak laubit = darum alle, welche hOren diese meine Rede undthun sie, will ich vergleichen mit einem klugen Marine, welcher seinHaus baute auf einen Felsen = Therefore whosoever heareth these

sayings of mine; and doeth them, I will liken him unto a wise man,which built his house upon a rock.

Matt. 908 adat lthaudish ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-a-ga, girt in

ginamsh ga shg.a gutgiat gish ga giat ga = und es lobte Gott, welcher

199

solche Macht den Menschen gegeben hat = and glorified God who [[KingJames which]] had given such power unto men.

John 4g5 ada wilt wash ga grielt ga Lulzabum Samaria ga, gu

wat gulth Sychar = und er kam in eine Stadt Samariens, welche heisst

Sichar = Then cometh he to a city of Samaria, which is calledSy! char.

Luke 22019 gwai na tkamauya gu ginamtk ga did gwashim =

dies ist mein Leib, welcher fur euch dahin gegeben wird = This is mybody which is given for you

Luke 23027 adatlry7gut ga w7wilhelgiat ga dilth han-a".nak ga, gri

ga baugut ga... = es folgten ihm viel Volk nach und Weiber, welcheweinten... = And there followed him a great company of people, andof women, who [[King James which]] also bewailed and lamented him.

B. Adverbial Clauses, Conjunctives

L Indefinite Joining By Means Of ada

[[see # 207]]

# 319. The conjunction "ada" is by far the most common [[and]]

as indefinite as "maka" of the Malayans, "war of the Semites, [[and]]!land then" in the tales of children.

It indicates neither temporal, nor causative or other sequences,but only the stringing together of thoughts

Matt. 9g8 ada lthat nTsht ga wilhelgiat ga, ada lihasht ga, adatlthaudish ga Shimoigiat ga Laka-ga = und das Volk sah es und es

filrchtete sich und lobte Gott (als das Volk... ) = and the people saw it

and were afraid and glorified God [[when the people ..]] [[King JamesBut when the multitudes saw it, they marvelled, and glorified God]].

Matt. 9,25 ada ltha kshauguntk gish ga giat ga, ada wil efintga, adat ga gash ga anont ga; ada wil ginrat gish ga lthgwa hank ga =

(und) als das Volk ausgetrieben war, (und) da ging er hinein, und ergriff sie bei der Hand; (und) da stand das Mg.dchen auf = [[and]] when

200

the people were drawn out, [[and]] then he went in, and he seized herby the hand; [[and]] then the girl stood up. [[King James; But when

the people were put forth, he went in, and took her by the hand, and

the maid arose. 1]

IL Temporal Joining

# 320. dha at the beginning of the main clause awakensexpectation for an unforseen event or accidental encounter and makes

the description livelier.[[see # 207; correction according to # 207, to The Glossary"

(Tsimshian-German), and to footnote 8 of Language Sample IV; dlig.;

see also # 244]]Matt. n20 ada ash ltaIksh.g.agaud ga gwa, dha, alridTga na

angelsh ga MTy-gn ga... = and als er solches im Innern erwog, daerschien der Engel des Herrn... = and when he pondered such thingsto himself, at that time an angel of the Lord appeared... [[KingJames; But while he thought on these things, behold the angel of the

Lord appeared... ]].Matt. 2;19 ada ltha al zaksh Herod, dha alala" ga angelsh ga

MryTn... = als aber Herodes gestorben war, da erschien der Engeldes Herrn... = but when Herod was dead, at that time an angel of theLord appeared... [[King James: But when Herod was dead, behold,an angel of the Lord appeared... ]].

Matt 28g11 wai lthag.adoultht ga, dha, habash ga nagazToush gana lTithkshit ga zulzap ga... = als sie aber hingingen, siehe, dakamen einige von den H&ern in die Stadt... = but when they went,

behold, at that time a few of the guard came into the city... [[KingJames; Now when they were going, behold, some of the watch came

into the city... ]J.Mark 14;3 ada astir dliat gish ga Bethany ga, zum Walpsh Simon

ga leper ga, ashi-dha gish ga wil y-gwuk gut ga, dha, _gpiduk.sh ga

201

gault ga hanak ga = und als er in Bethanien war, in dem Hause Simons,des Aussgtzigen, als er zu Tische sass, da gerade kam ein Weib =and when he was in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, when he

sat at the table, just then a woman came [[King James: and being inBethany in the house of Simon the leper, as he sat at meat, then came

a woman... ]].

Mark 14:43 whahTyash ga houit ga, dha goiduksh gut Jesus ga...

= nicht lange darauf, als er noch redete, da kam Jesus... = not longafterwards when he was still talking, at that time Jesus came...[[King James: And immediately, while he yet spake, cometh Judas]].

Luke 24:36 ada ashT hahouit ga gwa, dha, al sha lip haitk ga

gish ga shpagait ga = und als sie noch davon redeten, da trat er selbstmitten unter sie = and as they still spoke of it, at that time he him-self walked in the midst among them [[King James: And as they thusspake, Jesus himself stood in the midst of them... 1].

Luke 11:37 wai ashT algiakt ga, dha, haitk gish ga gault gaPharisee gish ga = NAThrend er aber noch im Sprechen war, da riefihn ein Pharisger... = but while he still was speaking at that time aPharisee called him... [[King James: And as he spake, a certainPharisee besought him...1].

# 321. ash and the stronger ashT express that which takesplace simultaneously [[see # 207]]:

Matt. 25:10 ada ashT.gadoultht gish ga dumt gTukt ga, dha, algoiduksh ga shanakshit ga = und als sie hingingen, urn zu kaufen, dakam der Bria'utigam = and when they went to buy, at that time the

bridegroom came]].

Matt. 26:47 ada ash!' a'algiakt ga, guksheina ga, .goiduksh

Judas ga = und als er noch redete, siehe, da kam Judas... = and whenhe still spoke, behold, at that time Judas came [[King James: Andwhile he yet spake, lo, Judas one of the twelve came... ]].

202

Matt. 9:27 ada ash-it "idukt gut Jesus ga, adatliyEkut ga

dupkadFlt ga unshum yrita ga... = und wNlarend Jesus von

dannen ging, folgten ihm zwei Blinde nach = and while Jesus went

from that place, two blind men followed him [[King James: And when

Jesus departed thence, two blind men followed him... 1].

Luke 17:14 ada ltha wilt ga, ashihriwaluksht ga, dhashikshakshintk = und es geschah, wahrend sie hingingen, wurden sie

rein = and it came to pass, while they went, they became clean [[King

James: And it came to pass, that, as they went, they were cleansed]].

John 9:1 ada ashr yryat ga, adat nTsh ga gault ga yFta ga... =and wghrend er vortiberging, sah er einen Mann = and while he passed

by, he saw a man [[King James: And as Jesus passed by, he saw a

man... ]].

Mark 1:16 ada astir y-gt gish ga zozash ga akshum Galilee ga,

adat nTsh Simon ga dish Andrew ga... = und w&hrend er lg.ngs des

Galilaischen Meeres hinging, sah er Simon und Andreas... = andwhile he went along the Sea of Galilee, he saw Simon and Andrew.[[King James: Now as he walked by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon

and Andrew... 1].

# 322. ltha signifies that which is completed and lasts or con-

tinues [[see # 282 and # 283]];wil [[signifies]] that which has just made itself manifest [[see

# 282]];

[[and]] dum [[signifies]] that which is subsequent, no matter

whether starting from a present or past point of time, [[and]] con-

ceived of as imminent [[see # 273]].I feel justified only in referring to # 285 in the case of na, since

sufficient [[information]] already is imparted there.[[Note especially # 131 under "Independent Formatives,

Auxiliaries of Time and of Modality" for a discussion of the four

203

formatives collectively; see # 207 for ltha, wil, and dum defined asconjunctions. ]]

[[The]] following examples may serve as illustration:a) examples of ltha and wil:

John 20:22 ada ltha houit ga gwa, ada wilt... = und als erdieses gesagt hatte, da... = and when he had said this, then...[[King James: And when he had so said, he shewed...]]

John 20:2 lthat kshagash da MTy'gn ga... = sie habenherausgenommen den Herrn... = They have removed the Lord [[KingJames: They have taken away the Lord]].

John 7:10 ada lthat bakhapt ga waikiat ga wil lualgiat ga, ada= und als seine Brilder zu dem Feste hinaufgegangen waren,

da... = and when his brothers had gone up to the festival, then...[[King James: But when his brethren were gone up, then.. ]].

John 8:9 ada lthat nakriFit ga, ada = als sie aber eshOrten, da... = But when they heard it, then... [[King James: Andthey which heard it, being convicted... ]1.

John 14:29 dum wil gashimhoudiksha shim, da zidg ltha wait =auf dass ihr glaubet, wenn es geschehen ist = so that you believe whenit has come to pass. [[King James: when it is come to pass, ye mightbelieve. ]]

Luke 4:42 ada ltha zi.irshta ga, ada = als es aber Taggeworden, da... = but when it became day, then... [[King James:And when it was day, he departed... 1].

Luke 17:15 ada ltha nrsht ga gault ga ltha dimautkshit ga = undals er sah einen, der gesund geworden war = and when he saw one

who had become healed [[King James: And one of them, when he saw

that he was healed... 1].Luke 7:4 ada lthagutgoiduksht gish Jesus, ada und als

sie zu Jesu kamen, da... = and when they came to Jesus, then...

204

[[King James: And when they came to Jesus, they besought him... ]1.Luke 7:1 lthat shadalfish ga tkgnish ga nahouit gish ga zum

.g.a,zumUsh ga giat ga ada wilt zTint gish ga Capernaum ga = nachdem er

alles ausgeredet hatte vor den Ohren der Menschen, da ging er

hinein nach Capernaum = after he had finished speaking before theears of the people, then he went into Capernaum. [[King James: Now

when he had ended all his sayings in the audience of the people, heentered into Capernaum. 1]

(Note the difference between ltha and wil in the last twoexamples !)

Luke 2:4 ada wil di doulthsh Joseph ga... = da machte sichauch auf Joseph... = then Joseph also went up from... [[King James:And Joseph also went up from... 1].

Luke 2:7 ada wilt da,gpiduksh ga... = und sie gebar... = andshe brought forth....

Luke 2:40 ada wil bash ga lthquaumlthk gaga und es wuchs dasKind = and the child grew....

Mark 15:33 ada wil shgFutk = da trat die Finsternis ein = thendarkness entered [[King James: there was darkness... ]1.

Mark 15:36 ada wil bash ga gault ga = da lief Einer = then oneran [[King James: And one ran... ]].

b) examples of dum:Luke 17:6 ada n'dumt waran shimt = und er wird euch gehorsam

sein = and it will be obedient to you. [[King James and it shouldobey you. ]1

Mark 14:28 dum ksh.g.au.ganu da gwashim a Galilee = ich werde

vor euch hingehen in Galilga = I will go before you into Galilee.

John 8:21 ada dum drishim = und ihr werdet sterben = and you

will die [[King James: I go my way, and ye shall seek me, and shalldie in your sins... ]1.

205

John 3:30 dum,g.up tkuliy7 ga, ada al dum shay-Syut = in

Zukunft muss er wachsen und ich aber werde abnehmen = In the

future he must increase, and I will decrease [[King James: He mustincrease, but I must decrease]].

# 323. zida appears in subordinate clauses whenever the futureor a future expression is used in the main clause. zida gives notice

that the action of the subordinate clause took place or is taking place

prior to or along with the beginning of the action in the main clause.

[[see # 207]]

Luke 12:11 ada zida lthat dahaba shima synagoguesit... gilauza akabagushk ga shim = wenn sie euch aber fahren werden in ihre

Schulen, ... so sorget nicht (Man vergleiche im Lateinischen cum,

ubi primum -) = and when they will bring you to the synagogues...then don's worry [[compare in Latin cum, ubi---primum---. 1] [[King

James: And when they bring you into the synagogues... take ye nothought... ]].

Luke 12:37 g_umgault walsh ga tkulhilkw;ulimlthk gaga, CI zida

ltha goiduksh ga mi7ya-n ga, ada dumt wash ga wil ilrlthkshit ga = selig

sind die Knechte, die der Herr, wenn er kommt, wachend finden wird= Blessed are those servants, whom the lord, when he cometh shallfind watching.

Mark 10:34 ada zida ltha gwun sha dit, ada dum gik giniatk gutga = und wenn der dritte Tag da ist, wird er wieder auferstehen = andwhen the third day is here, he will rise again [[King James: and thethird day he shall rise again]].

Matt. 13:49 ninT dum w-a-1 da da: zida ltha shaba harizoka = also

wird es sein, wenn das Ende der Welt da ist = so shall it be, whenthe end of the world is here. [[King James: So shall it be at the endof the world. ]]

206

# 324. hi, previously mentioned [[in]] # 115 [[and # 207]],

designates simultaneous action or action which follows immediately

(soon, as soon as):Mark 9:15 ada shim hit nTsht ga wilhelgiat ga, ada shalidukshk

gut ga = und sobald als das Volk ihn sah, da entsetzten sie sich = and

as soon as the people saw him, then they were amazed [[King James:

And straightway all the people, when they beheld him were greatly

amazed...1].John 11:20 adat hit naknFit gut Martha ga, ltha dumzpiduksh

Jesus ga, ada doultht gish gut ridaltk gut ga = und sobald Martha eshOrte, dass Jesus kommt, geht sie ihm entgegen = and as soon asMartha heard that Jesus was coming, she went toward him [[KingJames: Then Martha, as soon as she heard that Jesus was coming,

went and met him... ]].

# 325. hig.auk = before, previously (hi -g.auk) [[see # 324,

# 197]]:

John 10:40 ada wilt gik zaush ga nadau gish ga Jordan ga,

wil baptizet gut John ga giat ga hTgauk ga = und er zog wieder hin

jenseit des Jordan an den Ort, wo Johannes getauft hatte die Menschen

vorher = and he went again across the Jordan to the place where Johnhad previously baptized the people [[King James: And went away againbeyond Jordan into the place where John at first baptized]].

John 16:4 ada althga na houT a gwai a gwashim alth hikauk = und

nicht habe ich euch solches gesagt vorher = and I have not said suchthings to you before [[King James: And these things I have said not

unto you at the beginning]].

# 326. gilwil = before, previously:John 1:30 Loiduksha gaul da da giada da tkulg:nri gu yag.ai gilwil

kshzauga dida. goi = es kommt ein Mensch nach mir, welcher abervor mir da war = a man cometh after me who was there before me

207

[[King James: After me cometh a man which is preferred beforeme]].

John 20:4 adat gilwil bat da gaul da disciple dat Peter ga = undzuvor lief der andere Jager (schneller als) dem Petrus = and theother disciple ran before [[faster than]] Peter [[King James: and theother disciple did outrun Peter]].

# 327. "after" [[ nachdem]] is the introductory clause [[subordi-nate]] can be expressed through the joining of ltha plus zpudi (# 283):

Mark 15:20 ada ltha zpudrsh gut haiy-Furt da, adat shadoz.ash ga

gwishgwashk gut gish nTat = und nachdem sie ihn verspottet hatten,

zogen sie ihm den Purpur aus = after they had mocked him, they tookthe purple off him [[King James: And when they had mocked him, they

took off the purple from him]].# 328. In addition, shLabo (compare # 284) appears with

perfective meaning:

Mark 6:44 ada sh.g.ab-O-sh ga na t'in gapsh ga... = und die geges-

sen hatten... = who had eaten [[King James: And they that did eat]].Mark 2:4 ada ltha lthgukshk gish ga dumt gwun dag.audit gish ga

aw-it ga ash ga sh.gabUsh ga giat ga... = und als es unmOglich war,

ihn zu ihm hinzubringen bei der Ueberft!ille des Volkes = and when it

was impossible for him to draw near to him with the crowd of people[[King James: And when they could not come nigh unto him for thepress]].

Note: lugwil also may indicate completion; compare # 136.

# 329. nitkula-nt, n'tkulgn gwa = thereafter [[with past]], from

now on [[hereafter with present]], (in enumeration) finally:

John 3:22 n'tkulan gwa, ada wilgoiduksh Jesus ga dTlth nadisciples gut gish ga lakyZibum Judea ga = darnach kamen Jesus und

seine Anger in das jadische Land = thereafter Jesus and his disciplescame to the land of the Jews [[King James: After these things came

208

Jesus and his disciples into the land of Judaea]].Matt. 25:11 n'tkulant ga ada wil digutgoiduksh ga na,g.az-ioush ga

whaz,ulgiatgum hananak ga = zuletzt kamen auch die anderen Jung-

frauen (Aufzghlung) = finally the other virgins came also [[enumera-

tion]] [[King James: Afterward came also the other virgins]].# 330. "from that time on" or (more emphatically) "from this

moment on" = wil w7..tk... or nTriTsh ga wil w"aTtk...

Matt. 4:17 ninTsh ga wil w3.tk gish ga gwilthm-alshk gish Jesus

ga = von dieser Zeit predigte Jesus umher = from that time Jesuspreached all around [[King James: From that time Jesus began topreach]].

Matt. 16:21 ada wil Watk gish gat gwunrazunt gish ga disciples

gut ga... = von der Zeit an zeigte er seinen JUngern... = from thattime on Jesus showed to his disciples... [[King James: From thattime forth began Jesus to shew unto his disciples.... 1].

Matt. 26:16 ada wil wItk gish ga dumt = and von der

Zeit an suchte er... = from that time on he sought... [[King James:From that time he sought... ]].

# 331. "from now on" (Matt. 23:29) watk ga dada-. graFn; ( "from

now on ": compare # 135) [[see also # 158]]:[[Matt. 23:39 Awil houyia. da gwashim, Wak ga dada. 016-n,

althga ma dum shim gik nTzT, wazait dum wil hou shim, Gumgaulth

w-alsh ga g-ugoidukshit gish ga na wash ga Mry7n ga. = Denn ich sage

euch: Ihr werdet, mich von jetzt an nicht sehen, bis ihr sprecht:Gelobt sei, der da kommt im Namen des Herrn! = For I say unto you,

Ye shall not see me henceforth, till ye shall say, Blessed is he thatcometh in the name of the Lord. ]]

# 332. am shzanak (sligunak) = after a little while, after ashort while, a short time afterward:

209

Mark 14:70 am shganakt ga, ada gik housh ga gwunmakshk gutgish Peter = nach einer kleinen Wei le sprachen abermals zu Petrus,die dabei standen = a short time afterward, those standing close byspoke again to Peter [[King James: And a little while after, they thatstood by said again to Peter]].

Matt. 26:39 ada wil am shgunaksh ga wil ya-t ga... = und einekleine Wei le ging er... = and he went a short while... [[King James:And he went a little farther... ]].

Mark 1:19 ada ltha am shganaksh ga wait ga adat nTsh Jamesga... = und nach einer kleinen Wei le kam er und sah Jacobus = andafter a short while he came and saw James [[King James: And whenhe had gone a little while farther thence, he saw James]].

Mark 2:1 ada ltha gik zrnt gish ga Capernaum ga ada ltha am

shganakt ga = und wieder ging er hinein nach Capernaum nach einer

kleinen Wei le = and after a little while he again went into Capernaum

[[King James: And again he entered into Capernaum after some

days]].

# 333. wagait dum (wil) = until [[see # 207]]:

Luke 19:13 nahriwaTIat shimit wagait dum wil gpidukshrit =

handelt, bis dass ich wiederkomme = act until I come again [[KingJames: Occupy till I come]].

Matt. 2439 ada althgat wilait wagait wil goiduksh ga gTtk gishga aksh ga = und sie wussten es nicht, bis die Sintfluth kam = and theyknew it not until the flood came.

# 334. ltha nak (ga) = after a long time, for a long time(compare # 314):

Matt. 25:19 ltha nakt ga ada wil goiduksh ga MryFrish ga

tkulhilkwaulimlthk gaga... = nach langer Zeit, da kam der Herr derKnechte... = After a long time the lord of those servants cometh.

210

John 5:6 lthat nrsht gut Jesus ga wil shg'aut ga, adat wilaish galtha naksh ga da wilt ga... = als Jesus ihn liegen sah und vernahm,dass es schon lange der Fall ware... = when Jesus saw him lie andunderstood that he for a long time the case had [[King James: WhenJesus saw him lie, and knew that he had been now a long time in thatcase... ]].

# 335. hawalthk = not yet, before [[see # 207, # 266]]:John 13:38 shimhou, shimhou, houyil da-gwan, hawalthk ga za

algiaklth zouz, ada gwili ma dum ksh-gnzout = wahrlich, wahrlich, ich

sage dir, ehe der Hahn krght, wirst du mich dreimal verrathen =Truly, truly I say unto you, before the cock crows, you will betrayme three times [[King James: Verily, verily, I say unto thee, Thecock shall not crow, till thou hast denied me thrice]].

Luke 2:21 ada ltha liihoigiaksh ga yrikla a sh-5, dit ga dum dat

circumciseish ga lthquaumlthk gaga, adat Jesus gut shuwgdit ga,n'lthat sh-awrdit ga angel gish ga hawalthk ga shid-atk ga dash ga zum

nashei lumlth gaga = und als acht Tage vergangen waren, dass dasKind beschnitten wurde, da erhielt es den Namen Jesus, genannt vondem Engel, bevor es im Mutterleibe empfangen wurde = and when

eight days were accomplished for the circumcising of the child, hisname was called JESUS, which was so named of the angel before hewas conceived in the womb.

# 336. [[This word]] hawe-nilth, hawe-nith, is related in soundand meaning to hawalthk [[see # 207, # 267]]:

Mark 8:17 wagait haw-71171th ma shim wilai dT. ? = vernehmetihr noch nichts... ? = perceive ye not yet..

John 4:49 Mry-in, yagai goidukshin haw-enith zaga ltheilthk giT =

Herr, komme herab, ehe mein Kind stirbt = Sir, come down beforemy child dies [[King James: Sir, come down ere my child die. ]]

211

III. Reason, Purpose# 337. The final clause in sentences of reason and purpose is

introduced by gun [[see # 207]]:

Mark 4:37 ... adat oit ga .gaup ga agw7kshau ga, gun ltha shaholtk gut ga = ...und er (der grosse Windwirbel) warf die Wel len indas Schiff, also dass es volt wurde = ... and it [[the large whirlwind]]

threw the waves into the ship, so that it became full.. [[King James:

And there arose a great storm of wind, and the waves beat into theship, so that it was now full. ]]

Mark 15:5 ada gik wagait althga dTlamak gish Jesus; gun shimtlirshg.nalthk gut Pilate ga = und Jesus antwortete nichts welter, also

dass sich Pilatus sehr verwunderte = But Jesus yet answered nothing;so that Pilate marvelled.

John 6:6 dumt shpaltg.aud ga gun houit ga gwa = um ihn zu

versuchen, deshalb sagte er dieses (weil er ihn versuchen wollte... )= to test him, therefore he said this [[because he wanted to testhim... ]] [[King James: And this he said to prove to him... 1].

John 8;45 ada wil houyu da shimhou dit, gun althga shimhoudik-

shim 7. goi = und ich sage die Wahrheit, deshalb glaubt ihr mir nicht(weil ich... ) = and I tell you the truth, consequently you don't believeme [[because I... ]] [[King James: And because I tell you the truth yebelieve me not]].

John 13:29 17.wil nagazTout ga haligagaudit, gish ga wilt Judas

gut in habaulshk ga gw.gulth ga, gun housh Jesus gish niat... = denneinige meinten, weil Judas den Beutel bei sich trug, deshalb spracheJesus zu ihm... = For a few thought because Pilate had the bag, forthat reason Jesus had spoken to him... [[King James; For some ofthem thought because Judas had the bag, that Jesus had said untohim]].

212

Matt. 13:2 ada shagait y7sh ga wi wilhelgiat gish ga awat ga,guna mok gut gish ga zum agwThshau ga... = and zusammen stro"mteviel Volk hin zu ihm, also dass er in ein Schiff trat... (weil...deshalb) = and together many people flocked to him, so that he entereda ship... [[because... for that reason]] [[King James: and greatmultitudes were gathered together unto him, so that he went into aship... ]].

Matt. 8:28 11:15.1tk gut ga dupkad751t ga lialthaultk gish ga hadak

gut ga halik... , shimgul shikshtfel ga, Lun althgat na. tin y gish gagaina ga = es kamen ihm entgegen zwei von bOsen Geistern

Besessene..., sehr grimmig, also dass Niemand auf der Strasse ging= there came toward him two possessed with evil spirits... veryfierce, so that no one went in the street [[King James: there met himtwo possessed with devils, coming out of the tombs, exceeding fierce,

so that no man might pass by that way]].

# 338. nini gun and nini gwai .gun are more emphatic [[than

gun]] (compare nini # 57, # 58):

John 8:47 nini gwai ma gun shim wha naknTO dit, awil althga

amya shim ash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakaga = darum hOret ihr nicht, dennihr seid nicht von Gott = ye therefore hear them not because ye arenot of God.

John 15:19 al wil yag,ai althga halizo.galth nhawi:1 da gwashim,

nan am kshanaknr shim da halizogut, nTrift g.un libaluksha shim

halizogut = aber ihr seid nicht von der Welt, sondern ich habe euchvon der Welt erwahlet, darum hasst euch die Welt (well... ) = But you

are not of the world, but I have chosen you from the world, for thatreason the world hates you [[because...]] [[King James: but becauseye are not of the world, but I have chosen you out of the world, there-fore the world hateth you]].

213

John 19:11 althga n'dum shgriilth gutgiacrg, gwan "a- ma dum

libiltw7ltk girt, ami n'za wha ginamtk ga crg, gwan watk gut gish ga

lak-gga: ninTzun yagai gawirgksha hadak ga dazaudir da gwan = du

wurdest nicht Macht haben, gegen mich zu handeln, wenn dir sienicht gegeben ware vom Himmel; deshalb aber hat der grOssereSlide, der mich dir Uberantwortet hat = you would not have power to

act against me if you were not given from heaven; for that reason hewho has delivered me has the greater sin [[King James: Thou

couldest have no power at all against me, except it were given theefrom above: therefore he that delivered me unto thee hath the greatersin]].

Mark 6:14 ltha gik ginTatk gish John Baptist da shpag.ait

ada = es ist wieder auferstanden Johannes der Tgufer ausder Mitte der Todten, and darum... (weil... ) = John the Baptist hasrisen from the midst of the dead and therefore... [[because...]][[King James; That John the Baptist was risen from the dead, andtherefore mighty works do... 1].

# 339. awil = for [[because]] [[see # 207]]:

Mark 13:7 awil dum zup wa1 di7ya gwa = denn es muss also

geschehen = for it must thus take place [[King James: for such thingsmust needs be]].

Mark 13:11 "gwil althgat nrishimlth alalgiagut, yagai Amt ga

Haik ga = denn nicht ihr seid es, die da reden, sondern der heiligeGeist ist es = for it is not ye that speak, but the Holy Ghost.

John 6:55 17wil shimhoum wune-ya na shameyrit = denn die rechte

Speise ist mein Fleisch = for my flesh is the real nourishment [[KingJames: For my flesh is meat indeed]].

# 340. dum = so that, in order to, in order that [[see # 207,

# 322E;

dum wha = so that... not, in order that... not [[see # 207]]:

214

John 6:29 gwai na halthalshash ga Shimoigiat ga Lakg.ga,. dum

shimhoudiksha shim dish prat gri na haizit ga = das ist das Werk

Gottes, dass ihr glaubet an den, den er gesandt hat = This is the workof God, that ye believe on him whom he hath sent.

John 6:31 na ginamt ga anai ga watk gut gish ga lakes gish

dupniat ash ga dumt gapt ga = er gab Brod vom Himmel ihnen, umdavon zu essen = he gave them bread from heaven in order to eat of it[[King James: He gave them bread from heaven to eat]].

John 14:13 nTnT dum walut, dum wil lthautk gish ga Nagw7t gish

ga Ltheilthk gaga = dieses will ich thun, auf dass der Vater geehretwerde in dem Sohne = This I want to do, so that the father be honoredin the son [[King James: that will I do, that the Father may be glori-fied in the son]].

John 16:1 gwai gau ltha houya da gwashim, dum wil wha

lthimLush_gpsh shimt = solches habe ich zu euch geredet, damit ihr

euch nicht grgert = Such things have I said to you so that you not be

provoked [[King James: These things have I spoken unto you, that yeshould no be offended]].

# 341. op za = in order that... not [[and]] seems to indicatethat something fearful should be prevented [[see # 207, # 269]]:

Luke 4 :10, 11 awil damtk ga dit, Dum haizumg.ut ga angels gut

ga wila want, a dumt habauldint ada zurrizalanon da dumt wil gwilthmandukiagwunt, op za lip gwandumukshlth shTun alth ligi laup = denn

es stehet geschrieben: er wird befehlen seinen Engeln von dir, dasssie dich bewahren and auf den Handen tragen, auf dass du nicht etwa

deinen Fuss an einen Stein stosset = for it is written: he will com-mand his angels to keep you and to bear you in their hands in order

that you not by chance strike your foot against a stone [[King James:Luke 4:10 For it is written, He shall give his angels charge overthee, to keep thee:

215

Luke 4:11 And in their hands they shall bear thee up, lest atany time thou dash thy foot against a stone]].

Luke 5:37 ada althgat nest in ltigushzuzilth shu wine alth zum

lthg,z.uldum wine op zit* ghaklthrawun dalth shif winelth wilu

gingiant... = und Niemand fasset jungen (neuen) Wein in alte Wein-behglter, auf dass nicht der gunge Wein die alten Schl'Auche

zerreisst... = and no one puts young [[new]] wine in old containers,in order that the young wine not rupture the old leather bottles...[[King James: And no man putteth new wine into old bottles; else thenew wine will burst the bottles... 1].

IV. Condition

# 342. amT expresses the real condition [[as opposed to theunreal]] [[see # 207]]:

John 15:6 amT ligit na- wha liihokshk ga dida goi, shamakshit

nTw-a71da anTshit, ada dhudridit = wenn Jemand nicht in mir bleibet, der

wird weggeworfen wie eine Rebe und verdorret = if anyone does notabide in me, he is cast away like a vine and withers [[King James: Ifa man abide not in me, he is cast forth as a branch and is withered]].

Mark 11:31 arnr dum houm lake wil w'S.tk ga dit; ada dum hou

dit... = wenn wir sagen werden, sie (die Macht) ist vom Himmel, sowird er sagen... = if we will say, it [[the authority]] is from heaven,then he will say [[King James: If we shall say, From heaven; he willsay]].

Matt. 8:31 amTlth ma kshaliFunum, hashhaizuma za dup zilum

haba wilshazaitdFltha gwashaut = wenn du uns austreiben willst, so

schicke uns, hineinzugehen in die Heerde Sue = if you will drive us

out, then send us into the herd of swine [[King James: If thou castus out, suffer us to go away into the herd of swine]].

op zit appears to be only a phonetic variation of op zat.

216

# 343. Through [[the]] addition of tlfiza" to "amr, 70 the condition

is expressed as indefinite and consequently put into the ideal sphere(unreal and potential condition) [[see # 207th

John 839 amT na za kithgiT.sh Abraham -a" gwashim, na dum

halthal da shim na halthalshash Abraham = wenn ihr die Kinder

Abrahams wg*ret, so wtIrdet ihr thun die Werke Abrahams = if you

were Abraham's children, then you would do Abraham's works [[King

James If ye were Abraham's children, ye would do the works ofAbraham]].

John 8042 amr na za nagw7.t shim ash ga Shimoigiat ga Lak-gga,

na ma dum shim shTebuniit = wenn euer Vater Gott ware, so wiirdetihr mich lieb haben = if your father were God, then you would love me

[[King James If God were your Father, ye would love me]].Mark 1240 amT ma za anaukt, da'aklthkgun ma dum shakshanil

= wenn du willst, so kannst du mich wohl reinigen = if you want, then

you can cleanse me [[King Jamesg If thou wilt, thou canst make me

clean]].

Matt. 2704O amiza Lthg7lthk gish ga Shimoigiat ga Lak"Ega gwan,

tikiy3:n a lak guz-Szut = wenn du Gottes Sohn bist, so steige herab vom

Kreuz = if you are the son of God, then climb down from the cross

[[King James if thou be the Son of God, come down from the cross]],

# 344, gin indicates that the opposite of the factual isassumed (compare # 135) [[see # 207]]0

Matt. 6g1 ama nidum wha wwlshim da na ama halthalsh shimthazazaklthk ga giadit, dumt am wilt nTsh ditg ain gin zat ksht-a'un shim

ga Nagw7t shim ga zum lak-aga = hiitet euch, dass ihr nicht Almosen

gebet vor den Leuten, so dass sie es gut seheng nicht hgttet ihr (indiesem Falle, angenommen, ihr thgtet es... ) Lohn bei euerm Vaterim Himmel = take care that you do not give alms in front of the people,

so they see itg you would not have [[in this case assumed you would do

217

it]] reward of your Father in heaven. [[King Jame Take heed thatye do not your alms before men, to be seen of them.. otherwise ye

have no reward of your Father which is in heaven]].

Mark 1L19 amiza zaklth waikia giadit, ada za al gina dido-lshanakshdit. dumt ga da walk da naksh dit = wenn der Bruder einesMenschen sterben und aber sein Weib leben solite , so soil derBruder nehmen sein Weib = if the brother of a man die and his wifeshould live.. then the brother shall take his wife [[King James If

a man's brother die, and leave his wife behind him, and leave no

children, that his brother should take his wife]].# 345. To note briefly here, dependent conditional clauses,

also, by preference appear formulated as relative clauses.Matt 5g31 ligit na dumt in shamaga naksh dit, am dumt ginam

sh75-rishgum bashuk ga dash nTat = wenn Jemand sich von seinemWeibe scheidet so soil er geben ihr einen Scheidebrief = if someoneseparates himself from his wife, then he shall give her a letter ofseparation [[King James Whosoever shall put away his wife, let himgive her a writing of divorcement]].

Matt. 10° 14 ada ligit na t'in wha anauk shim, shadod7 gaumda g.ashashr shimt = und wenn Jemand nicht aufnimmt euch, ... soschi.ittelt den Staub von euren Filssen = and if anyone does not receiveyou, ...then shake the dust from your feet [[King James? And whoso-ever shall not receive you, . shake off the dust of your feet]],

Luke 9A8 ligit tia7dumt in anauga lthquaumlthk ga gwa zurnwayut nayir anauga dit; adat ligit na dumt in anaugout, = wenn

Jemand di.eses Kind aufnehmen wird in meinem Namen, so nimmt ermich auf und wenn Jemand wird mich aufnehmen = if someone willreceive this child in my name, then he receives me also, and ifsomeone will receive me... [[King James Whosoever shall receive

218

this child in my name receiveth me; and whosoever shall receiveme... ]].

V. Concessive

# 346. z7, zh7 (= although, even if, even though) is the soleconjunctive occurring in the concessive introductory clause. The

final clause has no corresponding particle. [[like German so orEnglish then If anyone... , then he.... ]] [[# 207]]

Mark 1618 ...ada z7dumt aksha hadazum gaut, ada althgadum ligit hanwirggwut = und wenn sie auch etwas Schlechtes trinken

sollten, so wt;.rde es ihnen doch nicht schaden = and even if they

should drink something bad, then it would not harm them [[KingJameso and if they drink any deadly thing, it shall not hurt them]].

Matt. 26g60 ada althgat W5t, zo withe-1 ga .g.abigum mag.aunshk

gut ga Lutzpidukshit ga = und sie fanden keins, wiewohl viele falsche

Zeugen herzutraten = and they found none, although many false wit-

nesses came [[King James But found none yea, though many falsewitnesses came, yet found they none]].

Matt. 1313 awil zho nakriTizk ga dit, ada althgat nTsht; ada zhonaknOksh dit ada althgat nakrroit = denn obwohl sie sehen konnen, so

sehen sie doch nicht, und obwohl sie hOren kOnnen, so hOren sie doch

nicht = for although they can see, then they do not see, and althoughthey can hear, then they do not hear [[King Jameso because they see-ing see not; and hearing they hear not]].

John 4e2 althga dit lip baptize a dit Jesus, amuksha nadisciples gut ga obgleich Jesus nicht selbst taufte, sondernseine Anger = ... although Jesus himself baptised not, but his dis-ciples.

219

Appendix

Language Samples

220

Since an ample number of examples from the Gospel translationshave already been given in the preceding grammar, I would like toinclude here now the samples of text which were sent to me for my

use by Mr. Boas. (Language Samples I-IV). --- To this, I will add afew portions from the Common Prayer (Language Sample V). The

latter follow the transcription of the Gospel translations while theBoas material deviates in many respects.

Wulaqt1Vtk (where a misfortune happenedby a landslide), Inverness*.

Tla ga T s'Emsiainga amia/t gasga

Having left the Tsimshian come from they from the

KsiVnga nu wul asEhVntga. Ada wul g'a

Skinar (past) where they make salmon. And then for a while

lat gasga gyVatsga; ada Em han-a-/aqsa

they camp at there; and the child woman

g'altga sEmIg/gyitga, gE/ga sEmlEgyidahVwutga.

of a certain chief, which very he was particular whomshe should marry.

Tla hVopEtga dak''aimdsen kq/EdEksga gVltga a/m(Perfect) night secretly comes a certain nice

a sFpals Em' iVotga. Adat k4Asga wul nVgasga tlgu7,/lksga.

young man. And he goes where lies the chief'sdaughter.

Compare the phonetic explanations placed at the beginning of"The Glossary" with these language samples (from Boas). a

221

Ada figlut gasga dEmt* de batga Adat enVoatga.And he says (?) with run him. And she consents.

(elope with him).

Adawul kad-al/wutltga. Tlat wasga nawa:Iptga,

And then they left. (Perfect) they having reached his house,

adawult tqal ha/yint gasga gye/laciga, adaEland then he against makes her stand at outside, but

,tssVentga, ada dEp na'otga dTs nuguVt:

he enters, and say (plural) his mother and his father:

"Ayentl nak'anuwa/n-e", nat?" "F151/yetga da

"Did not you (past) make work you my dear's? 'She stands at(go for her sake),

gya'larat, CS/yaga. Adawul ks'a otlga tlemktT yetkgatga.

outside here, " he replies. Then out run his sisters.

Adawult tssE/lEm ctOloltga. Adawul tqYoqgatga

And then into she accompanies them. And then they eat

asga 16-m5/msga Kantlg/kga. Adawul

being in good hearts. It is morning. Then

ki:VEdEksga tlgua wudsagyaltga, KsEmwutssZ=7/enga wa/atga.come s a little old person, Female Mouse her name.

Ada ha. ut ga-L "Tqevel giantsem7Vnt!" ada wa'lsgaAnd she says "Burn your earring here!" and she does so

See # 340.

222

tIguI'lksga; adaElwult asti daqtga tlgua

the chiefs daughter; but then she from fire she takes it the little

wud'Algyatga. Adawul hVutgag "DItl! WureyeriZ, g75

old person. Then she saysg "My dear! do you know, who

tEi/ngVdEnt ?I' "Ayent, " dVyaga. "HatsaerEldEt, "the taker of you here?" "No, " she replies. "The snail, "

dO/yaga. Ada sEm- ba'sga tlguOilksga. Ada

she answered. And very afraid the chief's daughter. And

lia/usga KsEmwuts°Elengag "Ndaiel gy'F'eqkEn! atigE waraida

it said the female mouse: "Go! run away! not far

otl, wul dsoqs dEp nEgug/dEn. Da ya kEn

run, where stay (plural) your parents. Just walk on road

sti/op'El atlgE nEsa/ba na liya4gEsEmt yaga.

back of house

Ye/tlEt.

not visible (past) you went (plural) downward.

NenVet1 13 y-O/kEn baq .as, sqan-j/esit

There is slime. The same in go on road up go mountain that

ada mE y'Vg e t ! ITen71 wul ds/oqs dEp

and you over go! It is where stay on beach (plural)

nEgu-a"IldEn gyE/egEt. Adawul wI/lesga tlgua'lksga.

parents below. " And then she does the chief's daughter.

Sis rim ksErgagal. AdaElwu/1 batga.

She pretends after a while to go out But she runs.

223

SEm- to yaltgatga na matldEsga tlgua wudVgyatga.Exactly in she goes (past) she told the little old person,

Tlana/ksga waldga, adawull gua/desga na'kstga.Having some time done so, then he misses her her husband.

Adat wul wuralisga gy'Veqgatga. Adawult saga /itAnd he then knows she had escaped. And then together

hukh-Votkgasga tqanVesga nE wT ts'alptga. Adawul

he called them all his great tribe. Then

rcilia/gEtga. Tla sEmt wItga

they pursue her. (Perfect) exactly she reaches

tlgua'lksga sEm laq'oisga s qane/isga, da

the chief's daughter the very top of the mountain, just

nEgnaletga wi qstVmEgga. Adawult eilusga ts'Etshe hears great noise. And then she guesses they they

lOyalyet. Adawu"la tgye bat gasga sqan-e/isga.

pursue her. And then down she runs from the mountain.

AdaEl tralwula liaiusga VI" qstairnEciga; ada gyilEksBut always sounds great noise; and back

nevet s gEt ga: rakstanVga ! tla yikaya/sga wT

she looks: behold! (perfect) down comes great

tlaloga; kanka/nga liElnatga a.da wu/d lEplVopga

landslide; trees fall and great rocks

gyikgya/gEltgatga. Adawu/1 ayawa/sga hanalaqga; tlat

roll down.

2 24

Then screamed the woman; (perfect) she

ne-/ets ga wul dsoqs dEp nEgua/dga, asgEt gun

sees where stay (plural) her parents, she ordering

13k6 Em; gag,"5/5ditgasga ts 'Em gaqs'a..VogE.

to go into canoe; they finish (have gone) into the canoes.

Adawul di gun a/qtlgatga. Adawul 131k6em

And then also towards (into) she succeeds. Then go into

aphalyetget gasga qsialos

turns round at the canoe

nEguaftga. Matgaga, adaEl

of her father. She is safe, but

wul wi tIVosga nE wul dso/qtga. Ada

where great lands lide (past)st) whe re they had been. And

gyilgs

back

nEknVetsgatga,

they look,

rakstana/ga !

behold!

wi hgfld Em hats' aE/rEltgagreat many snails

leanuwa/ltga. A dawu matltga tlguallksga wula

make happen it. And then she tells the chief's daughter why

wg!ltga. Ada n'elnEtga da Wulaqtl'ilotga wulawa/ldet.

it happened. And it is at Inverness where it happened.

Kanuw-aide

It makes name

da wul- q -t t-k-at.at where landslide-misfortune happening.

225

PRAYER 1.

Neqno/q, Neqno/q; sEm'Vyits, sEmlfyits ! ramrVdEn!

Necinoq, Neqnoq; chief, chief! have mercy!

tgye- ne--/e wal tlErE/nt nts'iiipEnt.* Man salikya

downward look doing under you thy people. Up pull

sVE nt ada ma ts'-int!

thy foot, and off sweep thy face!

PRAYER 2.

Neqno/q, Neqno/q; sErn'glyits, sEm'Vyits ! ramrg/dEn!

Neqnoq, Neqnoq; chief, chief! have mercy!

a yen tEE/n qsEpei-61 nEksEn tlE/rEnt!

else nobody the one to make you receive smoke under you!

Neqnoiq! ramra/dEn!Neqnoq! have mercy!

PRAYER 3.

Lo sVikya na k.sEn-a.itlgEnt, sErri'Vyit! dEm wul

Into draw thy breath, chief! (future) that

gya/kset!

it be calm!

Instead of n ts'apEnt, I hear alsonEsEgyatEnt = your people made by you.

[[italicized in Schulenburgr s Grammar]].

226

Before dinner the Tsimshian burn some food as an offering forNeqnoq. After having done so they pray

Wa, sEm!Vyits! dEm abEn guaa qpiy7 gaibEnme:E.

There, chief! (future) you eat this part of our food.

Tawa man da gua'a; tawavl Man da gua'a

That is all left at here; that is all left at here

tlguan7e.

to your child.

G yr/EnEm !

Give us food!

Satirical Song, Mocking the Inhabitants of MEqtlakqatla

Emigrating with Mr. Duncan to Alasca.

1. Oyeya, 3yeya, a.Oyeya, ayeya, ae

Gyil'afdsE wigya'tgEn.

Do not (future) be you homesick.

AtsEda lalyegEn, tsEda suwYdEn.

When you will leave, when will be you a Tongas woman.

2. Oyeya, "Oyeya, a.

Oyeya, oyeya, a.

ME tsE warn ya wus diYou will only send a present also

Atl gEn-e-Iguatl ndE sineksg,!k.

Of preserved berries kept in grease bay (sea -lion .guts)

227A3. Oyeya, Fyeya, a.

Oyeya, Oyeya, a.

Gyila na wi hafutgEn!

Do not past you cry!

Wul gyinadta's Caledonia.

Because they left behind Caledonia.

Tlats3cle. qgainEgEn.

When you will have eaten rotten salmon heads.

4. Oyeya, 5yeya, a.Oyeya, oyeya, a

GyilVna wa kVdEn daDo not be foolish

GO' lEbElt hglusEm da Indian E1edzEn.

Who against you talk the Indian Agent.

228

Footnote List for Language Sample I

a These phonetic explanations are contained in the footnote at the

the bottom of page 201, the first page of "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-

German). The footnote reads as follows.Since I have included the small word-collection of Mr. Boas in

the following glossary, I would like also to mention his phonetic

explanation here"The vowels have their continental sounds, namelyo a as in

father; e like a in mate; i as in machine; 3 as in note; u as in rule.

in addition the following have been used: a, o as in German; a = aw

in law; E = e in flower. ""Among the consonants the following additional letters have been

used g*, a very guttural g, similar to gr.; k, a very guttural k,similar to kr; q, the German ch in Bach; H, the German ch in ich;

Q, between q and H; c = sh in shore; s = th in thin; tl an explosive,

dorso-apical 1; di a palatal, dorsal 1. (following a consonant

designates the u position of the organs of articulation. "

Tlguanaax

Ein Mg,dchen,

A girl,

tqane

alle

every

sa.

Tage.

day.

dEm

Futurum

(future)

t

er

he

229

III.a

tlguotlga sEmlyit tliwu la wThautga

ein Kind eines liguptlings, immer weint

a child of a chief always crie s

Ada t lEmktTyet nE ga hauktakt

Und ihr Bruder Perfect nehmen seinen Bogen

And he r b rothe r (perfect) to take his bow

g3

s chie s s en

to shoot

le-gaqt

den Raben

the raven

atqa gyalaqt.

go gyagadat kaaqat. Ada

traf einmal den Raben. Und

hit once the raven. And

Ada

Dann

Then

ama

gut

good

draussen.outside.

Ada

Und

And

at1gE sEmhlum

nicht ganz

not completely

tlaPerfect(perfect)

ts akt.todt.

dead.

ts"ElEm g.aat tsa walbEt. Ada wul to

hinein er nimmt ihn in sein Haus. Und dann in

into he takes him in his house. And then in

ot s gaa tlEmktiyet, tsEda tla neEt

ihr Herz seine Schwester, als Perfect sie sah ihn

her heart his sister, as (perfect) she saw him

ts'ElEm gaatga tlEmktiyetga kaaxat. Ada wul

hinein er nahm ihn ihr Bruder den Raben. Und dann

into he took him her brother the raven. And then[[nominative]] [[accusative]]

For atqa, Boas finds no explanation.

1-6 amsga kaotgaa. Si la kearne elEkta sga tsa

in gut ihr Herz. Zusammen sie spielt /nit ihm in

in good her heart. Together she plays with him in

wilpga, adat kiqpat ksErtasga gytlaqka.

dem Hause und sie mitunter sie geht hinaus draussen.

the house and she sometimes she goes out to outside.

/ /NEsga gErElgat

Praeteritum einmal

(Past) once

Ada

Und

And

230

/gyik wult ksE rtgasga gyilaqga.

wieder dann sie ging hinaus draussen.

again then she went out to outside.

/ I

wult gyEpaektga kaaqka. Ada wul

dann er fliegt fort der Rabe. Und dann

then he flies away the raven. And then[[nominative]]

tlEmktiyetga,die Schwester,

the sister,[[nominative]]

ada wul yaagatgaa, nda

und dann sie folgt ihm, WO

and then she follows him, where

wula gyEpaegasga

er fliegthe flies

,

nestga

sie sieht esshe sees it

kgaqka. Adat wul yaagasga

der Rabe. Und dann sie folgt ihm

the raven. And then she follows him[[nominative]]

nE tqa1-L.ndat. Ada ku5t1stakElian ndat

Prgter. hinter ihm. Und sie sieht ihm nach wo

(past)st) behind him. And she looks him toward where

taqaodasga tlEmktiyetga tla naksga waltga. Adat wul

sie ist hinter ihm seine Schwester einige Zeit lang. Und dann

she is behind him his sister for a time. And then[[nominative]]

231

wasga

sie findet es

she finds it

walpsga

das Haus

the house

ndaa

wo

where

.4miansgader Herrthe master

lfaqka.der Krthe.of the crow.

TsEda

Als

As

tla

Perf.(perfect)

ada wul

and dann

and then

tseenter geht hineinhe goes into

kErEtaqsgaer fragt ihnhe asks him

aqtlkate"?2erfolgreich"?successful? "

Ada

Und

And

"Tqal

'Dagegen

"On the contrary

kactHerz

heart

nEguiat.se in Vater. .

his father.

"Ts 'ElErn

"'Hine in

wul

dann

then

tlgu3t1gasga

der Sohn

the son[[nominative]]

tlgu-Outlgat.g

seinen Sohn

his son,[[accusative]]

miansga

des Herrn der Kra:he,

of the master of the crow,

"Atl maata"Warst du

"Were you

daflEmaqtlgasga

er antwortete ihmhe answered him

hayitktgada

sie stehtshe stands

Ada

Und

And

wul

dann

then

hFotktl"! Ada

ruft sie"! Und

calls she !" And

2alth ma da'aklthktTY

gyalaqat".

draussen".outside. "

hautgasga

er sagt zuhe says to

wul

dann

then

tlgualgatga:sein Sohn:

his son,[[nominative]]

Ada

Und

And

wul

dann

then

13 amsga

in gut

in good

tgalwaalErnqtlgatga

seinen Dienern1

his servants,

ksaoxasga

sie gehen hinaus

they go out

232

tqalwaalEmqtlgatga. Ada wul ts'ElEm st5ltgasgala tsa

seine Diener. Und dann hinein sie begleiten sie in

his servants. And then into they accompany her in

/ .witp. Adat wul nakskentgasga tlgu5t1gatgaa.

das Haus. Und dann er lgsst sie ihn heirathen seinen Sohn.

the house. And then he lets her him marry his son.[[accusative]] [[accusative]]

.Ada wul kaedEksga tlEmkayetgaa. Ada bastgasga

Und dann er kommt ihr Bruder. Und er ftirchtet sich

And then he comes her brother. And he is afraid

/ .dEm tseentgasga tsa walpgaa. Ada tkram3

urn hineinzugehen er in das Haus. Und heimlich(?)

to go into he in the house. And secretlyUnominativen

liEtlts gaa

er pas st auf

he pays attention

gyilaqga... gyawunt. Ada wul

draus sen. . . jetzt. Und dann

outside now. And then

ts'ElEmhinein

into

.neetskatsgasgaa, wul ts rElEm leaqas ga mEistaagaa.

er blickt hindurch, wo hinein ein wenig offen ein Astloch.

he looks throughout, where into a little open a knothole.

Ada

Und

And

wul

dann

then

/neetsgaer sieht siehe sees her

[[nominative]]

tlEmkti..tyetga

seine Schwester

his sister

tlaPerf.(perfect)

3If the t in tkl'am still belongs to ada, kam could be anabbreviation of the otherwise frequently occurring gumzin = to be"furtive. " [[Note difference in placement of diacritic' ]]

naksgatgaihren Mann

her husband[[ac cusativell

saga

Tage

days

kaaqkaa.die Kr.glie.

the crow.

skanaqstlange Zeit

long time

tlEmktTyetga,

seine Schwester,

his sister,

mEla

beide

both

wul

dann

then

Ada

Und

And

tlaPe rfectum

(perfect)

er wartethe waits.

tqal

entgegen

fact to face

t'aoqtlk Em

vor Betrtbnisfor sorrow

t1Errikti'yetgaa

ihr Bruderher brother,

bg.k.

weinen.

cry.

"N°dErri

Futurum"(Future)

"Ayin. ErgasEn7...

"Nein. Ich ftIrchte..

"No. " I fear

. .nEitsEn (na)

siehe

"see

Ada

Und

And

waatgasga

.tgoupEl wul gyapsga

zwanzig

twenty

wul

damn.

then

sie findet ihnshe finds him

Ada

Und

And

wul

dann

then

tiky-eeqkEnt".

Entfliehe.

flee. "

dEm

Futurum

ksErsgasie geht hinaus

she goes out

gyilaqga.draus s en.

outside.

hausga

er sagthe says

Ada

Und

And

Ada

Und

And

233

wul

dann

then

wul dFlimgasga:

dann sie antwortet:

then she answers,

tsvikEn". Ada wul:

du stirbst"(future) you die. "

hauktIktil.

den Bogen".

the bow. "

tlEmktTyetga: "Nda

seine Schwester:

his sister,

I I w

"Where

4ma, second person

Ada

Und

And

wul

dann

then

iFtlkEn ada

gehe zurtIck and

go back and

Und dann:

And then,

haus ga

sie sagtshe says

mg4 dakgedEqs

du bringe

you bring

tqain7

alle

all

g4ta dEm sElawant".

Leute Futurum zusammen mit dir".people (future) together with you. "

ietlgatgaasga awaasga

er geht zurtick zu

he goes back

nEguaatga. Adat

seinem Vater.

to his father.

matlgasga

er erza!hlt ihm

he tells him[[nominative]] [[dative]]

tlEmktiyo. Ada

meine Schwe ste r. Und alle Leute

my sister. And all people

Und

And

nEguaatgag tla

seinem Vater: Pe rf.

Ada

Und

And

wul

dann

then

his father, (Perfect)[[dative]]

tqane gyata

wul

dann

then

wa yE

ich fand sie

I found her

dEm st7513,

Futur. begleiten mich,

(future) accompany me,

1

ada dEp dEm is I akuat, ... gaa

and wir werden ihn todten, ...nehmenand we will him kill, to take

wul walqasga5 tqfne"

dann sie gingen alle

then the y went all

234

t lEmkt-iyF5. Ada

meine Schwe ste r . Und

my sister. And

gya"tatasga sEkstFltTaa.

Leute

people

Naksk-cioil walqstgaa.

Einen weiten Weg sie gingen.

A long way they went.

haietgasga walpsga

es stand

it stood

5 waluksh ga

das Haus

the house

sie begleiten ihn.they accompany him.

Adat wul wasga wul

Und dann sie fanden es wo

And then they found it where

sEm.yitdes Hguptlings,

of the chief,

miansga

des Herrn

kaaqka.des Raben.

of the master of the raven.

235

-Adat wul tguatitlkta6 tqane g4tat nokdonsga7

Und dann sie umringen es alle Leute ringsum

And then they surround it all people around

..t.walpga Ada wul tseensga tlEmktiyesga

das Haus. Und dann er geht hinein der Bruderthe house. And then he goes in the brother

/tlgua hanaaqt. IK'.mtsEn ts eentgasga,

des (kleinen Weibes) Mg.dchens. Heimlich er geht hinein,

of the (little wife) girl. Secretly he goes in,

/ /hakl'iosga

8 tlEmktryetga. Adat wul m-Stltga as neter tritt hinter seine Schwester. Und dann er erzghlt ihr:

he steps behind his sister. And then he tells her,

"Amt'Et1 ksErEn gyilaqat. Ada wul

Imperativ gehe hinaus draussen. Und dann

"(Imperative) go out to outside. And then

tla dEm koai..1 walp /guaa . Ada wul

wir werden niedergerissen haben Haus dieses". Und dann

we will torn down have house this. " And then

ksErEsgasie ging hinaus

hanaaqta. Adat ksetqaia-guasga 9

die Frau. Und sie nimmt ihn heraus (?)

she went out the wife. And she takes him out (?)[[accusative]]

6 tgwadaltk, # 1197noktVon- doesn't appear otherwise; a substantive in all

probability; should it perhaps be naqudZin?8hagau, # 1989perhaps ksha-tk7.-yak... out, completely, follows-- -she her

husband. [[See next page ]]

236

nakstga. Ada wul koa2. lasga wa_L 1ptgaa. Ada

ihren Mann. Und dann reissen sie nieder das Haus. Und

her man. And then tear they down the house. And[[accusative]]

wul ts 'akusga miansgaa leaaqka... Ada wul

dann sie tOdten ihn den Herrn des Raben... Und dann

then they kill him the master of the raven. And then

qts ak its En

sie schneiden ab

they cut off

t'Emlane"

seinen Hats

his neck

adat

und sie

and they

hgasga

nehmen

take

n't'Emk'iustEt.seinen Kopf.

his head.

Adat sigEranot, adat nEnsuwatga datl

Und sie trocknen ihm, und sie nennen ihn den

And they dry it, and they call him the

WilbatlkEtllaax. Ada wul sarait hLsga gyatga

Skalpirten,

scalped one.

Und

And

dann

then

zusammen

together

sie sprechenthey speak

die Leute'g

the people,

A dEmt tsakusgaa

Futurum wir tOdten

(Future) we kill

atlgaatnicht sie (will es)not she (wants it)

waldEt.

naksga

den Mann

the husband

tlgua hanaaggaa. Ada

der kleinen Frau. Und

of the little wife. And

/hanaaqt dEmt hfyetstEt. Ada

die Frau Futur. sie schickt ihn fort. Und

the wife (future) she sends him away. And

I\TFik'an

er thut es. Allmlhlich

he does it. Gradually

wihgidE

viele

many

keal'aqk"a-i

Raben

raven

gyawun.

jetzt.now

237

IV.

Die Wihalait.

The Wihalait [[Great Dance]]

Gye atigE twulait

Vor langer Zeit nicht sie wussten es

A long time ago not they knew it

tEtlgyatl Wihalait2

GIErElt i"OotEt

die vormals lebenden Menschen den grossen Tanz. Ein Mann

the formerly living human beings the great dance. One man

qsqaneistEt3 a dEmt gO"

(ging) auf die Berge um (Futur. , Absicht) zu schiessen

(went) up the mountains in (future, intent) order to shoot

mE'te. Tla t wa sqane-list ada wult

Bergziegen.

mountain goats.

Perf.(Perfect)

erhe

fand

found

den Berg,

the mountain,

und

and

dann

then

n-elisga mEsicilla. Adat wul ya/aka, ada

er sah ihn den weissen Baren. Und er dann er folgte, und

he saw him the white bear. And he then he followed, and

1= lthagiat.2hala/it = to dance, wT = great, also: the great dance (in con-

trast to the ordinary dance: Shimhalait). Wihalait is often alsocalled Ola la. The three names Ola la, Niiiot lam and MElitla are loanwords, which are taken from the Kwakiutl language. The dance, andthe ceremonies belonging to it, originally belonged only to theKwakiutl tribe [[but]] have spread, in the course of time, to theirneighbors (Boas). [[See footnote a, Ethnographic Introduction]]

3Is qsqangis- an abbreviated plural form? In the Gospel trans-lations: shg.unish (singular), shikshganish (plural).

wul t g"O'ut kasga4 hauw1/1. Ada wul bVts gEtEt

dann er s chos s ihn den Pfeil. Und dann er traf ihn,

then he shot it the arrow. And then he hit him,

nda anaheatEtwo seine Seite,

where his side

yVakatEt. Tla

folgte ihm. Nach

followed him. After

238

mEs '74a. Adat wul

den weissen Bgren. Und er dann

the white bear.

nakska 5 wulb

And he

ia/atEt.

then

Adat wul

einer Weile da ging er. Und er dann

a while then went he. And he then

/was ga sqariF/istEt. Ada wul tse'En

fand ihn den Berg. Und dann er trat einfound it the mountain. And then he made his appearance

mEs'O"la tsEmder weisse Bg,r in

the white bear in[[nominative]]

lia-/yitgat tqa6

er stand ganz

he stood completely

sqanE#ist. Adat wul tqal

den Berg. Und er dann gegen

the mountain. And he then toward [[at]]

gya'laqt. Ada wul ksEr gEreltadraussen. Und dann herausgeht ein

outside. And then comes out one

gyetat wa/tgatat7 tsEm sqanF'ist. Adat wul

Mann, herausgekommen er in dem Berge. Und er dann

man, come out he in the mountain. And he then

4 kasga = gish ga.5= ltha naksh ga.6= tka.7 = wItk gut

tsEiE'm hVotgatEtasga tsa w71p. Adat wul

hinein er rief ihn in das Haus. Und er dann

into he called him in the house. And he then

d'VtatEt8 nEsimi5uwan w5.711pEt. Adat wul

er setzt ihn zur rechten Seite des Hauses. Und er dann

he sets him on the right side of the house. And he then

n7iiska 9

sah

saw

239

tqalpqata natVtltatla gyatatasga tsE wa'lpEt.

vier Gesellschaften Leute in dem Hause.

four society people in the house.{{secret society members]]

Adat wul dEmtkunVitsEn wulalVotEt (?) Ksk`Voq

Und er dann sah sie was sie thaten (?). Die ersten

And he then saw them what they did (?). The first

mkung'itsEn MF'itla wulalVotEt. Tla Ica.'odEtl° ada

du sahst sie die Weit la was sie thaten. Darnach und

you saw them the MEitla what they did. Afterward and

kyekc tkung'itsEnt NVotlEm wulareodEt. TlakEodE

dann er sah sie die ITOlotlEm was sie thaten. Darnach

then he saw them the NO-Intlem what they did. Afterward

adat wul t mgt1 dEm sEwulaligyEmrasga

und er dann er erzghlt ihm, Fut. er soll es lehren

and he then he tells him, (future) he shall it teach

8dhl.

9nish ga.101tha goudi.

240

nts '51Iptga , tsEda tla i'e'tlget. Tlak'VodEt

seinem Volke, wenn Perf. er zuruckkehrt. Darnach

to his people, when (perfect) he returns. Afterward

ada wul kyek tkunVitzEnt Wihalait wulalVotEt.

und da dann er sah sie den grossen Tanz was sie thaten.and then then he saw them the great dance what they did.

Ada tqa'ne" gFupElt wul natatltrvti gya'tat sEmralUnd alle zwei dann Gesellschaften Leute sehrAnd all two then society people very

lEbVstEt a Wihalaitat. Tlakg'odEt adat wul

sie farchteten den grossen Tanz. Darnach und er dann

they feared the great dance. Afterward and he then

m5:/t1tasga i.F'ot: dEm wulawFldEt, tsEda

sagte zu ihm der Mann: Fut. zu thun also, wenn

said to him the man, (future) to do thus, when[[nominative]]

tla iVtlgetasga nkalts'apt. Tlaka'odEtPerf. er zuritIckkehrt (in) seine Stadt. Darnach

(perfect) he returns (to) his city. Afterward

k ka8gac ( ? )11EinVitsEn tca'ne nVEt12 dEm

was er gesehen hat alles er Fut.

what he seen has everything he (future)

11= gau ga (tlanT gau = all things, see # 65).12nTat.

wulawaldEt.

er thut also.he does thus.

Tlak-if odEt

Darauf

Thereupon

241

Ada wul gyek k"VedEks SEmhalai'clEt...

Und da dann er kommt zu dem wahren Tanze.

And then then he comes to the true dance.

tla gutle? sEt skana'x 15 d'a/tEtasga

Perf. drei Tage lange drinnen er sass

(perfect) three days long inside he sat

tsEm sqanevistEt nEwEtlda gutlE/dat k'gtl. Ada wult

im Berge gerade wie drei Jahre. Und dann er

in the mountain exactly like three years. And then he

ksEr dEmt halyetsasga nk"alts'a/ptgaa. Tla

geht heraus Fut. sie schicken ihn in sein Dorf. (Perf. )

goes out (future) they send him to his village. (perfect)

t wa nk' alts Ta/ptEt. Ada

er fand sein Dorf. Und

he found his village. And

wul

dann

then

lE igw5Yntg atEt 13

er stieg aufhe climbed up

n laq

auf den

on the

ts'uw-en kant klailyemawasga nk'alts'apga. Adat wul

Gipfel des Baumes nahe seinem Dorfe. Und dann

top of the tree near his village. And then

neistga tqa/nE gyaltEt tla kVEdEkst.

sie sahen ihn alle Leute (Perf. ) er kam.

they saw him all people (perfect) he came.

13 13 = in, to, up, see # 108. gw"intk --- (in the Gospel transla-tions) touch upon, border on.

Mskanl/kt14Nach einer Wei le

After a while

ada

und

and

wul

dann

then

tgy7

herunterdown here

242

k'S.'edEksasga wa'tgadat

er kam von

he came from

na laq ts'uwa/n kant. Tgy7

auf seinem Gipfel des Baumes. Herunter

on his top of the tree. Down here

iVadater ging

he moved

a hak (?) kVodEt... Ada wult ga'asgEt

beschwerlich ( ?) auf seinem Und dann er nahm ihn

with difficulty ( ?) on his back. And then he took him

leg/ltga gya'tga adat ga/pdat

einen Menschen und er ass ihnone human being and he ate him[[accusative]]

tla tsgitldat.(Perf. ) er ass ihn auf(perfect) he ate him up.

Adat gyek wul ka nista15 kig/ldat. Tla k'VodEt

Und er wieder dann noch einen. Darauf

And he again then another. Thereupon

ga"psga wihVldEt. Ada wul h5'ut gyatatasga

er ass sie viele. Und dann sie flohen die Leute

he ate them many. And then they fled the people

lEb'estEt. M sk'anI/ktEt ada wult

sie ftirchteten sich. Nach einer Weile und dann

they were afraid. After a while and then

14msk'ana'kt will be identical with am shg.anakt (Mark 14:35,14.70).

15 ka will probably be gay nishta see # 291, Addenda.

243

kitieggita 16 gya'tga iVotga. Adat wul

sie nahmen ihn fest die Leute den Mann. Und dann

they him the people the man. And thenapprehended Raccusativen

haldVotEt. Msklan-a/ktEt ada wul a/msga

sie heilten ihn. Nach einer Wei le und dann gut

they healed him. After a while and then good

io"'otasga.

der Mann.

the man.[[nominative]]

,ma otgata

er war gesund

he was well

Skuai'it17 haldgfotEt. Tla

Al le Tage ( ?) sie heilten ihn. (Perf.

Every day (?) they healed him. (Perfect)

iVotEt. Adat wul sE wurVigyemqa

der Mann. Und dann er lehrte siethe man. And then he taught them

gyafta t. Ada

die Leute. Und

the people. And

tqalpq wul natEtltattla gyaltat

vier dann Gesellschaften die Leute

four then society the people

wu la la/ ditl gy7lky

sie machen es wie der grosse Ta.nz, und wieder

they do it like the great dance, and again

wulalYsie machen es ebenso

they do it just

N5tla'mtat,wie die NalEm,like the Naintlem,

ditl

und

and

gye-ky

wieder

again

16 gidigI.17Since sk'uai/it does not occur otherwise, it is to be thought

very close to tkinT (= every, all, see # 235).

244

wulalg.' nakgtsglotEt. A dEmt ga'pa

sie machen es ebenso die anderen. Fut. sie essen sie

they do it like the others. (Future) they eat them

g ya 'tat diti halsEt tqan.F.

die Leute and Hunde auf solche Weise alle.

the people and dogs in such a way all.

245

Footnote List for Language Samples III and IV

aNote the placement of the diacritic throughout Language

Sample III and occasionally in Language Sample IV. This placement

of is also found in Chapters IV and VI. In the 1889 Boas Report the

diacritic is always placed following the letter. It is assumed thatthe placement of the diacritic above rather than following the letter inthe material borrowed from Boas is Schulenburg's adaptation of the

Boas diacritic.b In Schulenburg's Tsimshian language grammar and glossary,

the two German words "da" and "dann" appear to be interchangeable

and = "then" in English.In "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German), p. 308: wul (B. ) see

wil

In "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German), p. 307 the second

listing under wil is: = da, dann (that which has just made itself mani-

fest). The third entry under wil is: ## 207, 322.

cAlthough in "Die Wihalait" "kyek" and "gyek" both appear

translated into German by Schulenburg as "dann" [[then]], the sharedlisting for "kyek" and "gyek" in "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German), p. 231 is: gik (B.: gyik) = and also, likewise, too, as well,again, anew, furthermore.

The second entry under gik is: Luke 14:12, 14:6, 4:41.

John 10.31, 16:28, 21:17. Matt. 18:19. ## 170, 287, 289.

Later, toward the end of "Die Wihalait" "gyek, " "gye-lky, " and

`gyeky" are all translated into German by Schulenburg as "wieder"

[[again]].

246

V.

Some Passages from the Common Prayer

1 Page 19: Na amsh ga MTyan gut Jesus Christ, dilth nashrebunsh gish ga Shimoigiat ga lakaga, dilth na shila walumsh gish

ga Am da Haiik ga dum gup lthawila hoksh ga da da gum.

Translations with Notes: Die Gnade (am = gut) des Herrn Jesu

Christi (vergl. na, # 48), und die Liebe Gottes, und (das Zusam-menthun, s. # 12, a) die Gemeinschaft des Heiligen Geistes sei mit unsimmerdar (gup: ## 133, 182, 272, 294).

The grace (am = good) of our Lord Jesus Christ (compare na,

# 48), and the love of God, and (das Zusammenthun, a see # 12, a) the

fellowship of the Holy Gost, be with us evermore (g.up: ## 133, 182,

2-2,294).

2, Page 14: Shimhoudikshand gish ga gup gault ga Shimoigiat

ga NagwIt ga: Tkagutgiatk ga ga: Inzabsh ga laka-ga dilth halizokum

adat Jesus Christ ga gupgaulu Lthelth gut ga, MTyanum ga: gu nagoidukshit gish ga Am da Haiikt ga: kshlaklak gish ga whagulgiatkgish Mary hagunsh dup Pontius Pilate: tkaldapgunt gish ga lakkuzak, ada zakt ga ada wakshit ga; tikidaoulthgish ga habsh ga dh-dit

ga kwun sha diga sha ga ada gik ginrat gut ga watgut gish ga shpugaitdhait ga° ada mEnda.oulth gish ga zim laka-ga; ada dhat gish ga na

shimyounsh ga anonsh ga Shimoigiat ga, Nagwat ga, Tkagutgiat ga ga.

Dum gik goiduksh ga dum watgut gish ga kwash ga a dumt dapsh ga

dildoishit ga dilth dhdit ga. Shimhoudikshanif da Am da Haiikut: dilth

am da shugait gdilum Churchut: dilth n'shilawal da uma.m dit: dilth

shalthilth ga na hadadak gut: dilth dum gik nhanTada tkamaud: dilth

aiegedum gundid51shit. Amen.

247

Translations with Notes: Ich glaube (## 79 ff. ) an den einenj## 133, 182, 272, 294) Gott, den Vater, den Allnilchtigen (tka> ## 117,

238), den Sch8pfer (zap) des Himmels und der Erde, und an JesumChristum, seinen eingebornen Sohn (ga ...# 51), unsern Herrn,welcher (# 63) empfangen ist (# 285) vom Heiligen Geiste, geboren

(kshalaklak ist Singular, wg.hrend die Pluralform: kshaqulthal, # 34)von der Jungfrau (## 109, 259) Maria, gelitten (Flak) unter Pontius

Pilatus, angeschlagen (# 110) auf (# 189) ein Kreuz und er istgestorben und er ist begraben (wVak); er ist niedergefahren (# 98) zur

H011e ist Plural zu zak, statt hIlash vielleicht haksh = Qual ? hap

= gehen -), am dritten (## 209, 213) Tage wieder auferstanden von

(## 12 b, 34. 200 201, 246, 247; shpagait # 192) den Todten, und er ist

heraufgefahren (# 96) in (zum # 188) den Himmel und er sitzt zurrechten Hand Gottes, des Vaters, des Allmgchtigen. Er wird

76, 131, 207, 322) wieder (## 179, 287, 289) kommen von (wgtk) hier

(## 54, 55, 138), urn (## 207, 340) zu richten die Lebendigen und die

Todten. Ich glaube an den Heiligen Geist (da ## 49, 50) und eine

heilige zusammen einige (## 127, 209, 211) Kirche und eine Gemein-

schaft der Heiligen (anigm) und an eine Vergebung lOsen, shad

# 104) der Stinden (# 36) und an ein Wieder-Auferstehen der Leiber undein ewiges Leben. Amen.

I believe (## 79 ff. ) in one (## 133, 182, 272, 294) God the Father

Almighty (tka: ## 117, 238), Maker (zap)b of heaven and earth and inJesus Christ his only begotten Son (ga # 51) our Lord, who (# 63)

is conceived (# 285) by the Holy Ghost, born (kshalaklakc is singular,

whereas the plural form: kshaqulthgl, # 34) of the Virgin Mary, suf-

fered (a-5,k) d under Pontius Pilate, nailed (# 110) to (# 189) a cross,

and he died, and he is buried (wai ak);e he descended (# 98) to hell (du

is the plural of zak, f instead of habsh perhaps Eaksh = torment, agony,

pain' - hap = to go-), on the third (## 209, 213) day rose again from

248

(## 12b, 34, 200, 201, 246, 247; shpagait, # 192) the dead, and he

ascended (# 96) into (zum # 188) heaven, and he sits on the right hand

of God the Father Almighty. He will (## 76, 131, 207, 322) come again

from (watk)g thence (## 54, 55, 138) in (## 207, 340) order to judge the

living and the dead. I believe in the Holy Ghost (da: ## 49, 50), and a

holy unified (## 127, 209, 211) church, and a communion of saintsh(amqm), and in a forgiveness (lthri =7 to absolve; sha: # 104) of sins

(# 36), and in a resurrection of bodies, and an eternal life. Amen.

3. Page 16: 0 Miyan gwunTazun na gumgaudint a lakomt. Ada

ma ginam na gunlTmaut gunt a gum. 0 Miyan dimaut gish Queen. Ada

gumgaudun nakniTm a dup da hint gunt. WishwIshun na Ministers gunt

a hoigiak a dit. Ada ma sha galthgwushgri da na kshnaknishgum

z-a..punt. 0 Miyan dilamaut ga n'zapunt. Ada ma gumgaudk ga na

giant. Ginamlth gungiaksh a ashTt nringumi 0 Miyan. Awul althgat

gig: na za t'in lth5;num amuksha ntingunt 0 Shimoigiat. 0 ShimoigiatliTshikshakshun gagaudumi. Ada gilau ma za kbaga nflth5duk shim

Haiikunt a gum.

Translations with Notes: 0 Herr, erzeige (nT) deine (# 48)

Gnade (gum, gaud) an uns (lak). Und gieb dein Heil an uns. 0 Herr,

erhalte (maut, di-: 102, 249) die K5nigin. Und gnN:dig erho're uns,

wenn wir dick rufen. Bekleide (wash) deine Diener mit Gerechtigkeit.

Und mache (sha: # 104) frOhlich (lthgwishgri) dein auserw`g.hltes (nT)

Volk. 0 Herr, hilf (# 31) deinem Volke. Und segne dein Erbtheil.Gieb (# 123) Frieden, so lange (## 207, 321) wir (leben), o Herr. Denn

(Ewil) kein Anderer (# 71) ist dabei (# 52) far uns (ltha- num.), aus-

genommen (## 181, 292) du (nugun) o Gott. 0 Gott mache rein inwendig

(# 107) unsere Herzen. Und nicht (# 270) (za: # 132) nimm fort (# 97)

dienen heiligen (statt "im" ist "um" zu denken, # 127) Geist bei uns.

249

0 Lord, show (nT)i thy (# 48) mercy (gum, zaud)j to us (lak)k.

And grant thy salvation to us. 0 Lord, preserve 1(maut, di-: # 102,

249) the queen. And mercifully hear us whenever we call thee.Clothe (wash)m thy servants with righteousness. And make (sha: 104)thy chosen (nT)n people joyful (lthgwishgri).° 0 Lord, help (# 31) thy

people. And bless thine inheritance. Grant (# 123) peace as long

(## 207, 321) as we (live), 0 Lord. For (awil)P none other (# 71) ishere (# 52) for us (ltha-nurn)q thou (nu,gun)r excepted (## 181, 292), 0

God. 0 God, make clean our hearts within (# 107). And take not

(# 270) (za: # 132) thy Holy (is to be thought "urn" # 127 instead of

) Spirit away from (# 97) us.

4. Page 28: Gumgautk ga Shimoigiat ga lakaga a gum, ada

dumt gumgautk gum ga: ada dumt sha gugwaluksh ga zalt ga gum.

Dam wul wilaiintk ga wilaigTaunt a lak halizokut: na amawIlum gun

dirnaudumsh gunt a tkani wilzokzokut. Am dumt ama-dalgun giatit 0Shimoigiat: am tkanT giat a dumt 'in ama-dalgunt. Am dumgulthshkwushghtlada wilzokzoka ada dum wramlahou da dit: wul ma

dum hoigiakum dapa giatit, ada ma dum dadauntk ga wilzokzokut a lakhalizokut. Am dumt ama-dalgun giatit 0 Shimoigiat: am tkanT giat adumt in arna-dalgunt. Dum dagoiduksha yob a na gian dit: adaShimoigiat ga lakaga lip Shimoigiat gum ga dumt 'in gumgautk gum ga.

Dumt gumgautk ga num ga Shimoigiat ga lakgga: ada tkanT wilgak ga

halizokut dumt 'in shuulgunt ga. Dum shugait n'lthaumsh ga ga

Nagwat ga: dilth Ltheilth ga ga, gunith Am da Haiikut. Na guni

wilawalt gishga wilhT-shidhat ga ga gik waldi growl: ada gup ltha dum

wila walda wugait althga dum shabat. Amen.

Translations with Notes: Gria:dig (gaud) sei Gott uns, und er

mOge uns segnen, und er lasse (sha # 104) leuchten sein Antlitz auf

uns. Auf dass (## 207, 340) erkannt werde (wilai-in) sein Weg (gaina)

250

auf der Erde, sein Heil alien Heiden. Es sollen (# 274) loben dich dieMenschen, o Gott: es sollen alle Menschen # 49, 52) dich loben.

Es sollen sich freuen (lthgwishei) (gulth = gwilth, umher, uberall) dieVOlker und sollen es laut ausrufen; denn du wirst in gerechter Weise(hoigia,gum, # 127) richten die Menschen und du wirst fUhren die

Vnker auf der Erde. Es sollen loben dich die Menschen, o Gott: essollen alle Menschen dich loben. Es wird das Land bringen(golduksh = kommen, da: # 103) seine Frucht, und Gott selbst (# 53),

unser Gott, mOge uns segnen. Es m8ge segnen uns Gott, und jedes

Volk ("wilzok" wird wohl gemeint sein) auf (a, a: # 206, a) der Erde

ftirchte (shawilgun) ihn. Es sollen zusammen geehrt sein der Vater

und der Sohn und der Heilige Geist. Wie es war im Anfang, so soil

es auch jetzt (gra5n) sein # 12, a): und es soil so sein bis

(wagait) in Ewigkeit. Amen.

God be merciful (gaud)s to us and may he bless us and let (sha:

104) his countenance shine upon us. In order that (## 207, 340) histway (gaina) be known (wilai-in) upon earth, his salvation to all hea-

thens. The people shall (# 274) praise thee, 0 God; all people (t'in:

## 49, 52) shall praise thee. Nations shall rejoice (lthgwishgu)v

(gulch = gwilth, w around, everywhere) and shall proclaim loudly; forthou wilt judge the people righteously (hoigiagum: # 127), and thou

wilt lead the nations upon the earth. The people shall praise thee, 0

God; all people shall praise thee. The earth will bring forth (goiduksh

to come; da: # 103) its fruit, and may God himself (# 53), our God,bless us. May God bless us, and every nation (probably meant to be

uwilz51(11)x upon (a, a # 206, a) the earth fear (shriwilgun)Y him. The

Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost shall together be honored. As itwas in the beginning so shall it also now (gTai5n)z be (va..1: # 12, a),

as

ccand it shall be until (wagait)bb eternity. Amen.

251

Footnote List for Language Sample V

adas Zusammenthun, an infinitive functioning as a noun: a put-

ting together, an association. The old spelling has th for t in -than

(= tun).

bzap, in "The Glossary" (Tsimshian-German): (B.: ts'ap) =

to make, create, build (singular).John 9:14, 2:15; Mark 10:6, 12:1, 14:58.

This citation of "The Glossary!' (Tsimshian-German) serves forthe subsequent glosses of Tsimshian words in these translations of

passages from the Common Prayer. Inserted into the German

translation, these Indian words are preserved in the English transla-

tion of the German. All those Tsimshian words are glossed which

do not have an accompanying reference to section numbers in "The

Grammar. "ckshalaklak, see sixth entry under laklak (singular): to be born.

Luke 2:11; John 9:1; Mark 14:21.

qultha-1, see seventh entry under laklak (singular): plural of

laklak.Matt. 13:4; Mark 4:4; John 18:6.

kshaqulthal, see tenth entry under laklak (singular): to be

born, (plural of kshalaklak).John 1:13.

ksha-, see ksha-: is a prefix which indicates the direction"'out". [[It indicates movement from inside a place as seen by the per-

son outside. ]]Luke 13:28, 20:12, 24:50; Mark 9:47, 1:43, 1:45, 5:40,

etc.

See # 106.

252

d -hak, see second hak listing: torment, agony, torture, tosuffer pain.

Luke 24:46; Mark 9:12.

[[Also see hagun, the second entry under the second ha( listing:

to torture, torment, cause pain.Mark 5:7; Luke 8:28; Matt. 21:41. ]]

ewa ak: to bury, inter.John 12:7; Matt. 14:12, 25:18.

fzak: (B.: ts'ak and ds'ak') = to die (singular).Luke 7:12; Matt. 2:15; John 6:50, 11:16, 11:39;

Mark 5:39, 12:20, 12:22, 14:31.

dii, see first entry under zak: du is plural of zak.Luke 24:5, 24:46; John 8:21, 12:1; Mark 6:14, 12:18;

Matt. 2:20 (B.: dEr).

gwak: (passive of wa) "come" [[past participle form inGerman]] also has the meaning "originate (in)" or "proceed (from), "

"to be from something here [[to this place]]. "

John 7:27, 9:16.

[[See also ## 12, b; 200; 246]]

h _amam, see third entry under am, ama: (B.: ama/m) is theplural of am.

Matt. 9:13, 13:43, 13:45, 25:37, 25:46, 7:11.am, ama: (B.: am) = good, righteous, just, pious, devout,

religious (singular).Luke 2:10, 18:18; Mark 15:43.

In the meaning "holy" (Holy Ghost):

Luke 4:1; Matt. 1:18; John 1:33, 14:26, 20:22;

Mark 1:1, 1:8.

253

_ see first nT listing: (B.: ne) = to see (singular).

Mark 12:15.

[[Also see gwunTazun, the fifth entry under nT: to have

[[[something]]] seen, i.e. , [[[to cause or permit something to be

seen]]], to show. ]]

jgumgaud [[compare this form entered in "The Glossary" with

the two forms gum, gaud in the language sample]] see third entryunder gaud: (B.: ramrVd) = 1) to have compassion, pity; to have or

show mercy; to forgive, pardon.Mark 11:25, 10:47, 10:48, 5:19; Luke 1:54, 1:78.

[[See footnote s and # 45 for gum, .g.aud ]1

47,35.

klak: (B.: laq) = a preposition with the meaning "on, " "upon. "Luke 10:10, 15:15; Mark 13:3, 4:4, 6:49; John 13:28,

# 189.

1maut(k) [[compare this form entered in "The Glossary" with the

form maut found in the language sample]]: = healthy, well, healed,

blessed.Luke 7:10, 15:27; Mark 5:28, 8:25, 11:12.

dimaut(k), see the third entry under maut(k): (compare the

prefix di-):Luke 8:36, 1:71; Mark 15:31.

See under di-: is a prefix whose meaning is "to become," "to

make. "

Luke 6:19, 18:26; Mark 6:5, 15:31, 10:26; Matt. 20:24.

See ## 102, 249.

mwash: dress (singular), wishwash (plural).Mark 10:50, 10:5, 15:30; John 19:24; Mark 11:7, 15:24;

Luke 244, 2:7; John 19:24.

254

See second entry under wash: to clothe, to dress.Mark 15:17; Matt. 6:31, 25:36.

n _ni; see footnote i, the fifteenth entry under nT:

kshanTshk (singular), kshanaknTshk (plural): chosen,

selected; to choose, to select.Luke 9:35; Matt. 22:14.

olthgwishgri: to rejoice, to be glad (singular).John 3:29, 8:56; Luke 1:44, 15:5.

Pa- wil: for [[because]].

See ## 207,339.

ciltha-: (B.: tla) = that which is completed and lasts or con-tinues. In compounds: # 20, 5. In the chapter on the verb: # 76.

As a conjunction we translate it with "as" or "when. "

See ## 207, 282, 322.

num, see under num: (dependent pronominal form) see # 47, e.rnuzun: personal pronoun (independent) of the second person

singular = you [[familiar form in German but the distinction between

familiar and formal forms does not exist in Tsimshian]].Mark 8:29; Luke 1:76, 4:34; Matt. 16:18, 16:23, 16:16,

1g20, 267:3.

(B.: nerEn).## 45, 46.

s.g,aud: (B.: leVot) = heart, mind, spirit, feeling, intellect

(singular).

Mark 10:22, 12:30.

[[Also see g,umLautk, found under the second meaning for

g.umgaud; which is the third entry under _gaud: blessed, highly praised.]]

Luke 14:14; Mark 44:61.

[[See footnote j]]

t g_aina, see first gaina listing: way, road, path, course,

u

direction.Luke 3:4; Mark 11:8.

(Compare gakzaina = street, road, highway).

255

U. . -in

wilai: (B.: wu15.4) = to know a fact, or to have knowledge of a

fact; to be acquainted with (singular) [[to know]].John 11:24, 3:2, 7:27, 4:10, 7:29; Mark 12:12, 15:10;

Luke 24:16.

in: see t'in.t'in: (B.: tEi'n) the [[masculine article in German]] and the

[[feminine article in German]] (with others being there and taking

part).It indicates individuals who, present during events, were

participants [[in the events]] (a type of article).## 49, 52.

vlthgwishga: See footnote o.

gulth = gwilth: indicates that something repeats or continues

or occurs in different locations ("everywhere, " "around").

Mark 6:7, 12:16, 12:15, 1:45; John 5:9; Luke 2:17, 3:3.

See # 91.

xwilzok [[compare form found in "The Glossary" with that in thelanguage sample]], see second entry under zok: (singular) nation.

Luke 21:10; Mark 13:8.

Yshuwilgun: to be afraid of, to respect or esteem.Luke 20:13; Mark 12:6; Matt. 22:16.

z (B.: gya wun, k a wun) = now.

John 4:23, 17:5, 17:7.

256

aa _wal: see also # 245.bbwazait: preposition with the meaning "until, " "up to. "

John 13:1, 16:24, 12:25; Mark 13:27; Luke 23:5.

See # 203.

ccSee Psalm 67.

257

CORRECTIONS AND ADDENDA

Page 10: The example "to strike d'O'oc (singular), d!Ecdooc(plural)" mentioned in # 29 is to be deleted. Compare dosh... in # 27.

Page 12, # 34: To be read klthnash-giTut (singular) and klthna-

dauk (plural) instead of klthna-dauk (singular) and klthna-shgliut

(plural). [[The correction itself contained a typographical error: forthe to-be-corrected item klthna-shguut (plural), Schulenburg hadklthna-schguut (plural). ]]

Page 12, # 38: "To rise, stand up, get up" and "to rise fromthe dead" ginTat (singular) and nanTat (plural) may also belong here.

Page 24, # 48: Read "identical" instead of "indentical. "Page 32, line 4: Read "Menschen" instead of "Manschen. "

[[# 54, example a, Matt. 23:36]]Page 57, line 1: Read "klthiiun" instead of "kthriun. " [[# 94]]

Page 88: Under the adverbs of place "geluksh = backwards,back" and "za.ga = right across, diagonally, nearly opposite" alsobelong. [[Added to "The Grammar" following # 151, at the end of the

section on adverbs of place. ]]

Page 88, # 148: Read Mark 11:16 instead of Matthew 11:16Page 88, # 150: Read "qudakshash" instead of "quadakshash. "

Page 91, # 163: Read "a few places" instead of "one place. "Page 107, # 208: Htsaq! = oh shame! oh fie!" also belongs

here.Page 112, # 211d: The style of writing "gume't" (John 6:22)

instead of writing "gam'met" is also found.Page 117, # 222b: In the example John 6:71 "dupkad5lt" is to be

read instead of "duqkad6lt.

Page 112, # 232: Read "gup" instead of 'guq. [[This correc-tion was unnecessary since "gup" not "guq" was already present. ]]

2.58

Page 145, # 291: "gimgia" could have the meaning yet

in addition besides. " (John 12:1, 16:12).

[[The following are corrections in an addenda to "The Glossary. HaPage 203a: "shagiaksh" is to be deleted under "aksh. "

Page 208a: "baq s. under yez" is to be placed under "baq (B. )

s. bak." [[s. = see. ]]

Page 216a: "crcimuksh found in kshadomuksh (see there)" is to

be placed under "dElsh... "Page 216b: "dsTs see under rEla" [[rE/la]] is to be placed

under "dsTir... " [[dsTi/r]].

Page 217a: " is assumed to be "oldluklthk found in

ladaluklthk (see there). "Page 233a: "g'a aYedEksh = to visit" is to be added to the

section on "zoiduksh. "

Page 236b: ".g.ulTen (g.a-lien?) = to commit adultery, Matt. 532,

19:9" is to be placed under "gulTamuksh..Page 238b: "gushTlsh" belongs under shilsh (see there).

as and b following the page number stand for each of the two col-umns found on every page of "The Glossary. "

259

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Am da malshk ga na damsh St. Matthew ligi The Gospel accordingto St. Matthew. Translated into Zimshian [by William Ridley,Bishop of Caledonia]. London: Society for the Promotion ofChristian Knowledge, [1885].

Am da malshk ga na damsh St. Mark ligi The Gospel according toSt. Mark. Translated into Zimshian [by William Ridley,Bishop of Caledonia]. London: Society for the Promotion ofChristian Knowledge, [1887].

Am da malshk ga na damsh St. Luke ligi The Gospel according toSt. Luke. Translated into Zimshian [by William Ridley,Bishop of Caledonia]. London: Society for the Promotion ofChristial Knowledge, [1887].

Am da malshk ga na damsh St. John ligi The Gospel according toSt. John. Translated into Zimshian [by William Ridley,Bishop of Caledonia]. London: Society for the Promotion ofChristian Knowledge, [1889].

Photocopies of the four Gospels were obtained from theLibrary of the S. P.C.K. , Holy Trinity Church, MarleboneRoad, London, NW1 4DU. The Catalogue of the British Museumalso lists each of the four Gospels.

Boas, Franz. "First General Report on the Indians of BritishColumbia 'III Tsimshian. " British Association for theAdvancement of Science. Vol. 59. London: John Murray,1890. 877-89.

Das Neue Testament [The New Testament]. Berlin: Britische andAuslgndische Bibelgesellshaft, 1929. (Pages facing the Germantext contain the English translation. )

King James Version of the Bible. New York: The Modern Library,1943.

Schulenburg's Tsimshian grammar - Oregon State University

Documents

Transcript of Schulenburg's Tsimshian grammar - Oregon State University